Scripture · Sanskrit Bible with the King James Version · the Pāli Canon

Search Scripture Search

Long Discourses 33 दीघनिकाय 33

Chapter: 12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334

Saṅgītisutta

Pāli in Devanagari; under each word its Roman pronunciation, syllable by syllable (ṃ = nasal hum). Tap a Pāli word for its meaning (PTS Pāli-English Dictionary); tap again to open it in the Pāli dictionary.

Verse: 123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960616263646566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150151152153154155156157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208209210211212213214215216217218219220221222223224225226227228229230231232233234235236237238239240241242243244245246247248249250251252253254255256257258259260261262263264265266267268269270271272273274275276277278279280281282283284285286287288289290291292293294295296297298299300301302303304305306307308309310311312313314315316317318319320321322323324325326327328329330331332333334335336337338339340341342343344345346347348349350351352353354355356357358359360361362363364365366367368369370371372373374375376377378379380381382383384385386387388389390391392393394395396397398399400401402403404405406407408409410411412413414415416417418419420421422423424425426427428429430431432433434435436437438439440441442443444445446447448449450451452453454455456457458459460461462463464465466467468469470471472473474475476477478479480481482483484485486487488489490491492493494495496497498499500501502503504505506507508509510511512513514515516517518519520521522523524525526527528529530531532533534535536537538539540541542543544545546547548549550551552553554555556557558559560561562563564565566567568569570571572573574575576577578579580581582583584585586587588589590591592593594595596597598599600601602603604605606607608609610611612613614615616617618619620621622623624625626627628629630631632633634635636637638639640641642643644645646647648649650651652653654655656657658659660661662663664665666667668669670671672673674675676677678679680681682683684685686687688689690691692693694695696697698699700701702703704705706707708709710711712713714715716717718719720721722723724725726727728729730731732733734735736737738739740741742743744745746747748749750751752753754755756757758759760761762763764765766767768769770771772773774775776777778779780781782783784785786787788789790791792793794795796797798799800801802803804805806807808809810811812813814815816817818819820821822823824825826827828829830831832833834835836837838839840841842843844845846847848849850851852853854855856857858859860861862863864865866867868869870871872873874875876877878879880881882883884885886887888889890891892893894895896897898899900901902903904905906907908909910911912913914915916917918919920921922923924925926927928929930931932933934935936937938939940941942943944945946947948949950951952953954955956957958959960961962963964965966967968969970971972973974975976977978979980981982983984985986987988989990991992993994995996997998999100010011002100310041005100610071008100910101011101210131014101510161017101810191020102110221023102410251026102710281029103010311032103310341035103610371038103910401041104210431044104510461047104810491050105110521053105410551056105710581059106010611062106310641065106610671068106910701071107210731074107510761077107810791080108110821083108410851086108710881089109010911092109310941095109610971098109911001101110211031104110511061107110811091110111111121113111411151116111711181119112011211122112311241125112611271128112911301131113211331134113511361137113811391140114111421143114411451146114711481149115011511152115311541155115611571158115911601161116211631164116511661167 · Hide pronunciation

1. 1

   दीघdī·gha निकायni·kā·ya 33

   Dīgha Nikāya 33

   Long Discourses 33

2. 2

   सङ्गीतिसुत्तsaṅ·gī·ti·sut·ta

   Saṅgītisutta

   Reciting in Concert

3. 3

   एवंe·vaṃ मेme सुतं—su·taṃ

   Evaṁ me sutaṁ—

   So I have heard.

4. 4

   एकंe·kaṃ समयंsa·ma·yaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā मल्लेसुmal·le·su चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पञ्चमत्तेहिpañ·ca·mat·te·hi भिक्खुसतेहिbhik·khu·sa·te·hi येनye·na पावाpā·vā नामnā·ma मल्लानंmal·lā·naṃ नगरंna·ga·raṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

   ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā mallesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena pāvā nāma mallānaṁ nagaraṁ tadavasari.

   At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Mallas together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at a Mallian town named Pāvā.

5. 5

   तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā पावायंpā·vā·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti चुन्दस्सcun·das·sa कम्मारपुत्तस्सkam·mā·ra·put·tas·sa अम्बवने।am·ba·va·ne

   Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā pāvāyaṁ viharati cundassa kammāraputtassa ambavane.

   There he stayed in Cunda the smith’s mango grove.

6. 6

   तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na पावेय्यकानंpā·vey·ya·kā·naṃ मल्लानंmal·lā·naṃ उब्भतकंub·bha·ta·kaṃ नामnā·ma नवंna·vaṃ सन्धागारंsan·dhā·gā·raṃ अचिरकारितंa·ci·ra·kā·ri·taṃ होतिho·ti अनज्झावुट्ठंa·naj·jhā·vuṭ·ṭhaṃ समणेनsa·ma·ṇe·na वाvā ब्राह्मणेनbrāh·ma·ṇe·na वाvā केनचिke·na·ci वाvā मनुस्सभूतेन।ma·nus·sa·bhū·te·na

   Tena kho pana samayena pāveyyakānaṁ mallānaṁ ubbhatakaṁ nāma navaṁ sandhāgāraṁ acirakāritaṁ hoti anajjhāvuṭṭhaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā kenaci vā manussabhūtena.

   Now at that time a new town hall named Ubbhaṭaka had recently been constructed for the Mallas of Pāvā. It had not yet been occupied by an ascetic or brahmin or any human at all.

7. 7

   अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho पावेय्यकाpā·vey·ya·kā मल्ला:mal·lā “भगवाbha·ga·vā किरki·ra मल्लेसुmal·le·su चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पञ्चमत्तेहिpañ·ca·mat·te·hi भिक्खुसतेहिbhik·khu·sa·te·hi पावंpā·vaṃ अनुप्पत्तोa·nup·pat·to पावायंpā·vā·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti चुन्दस्सcun·das·sa कम्मारपुत्तस्सkam·mā·ra·put·tas·sa अम्बवने”ति।am·ba·va·ne

   Assosuṁ kho pāveyyakā mallā: “bhagavā kira mallesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi pāvaṁ anuppatto pāvāyaṁ viharati cundassa kammāraputtassa ambavane”ti.

   The Mallas of Pāvā also heard that the Buddha had arrived and was staying in Cunda’s mango grove.

8. 8

   अथa·tha खोkho पावेय्यकाpā·vey·ya·kā मल्लाmal·lā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho पावेय्यकाpā·vey·ya·kā मल्लाmal·lā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं:e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

   Atha kho pāveyyakā mallā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho pāveyyakā mallā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ:

   Then they went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him,

9. 9

   “इध,i·dha भन्ते,bhan·te पावेय्यकानंpā·vey·ya·kā·naṃ मल्लानंmal·lā·naṃ उब्भतकंub·bha·ta·kaṃ नामnā·ma नवंna·vaṃ सन्धागारंsan·dhā·gā·raṃ अचिरकारितंa·ci·ra·kā·ri·taṃ होतिho·ti अनज्झावुट्ठंa·naj·jhā·vuṭ·ṭhaṃ समणेनsa·ma·ṇe·na वाvā ब्राह्मणेनbrāh·ma·ṇe·na वाvā केनचिke·na·ci वाvā मनुस्सभूतेन।ma·nus·sa·bhū·te·na

   “idha, bhante, pāveyyakānaṁ mallānaṁ ubbhatakaṁ nāma navaṁ sandhāgāraṁ acirakāritaṁ hoti anajjhāvuṭṭhaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā kenaci vā manussabhūtena.

   “Sir, a new town hall named Ubbhaṭaka has recently been constructed for the Mallas of Pāvā. It has not yet been occupied by an ascetic or brahmin or any human at all.

10. 10

    तञ्चtañ·ca खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ परिभुञ्जतु,pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·tu भगवताbha·ga·va·tā पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ परिभुत्तंpa·ri·bhut·taṃ पच्छाpac·chā पावेय्यकाpā·vey·ya·kā मल्लाmal·lā परिभुञ्जिस्सन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·san·ti

    Tañca kho, bhante, bhagavā paṭhamaṁ paribhuñjatu, bhagavatā paṭhamaṁ paribhuttaṁ pacchā pāveyyakā mallā paribhuñjissanti.

    May the Buddha be the first to use it, and only then will the Mallas of Pāvā use it.

11. 11

    तदस्सta·das·sa पावेय्यकानंpā·vey·ya·kā·naṃ मल्लानंmal·lā·naṃ दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ हितायhi·tā·ya सुखाया”ति।su·khā·yā

    Tadassa pāveyyakānaṁ mallānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.

    That would be for the lasting welfare and happiness of the Mallas of Pāvā.”

12. 12

    अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

    Adhivāsesi kho bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

    The Buddha consented in silence.

13. 13

    अथa·tha खोkho पावेय्यकाpā·vey·ya·kā मल्लाmal·lā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā येनye·na सन्धागारंsan·dhā·gā·raṃ तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सब्बसन्थरिंsab·ba·san·tha·riṃ सन्धागारंsan·dhā·gā·raṃ सन्थरित्वाsan·tha·rit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to आसनानिā·sa·nā·ni पञ्ञापेत्वाpañ·ñā·pet·vā उदकमणिकंu·da·ka·ma·ṇi·kaṃ पतिट्ठपेत्वाpa·tiṭ·ṭha·pet·vā तेलपदीपंte·la·pa·dī·paṃ आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

    Atha kho pāveyyakā mallā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena sandhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sabbasanthariṁ sandhāgāraṁ santharitvā bhagavato āsanāni paññāpetvā udakamaṇikaṁ patiṭṭhapetvā telapadīpaṁ āropetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu;

    Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, the Mallas got up from their seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right. Then they went to the new town hall, where they spread carpets all over, prepared seats, set up a water jar, and placed an oil lamp. Then they went back to the Buddha,

14. 14

    उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठंसु।aṭ·ṭhaṃ·su

    upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu.

    bowed, stood to one side,

15. 15

    एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठिताṭhi·tā खोkho तेte पावेय्यकाpā·vey·ya·kā मल्लाmal·lā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं:e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

    Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho te pāveyyakā mallā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ:

    and told him of their preparations, saying,

16. 16

    “सब्बसन्थरिसन्थतं,sab·ba·san·tha·ri·san·tha·taṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सन्धागारं,san·dhā·gā·raṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to आसनानिā·sa·nā·ni पञ्ञत्तानि,pañ·ñat·tā·ni उदकमणिकोu·da·ka·ma·ṇi·ko पतिट्ठापितो,pa·tiṭ·ṭhā·pi·to तेलपदीपोte·la·pa·dī·po आरोपितो।ā·ro·pi·to

    “sabbasantharisanthataṁ, bhante, sandhāgāraṁ, bhagavato āsanāni paññattāni, udakamaṇiko patiṭṭhāpito, telapadīpo āropito.

    (Pāli only)

17. 17

    यस्सदानि,yas·sa·dā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā कालंkā·laṃ मञ्ञती”ति।mañ·ña·tī

    Yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti.

    “Please, sir, come at your convenience.”

18. 18

    अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na येनye·na सन्धागारंsan·dhā·gā·raṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पादेpā·de पक्खालेत्वाpak·khā·let·vā सन्धागारंsan·dhā·gā·raṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā मज्झिमंmaj·jhi·maṃ थम्भंtham·bhaṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya पुरत्थाभिमुखोpu·rat·thā·bhi·mu·kho निसीदि।ni·sī·di

    Atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena sandhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā pāde pakkhāletvā sandhāgāraṁ pavisitvā majjhimaṁ thambhaṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi.

    Then the Buddha robed up and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the new town hall together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. Having washed his feet, he entered the town hall and sat against the central column facing east.

19. 19

    भिक्खुसङ्घोपिbhik·khu·saṅ·gho·pi खोkho पादेpā·de पक्खालेत्वाpak·khā·let·vā सन्धागारंsan·dhā·gā·raṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā पच्छिमंpac·chi·maṃ भित्तिंbhit·tiṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya पुरत्थाभिमुखोpu·rat·thā·bhi·mu·kho निसीदिni·sī·di भगवन्तंयेवbha·ga·van·taṃ·ye·va पुरक्खत्वा।pu·rak·khat·vā

    Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho pāde pakkhāletvā sandhāgāraṁ pavisitvā pacchimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi bhagavantaṁyeva purakkhatvā.

    The Saṅgha of mendicants also washed their feet, entered the town hall, and sat against the west wall facing east, with the Buddha right in front of them.

20. 20

    पावेय्यकापिpā·vey·ya·kā·pi खोkho मल्लाmal·lā पादेpā·de पक्खालेत्वाpak·khā·let·vā सन्धागारंsan·dhā·gā·raṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā पुरत्थिमंpu·rat·thi·maṃ भित्तिंbhit·tiṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya पच्छिमाभिमुखाpac·chi·mā·bhi·mu·khā निसीदिंसुni·sī·diṃ·su भगवन्तंयेवbha·ga·van·taṃ·ye·va पुरक्खत्वा।pu·rak·khat·vā

    Pāveyyakāpi kho mallā pāde pakkhāletvā sandhāgāraṁ pavisitvā puratthimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya pacchimābhimukhā nisīdiṁsu bhagavantaṁyeva purakkhatvā.

    The Mallas of Pāvā also washed their feet, entered the town hall, and sat against the east wall facing west, with the Buddha right in front of them.

21. 21

    अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पावेय्यकेpā·vey·ya·ke मल्लेmal·le बहुदेवba·hu·de·va रत्तिंrat·tiṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उय्योजेसि:uy·yo·je·si

    Atha kho bhagavā pāveyyake malle bahudeva rattiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uyyojesi:

    The Buddha spent much of the night educating, encouraging, firing up, and inspiring the Mallas with a Dhamma talk. Then he sent them off,

22. 22

    “अभिक्कन्ताa·bhik·kan·tā खो,kho वासेट्ठा,vā·seṭ·ṭhā रत्ति।rat·ti

    “abhikkantā kho, vāseṭṭhā, ratti.

    “The night is getting late, Vāseṭṭhas.

23. 23

    यस्सदानिyas·sa·dā·ni तुम्हेtum·he कालंkā·laṃ मञ्ञथा”ति।mañ·ña·thā

    Yassadāni tumhe kālaṁ maññathā”ti.

    Please go at your convenience.”

24. 24

    “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho पावेय्यकाpā·vey·ya·kā मल्लाmal·lā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कमिंसु।pak·ka·miṃ·su

    “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho pāveyyakā mallā bhagavato paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.

    “Yes, sir,” replied the Mallas. They got up from their seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right, before leaving.

25. 25

    अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अचिरपक्कन्तेसुa·ci·ra·pak·kan·te·su पावेय्यकेसुpā·vey·ya·ke·su मल्लेसुmal·le·su तुण्हीभूतंtuṇ·hī·bhū·taṃ तुण्हीभूतंtuṇ·hī·bhū·taṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ अनुविलोकेत्वाa·nu·vi·lo·ket·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सारिपुत्तंsā·ri·put·taṃ आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

    Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkantesu pāveyyakesu mallesu tuṇhībhūtaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ anuviloketvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ āmantesi:

    Soon after they left, the Buddha looked around the Saṅgha of mendicants, who were so very silent. He addressed Venerable Sāriputta,

26. 26

    “विगतथिनमिद्धोvi·ga·ta·thi·na·mid·dho खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खुसङ्घो।bhik·khu·saṅ·gho

    “vigatathinamiddho kho, sāriputta, bhikkhusaṅgho.

    “Sāriputta, the Saṅgha of mendicants is rid of dullness and drowsiness.

27. 27

    पटिभातुpa·ṭi·bhā·tu तं,taṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ धम्मीकथा।dham·mī·ka·thā

    Paṭibhātu taṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhūnaṁ dhammīkathā.

    Give them some Dhamma talk as you feel inspired.

28. 28

    पिट्ठिpiṭ·ṭhi मेme आगिलायति।ā·gi·lā·ya·ti

    Piṭṭhi me āgilāyati.

    My back is sore,

29. 29

    तमहंta·ma·haṃ आयमिस्सामी”ति।ā·ya·mis·sā·mī

    Tamahaṁ āyamissāmī”ti.

    I’ll stretch it.”

30. 30

    “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

    “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavato paccassosi.

    “Yes, sir,” Sāriputta replied.

31. 31

    अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā चतुग्गुणंca·tug·gu·ṇaṃ सङ्घाटिंsaṅ·ghā·ṭiṃ पञ्ञापेत्वाpañ·ñā·pet·vā दक्खिणेनdak·khi·ṇe·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सीहसेय्यंsī·ha·sey·yaṃ कप्पेसिkap·pe·si पादेpā·de पादंpā·daṃ अच्चाधाय,ac·cā·dhā·ya सतोsa·to सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no उट्ठानसञ्ञंuṭ·ṭhā·na·sañ·ñaṃ मनसिma·na·si करित्वा।ka·rit·vā

    Atha kho bhagavā catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññāpetvā dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappesi pāde pādaṁ accādhāya, sato sampajāno uṭṭhānasaññaṁ manasi karitvā.

    And then the Buddha spread out his outer robe folded in four and laid down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware, and focused on the time of getting up.

32. 32

    तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na निगण्ठोni·gaṇ·ṭho नाटपुत्तोnā·ṭa·put·to पावायंpā·vā·yaṃ अधुनाकालङ्कतोa·dhu·nā·kā·laṅ·ka·to होति।ho·ti

    Tena kho pana samayena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato hoti.

    Now at that time the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan had recently passed away at Pāvā.

33. 33

    तस्सtas·sa कालङ्किरियायkā·laṅ·ki·ri·yā·ya भिन्नाbhin·nā निगण्ठाni·gaṇ·ṭhā द्वेधिकजाताdve·dhi·ka·jā·tā भण्डनजाताbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā कलहजाताka·la·ha·jā·tā विवादापन्नाvi·vā·dā·pan·nā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ मुखसत्तीहिmu·kha·sat·tī·hi वितुदन्ताvi·tu·dan·tā विहरन्ति:vi·ha·ran·ti

    Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā dvedhikajātā bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti:

    With his passing the Jain ascetics split, dividing into two factions, fighting, quarreling, and disputing, continually wounding each other with barbed words:

34. 34

    “नna त्वंtvaṃ इमंi·maṃ धम्मविनयंdham·ma·vi·na·yaṃ आजानासि,ā·jā·nā·si अहंa·haṃ इमंi·maṃ धम्मविनयंdham·ma·vi·na·yaṃ आजानामि,ā·jā·nā·mi किंkiṃ त्वंtvaṃ इमंi·maṃ धम्मविनयंdham·ma·vi·na·yaṃ आजानिस्ससि।ā·jā·nis·sa·si मिच्छापटिपन्नोmic·chā·pa·ṭi·pan·no त्वमसि,tva·ma·si अहमस्मिa·ha·mas·mi सम्मापटिपन्नो।sam·mā·pa·ṭi·pan·no सहितंsa·hi·taṃ मे,me असहितंa·sa·hi·taṃ ते।te पुरेवचनीयंpu·re·va·ca·nī·yaṃ पच्छाpac·chā अवच,a·va·ca पच्छावचनीयंpac·chā·va·ca·nī·yaṃ पुरेpu·re अवच।a·va·ca अधिचिण्णंa·dhi·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तेte विपरावत्तं,vi·pa·rā·vat·taṃ आरोपितोā·ro·pi·to तेte वादो,vā·do निग्गहितोnig·ga·hi·to त्वमसि,tva·ma·si चरca·ra वादप्पमोक्खाय,vā·dap·pa·mok·khā·ya निब्बेठेहिnib·be·ṭhe·hi वाvā सचेsa·ce पहोसी”ति।pa·ho·sī

    “na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi, kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi. Micchāpaṭipanno tvamasi, ahamasmi sammāpaṭipanno. Sahitaṁ me, asahitaṁ te. Purevacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchāvacanīyaṁ pure avaca. Adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ, āropito te vādo, niggahito tvamasi, cara vādappamokkhāya, nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosī”ti.

    “You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!”

35. 35

    वधोयेवva·dho·ye·va खोkho मञ्ञेmañ·ñe निगण्ठेसुni·gaṇ·ṭhe·su नाटपुत्तियेसुnā·ṭa·put·ti·ye·su वत्तति।vat·ta·ti

    Vadhoyeva kho maññe nigaṇṭhesu nāṭaputtiyesu vattati.

    You’d think there was nothing but slaughter going on among the Jain ascetics.

36. 36

    येपिye·pi निगण्ठस्सni·gaṇ·ṭhas·sa नाटपुत्तस्सnā·ṭa·put·tas·sa सावकाsā·va·kā गिहीgi·hī ओदातवसना,o·dā·ta·va·sa·nā तेपिte·pi निगण्ठेसुni·gaṇ·ṭhe·su नाटपुत्तियेसुnā·ṭa·put·ti·ye·su निब्बिन्नरूपाnib·bin·na·rū·pā विरत्तरूपाvi·rat·ta·rū·pā पटिवानरूपा,pa·ṭi·vā·na·rū·pā यथाya·thā तंtaṃ दुरक्खातेdu·rak·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye दुप्पवेदितेdup·pa·ve·di·te अनिय्यानिकेa·niy·yā·ni·ke अनुपसमसंवत्तनिकेa·nu·pa·sa·ma·saṃ·vat·ta·ni·ke असम्मासम्बुद्धप्पवेदितेa·sam·mā·sam·bud·dhap·pa·ve·di·te भिन्नथूपेbhin·na·thū·pe अप्पटिसरणे।ap·pa·ṭi·sa·ra·ṇe

    Yepi nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa sāvakā gihī odātavasanā, tepi nigaṇṭhesu nāṭaputtiyesu nibbinnarūpā virattarūpā paṭivānarūpā, yathā taṁ durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe.

    And the Jain Ñātika’s white-clothed lay disciples were disillusioned, dismayed, and disappointed in the Jain ascetics. They were equally disappointed with a teaching and training so poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha, with broken monument and without a refuge.

37. 37

    अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

    Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto bhikkhū āmantesi:

    Then Sāriputta told the mendicants about these things. He went on to say,

38. 38

    “निगण्ठो,ni·gaṇ·ṭho आवुसो,ā·vu·so नाटपुत्तोnā·ṭa·put·to पावायंpā·vā·yaṃ अधुनाकालङ्कतो,a·dhu·nā·kā·laṅ·ka·to

    “nigaṇṭho, āvuso, nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato,

    (Pāli only)

39. 39

    तस्सtas·sa कालङ्किरियायkā·laṅ·ki·ri·yā·ya भिन्नाbhin·nā निगण्ठाni·gaṇ·ṭhā द्वेधिकजाताdve·dhi·ka·jā·tā …पे…pe भिन्नथूपेbhin·na·thū·pe अप्पटिसरणे।ap·pa·ṭi·sa·ra·ṇe

    tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā dvedhikajātā …pe… bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe.

    (Pāli only)

40. 40

    एवञ्हेतं,e·vañ·he·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so होतिho·ti दुरक्खातेdu·rak·khā·te धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye दुप्पवेदितेdup·pa·ve·di·te अनिय्यानिकेa·niy·yā·ni·ke अनुपसमसंवत्तनिकेa·nu·pa·sa·ma·saṃ·vat·ta·ni·ke असम्मासम्बुद्धप्पवेदिते।a·sam·mā·sam·bud·dhap·pa·ve·di·te

    Evañhetaṁ, āvuso, hoti durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite.

    “That’s what happens, reverends, when a teaching and training is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha.

41. 41

    अयंa·yaṃ खोkho पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मोdham·mo स्वाक्खातोsvāk·khā·to सुप्पवेदितोsup·pa·ve·di·to निय्यानिकोniy·yā·ni·ko उपसमसंवत्तनिकोu·pa·sa·ma·saṃ·vat·ta·ni·ko सम्मासम्बुद्धप्पवेदितो।sam·mā·sam·bud·dhap·pa·ve·di·to

    Ayaṁ kho panāvuso, amhākaṁ bhagavatā dhammo svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito.

    But this teaching is well explained and well propounded to us by the Blessed One, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is a fully awakened Buddha.

42. 42

    तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बं,saṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ नna विवदितब्बं,vi·va·di·tab·baṃ यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अद्धनियंad·dha·ni·yaṃ अस्सas·sa चिरट्ठितिकं,ci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ तदस्सta·das·sa बहुजनहितायba·hu·ja·na·hi·tā·ya बहुजनसुखायba·hu·ja·na·su·khā·ya लोकानुकम्पायlo·kā·nu·kam·pā·ya अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

    Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

    You should all recite this in concert, without disputing, so that this spiritual path may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.

43. 43

    कतमोka·ta·mo चावुसो,cā·vu·so अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मोdham·mo स्वाक्खातोsvāk·khā·to सुप्पवेदितोsup·pa·ve·di·to निय्यानिकोniy·yā·ni·ko उपसमसंवत्तनिकोu·pa·sa·ma·saṃ·vat·ta·ni·ko सम्मासम्बुद्धप्पवेदितो;sam·mā·sam·bud·dhap·pa·ve·di·to

    Katamo cāvuso, amhākaṁ bhagavatā dhammo svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito;

    And what is that teaching?

44. 44

    यत्थyat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बं,saṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ नna विवदितब्बं,vi·va·di·tab·baṃ यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अद्धनियंad·dha·ni·yaṃ अस्सas·sa चिरट्ठितिकं,ci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ तदस्सta·das·sa बहुजनहितायba·hu·ja·na·hi·tā·ya बहुजनसुखायba·hu·ja·na·su·khā·ya लोकानुकम्पायlo·kā·nu·kam·pā·ya अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं?de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

    yattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ?

    (Pāli only)

45. 45

    1। एककe·ka·ka

    1. Ekaka

    1. Ones

46. 46

    अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na एकोe·ko धम्मोdham·mo सम्मदक्खातो।sam·ma·dak·khā·to

    Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena eko dhammo sammadakkhāto.

    There are teachings grouped by one that have been rightly explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha.

47. 47

    तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बं,saṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ नna विवदितब्बं,vi·va·di·tab·baṃ यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अद्धनियंad·dha·ni·yaṃ अस्सas·sa चिरट्ठितिकं,ci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ तदस्सta·das·sa बहुजनहितायba·hu·ja·na·hi·tā·ya बहुजनसुखायba·hu·ja·na·su·khā·ya लोकानुकम्पायlo·kā·nu·kam·pā·ya अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

    Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

    You should all recite these in concert, without disputing, so that this spiritual path may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.

48. 48

    कतमोka·ta·mo एकोe·ko धम्मो?dham·mo

    Katamo eko dhammo?

    What are the teachings grouped by one?

49. 49

    सब्बेsab·be सत्ताsat·tā आहारट्ठितिका।ā·hā·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kā

    Sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā.

    All sentient beings are sustained by food.

50. 50

    सब्बेsab·be सत्ताsat·tā सङ्खारट्ठितिका।saṅ·khā·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kā

    Sabbe sattā saṅkhāraṭṭhitikā.

    All sentient beings are sustained by conditions.

51. 51

    अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na एकोe·ko धम्मोdham·mo सम्मदक्खातो।sam·ma·dak·khā·to

    Ayaṁ kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena eko dhammo sammadakkhāto.

    These are the teachings grouped by one that have been rightly explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha.

52. 52

    तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बं,saṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ नna विवदितब्बं,vi·va·di·tab·baṃ यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अद्धनियंad·dha·ni·yaṃ अस्सas·sa चिरट्ठितिकं,ci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ तदस्सta·das·sa बहुजनहितायba·hu·ja·na·hi·tā·ya बहुजनसुखायba·hu·ja·na·su·khā·ya लोकानुकम्पायlo·kā·nu·kam·pā·ya अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

    Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

    You should all recite these in concert, without disputing, so that this spiritual path may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.

53. 53

    2। दुकdu·ka

    2. Duka

    2. Twos

54. 54

    अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na द्वेdve धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता।sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

    Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dve dhammā sammadakkhātā.

    There are teachings grouped by two that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

55. 55

    तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बं,saṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ नna विवदितब्बं,vi·va·di·tab·baṃ यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अद्धनियंad·dha·ni·yaṃ अस्सas·sa चिरट्ठितिकं,ci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ तदस्सta·das·sa बहुजनहितायba·hu·ja·na·hi·tā·ya बहुजनसुखायba·hu·ja·na·su·khā·ya लोकानुकम्पायlo·kā·nu·kam·pā·ya अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

    Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

    You should all recite these in concert.

56. 56

    कतमेka·ta·me द्वे?dve

    Katame dve?

    What are the teachings grouped by two?

57. 57

    नामञ्चnā·mañ·ca रूपञ्च।rū·pañ·ca

    Nāmañca rūpañca.

    Name and form.

58. 58

    अविज्जाa·vij·jā चca भवतण्हाbha·va·taṇ·hā च।ca

    Avijjā ca bhavataṇhā ca.

    Ignorance and craving for continued existence.

59. 59

    भवदिट्ठिbha·va·diṭ·ṭhi चca विभवदिट्ठिvi·bha·va·diṭ·ṭhi च।ca

    Bhavadiṭṭhi ca vibhavadiṭṭhi ca.

    Views favoring existence and views favoring nonexistence.

60. 60

    अहिरिकञ्चa·hi·ri·kañ·ca अनोत्तप्पञ्च।a·not·tap·pañ·ca

    Ahirikañca anottappañca.

    Lack of conscience and prudence.

61. 61

    हिरीhi·rī चca ओत्तप्पञ्च।ot·tap·pañ·ca

    Hirī ca ottappañca.

    Conscience and prudence.

62. 62

    दोवचस्सताdo·va·cas·sa·tā चca पापमित्तताpā·pa·mit·ta·tā च।ca

    Dovacassatā ca pāpamittatā ca.

    Being hard to admonish and having bad friends.

63. 63

    सोवचस्सताso·va·cas·sa·tā चca कल्याणमित्तताkal·yā·ṇa·mit·ta·tā च।ca

    Sovacassatā ca kalyāṇamittatā ca.

    Being easy to admonish and having good friends.

64. 64

    आपत्तिकुसलताā·pat·ti·ku·sa·la·tā चca आपत्तिवुट्ठानकुसलताā·pat·ti·vuṭ·ṭhā·na·ku·sa·la·tā च।ca

    Āpattikusalatā ca āpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā ca.

    Skill in offenses and skill in resolving offenses.

65. 65

    समापत्तिकुसलताsa·mā·pat·ti·ku·sa·la·tā चca समापत्तिवुट्ठानकुसलताsa·mā·pat·ti·vuṭ·ṭhā·na·ku·sa·la·tā च।ca

    Samāpattikusalatā ca samāpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā ca.

    Skill in meditative attainments and skill in emerging from those attainments.

66. 66

    धातुकुसलताdhā·tu·ku·sa·la·tā चca मनसिकारकुसलताma·na·si·kā·ra·ku·sa·la·tā च।ca

    Dhātukusalatā ca manasikārakusalatā ca.

    Skill in the elements and skill in application of mind.

67. 67

    आयतनकुसलताā·ya·ta·na·ku·sa·la·tā चca पटिच्चसमुप्पादकुसलताpa·ṭic·ca·sa·mup·pā·da·ku·sa·la·tā च।ca

    Āyatanakusalatā ca paṭiccasamuppādakusalatā ca.

    Skill in the sense fields and skill in dependent origination.

68. 68

    ठानकुसलताṭhā·na·ku·sa·la·tā चca अट्ठानकुसलताaṭ·ṭhā·na·ku·sa·la·tā च।ca

    Ṭhānakusalatā ca aṭṭhānakusalatā ca.

    Skill in what is possible and skill in what is impossible.

69. 69

    अज्जवञ्चaj·ja·vañ·ca लज्जवञ्च।laj·ja·vañ·ca

    Ajjavañca lajjavañca.

    Integrity and scrupulousness.

70. 70

    खन्तिkhan·ti चca सोरच्चञ्च।so·rac·cañ·ca

    Khanti ca soraccañca.

    Patience and gentleness.

71. 71

    साखल्यञ्चsā·khal·yañ·ca पटिसन्थारोpa·ṭi·san·thā·ro च।ca

    Sākhalyañca paṭisanthāro ca.

    Camaraderie and hospitality.

72. 72

    अविहिंसाa·vi·hiṃ·sā चca सोचेय्यञ्च।so·cey·yañ·ca

    Avihiṁsā ca soceyyañca.

    Harmlessness and purity.

73. 73

    मुट्ठस्सच्चञ्चmuṭ·ṭhas·sac·cañ·ca असम्पजञ्ञञ्च।a·sam·pa·jañ·ñañ·ca

    Muṭṭhassaccañca asampajaññañca.

    Lack of mindfulness and lack of situational awareness.

74. 74

    सतिsa·ti चca सम्पजञ्ञञ्च।sam·pa·jañ·ñañ·ca

    Sati ca sampajaññañca.

    Mindfulness and situational awareness.

75. 75

    इन्द्रियेसुin·dri·ye·su अगुत्तद्वारताa·gut·tad·vā·ra·tā चca भोजनेbho·ja·ne अमत्तञ्ञुताa·mat·tañ·ñu·tā च।ca

    Indriyesu aguttadvāratā ca bhojane amattaññutā ca.

    Not guarding the sense doors and eating too much.

76. 76

    इन्द्रियेसुin·dri·ye·su गुत्तद्वारताgut·tad·vā·ra·tā चca भोजनेbho·ja·ne मत्तञ्ञुताmat·tañ·ñu·tā च।ca

    Indriyesu guttadvāratā ca bhojane mattaññutā ca.

    Guarding the sense doors and moderation in eating.

77. 77

    पटिसङ्खानबलञ्चpa·ṭi·saṅ·khā·na·ba·lañ·ca भावनाबलञ्च।bhā·va·nā·ba·lañ·ca

    Paṭisaṅkhānabalañca bhāvanābalañca.

    The power of reflection and the power of development.

78. 78

    सतिबलञ्चsa·ti·ba·lañ·ca समाधिबलञ्च।sa·mā·dhi·ba·lañ·ca

    Satibalañca samādhibalañca.

    The power of mindfulness and the power of immersion.

79. 79

    समथोsa·ma·tho चca विपस्सनाvi·pas·sa·nā च।ca

    Samatho ca vipassanā ca.

    Serenity and discernment.

80. 80

    समथनिमित्तञ्चsa·ma·tha·ni·mit·tañ·ca पग्गहनिमित्तञ्च।pag·ga·ha·ni·mit·tañ·ca

    Samathanimittañca paggahanimittañca.

    The basis of serenity and the basis of exertion.

81. 81

    पग्गहोpag·ga·ho चca अविक्खेपोa·vik·khe·po च।ca

    Paggaho ca avikkhepo ca.

    Exertion, and not being scattered.

82. 82

    सीलविपत्तिsī·la·vi·pat·ti चca दिट्ठिविपत्तिdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pat·ti च।ca

    Sīlavipatti ca diṭṭhivipatti ca.

    Failure in ethics and failure in view.

83. 83

    सीलसम्पदाsī·la·sam·pa·dā चca दिट्ठिसम्पदाdiṭ·ṭhi·sam·pa·dā च।ca

    Sīlasampadā ca diṭṭhisampadā ca.

    Accomplishment in ethics and accomplishment in view.

84. 84

    सीलविसुद्धिsī·la·vi·sud·dhi चca दिट्ठिविसुद्धिdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·sud·dhi च।ca

    Sīlavisuddhi ca diṭṭhivisuddhi ca.

    Purification of ethics and purification of view.

85. 85

    दिट्ठिविसुद्धिdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·sud·dhi खोkho पनpa·na यथाya·thā दिट्ठिस्सdiṭ·ṭhis·sa चca पधानं।pa·dhā·naṃ

    Diṭṭhivisuddhi kho pana yathā diṭṭhissa ca padhānaṁ.

    Purification of view and making an effort in line with that view.

86. 86

    संवेगोsaṃ·ve·go चca संवेजनीयेसुsaṃ·ve·ja·nī·ye·su ठानेसुṭhā·ne·su संविग्गस्सsaṃ·vig·gas·sa चca योनिसोyo·ni·so पधानं।pa·dhā·naṃ

    Saṁvego ca saṁvejanīyesu ṭhānesu saṁviggassa ca yoniso padhānaṁ.

    Inspiration, and making a suitable effort when inspired by inspiring places.

87. 87

    असन्तुट्ठिताa·san·tuṭ·ṭhi·tā चca कुसलेसुku·sa·le·su धम्मेसुdham·me·su अप्पटिवानिताap·pa·ṭi·vā·ni·tā चca पधानस्मिं।pa·dhā·nas·miṃ

    Asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivānitā ca padhānasmiṁ.

    To never be content with skillful qualities, and to never stop trying.

88. 88

    विज्जाvij·jā चca विमुत्तिvi·mut·ti च।ca

    Vijjā ca vimutti ca.

    Knowledge and freedom.

89. 89

    खयेञाणंkha·ye·ñā·ṇaṃ अनुप्पादेञाणं।a·nup·pā·de·ñā·ṇaṃ

    Khayeñāṇaṁ anuppādeñāṇaṁ.

    Knowledge of ending and knowledge of non-arising.

90. 90

    इमेi·me खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na द्वेdve धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता।sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

    Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dve dhammā sammadakkhātā.

    These are the teachings grouped by two that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

91. 91

    तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बं,saṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ नna विवदितब्बं,vi·va·di·tab·baṃ यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अद्धनियंad·dha·ni·yaṃ अस्सas·sa चिरट्ठितिकं,ci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ तदस्सta·das·sa बहुजनहितायba·hu·ja·na·hi·tā·ya बहुजनसुखायba·hu·ja·na·su·khā·ya लोकानुकम्पायlo·kā·nu·kam·pā·ya अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

    Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

    You should all recite these in concert.

92. 92

    3। तिकti·ka

    3. Tika

    3. Threes

93. 93

    अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na तयोta·yo धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता।sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

    Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tayo dhammā sammadakkhātā.

    There are teachings grouped by three that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

94. 94

    तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

    Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

    You should all recite these in concert.

95. 95

    कतमेka·ta·me तयो?ta·yo

    Katame tayo?

    What are the teachings grouped by three?

96. 96

    तीणिtī·ṇi अकुसलमूलानि—a·ku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni

    Tīṇi akusalamūlāni—

    <b>Three unskillful roots:</b>

97. 97

    लोभोlo·bho अकुसलमूलं,a·ku·sa·la·mū·laṃ दोसोdo·so अकुसलमूलं,a·ku·sa·la·mū·laṃ मोहोmo·ho अकुसलमूलं।a·ku·sa·la·mū·laṃ

    lobho akusalamūlaṁ, doso akusalamūlaṁ, moho akusalamūlaṁ.

    greed, hate, and delusion.

98. 98

    तीणिtī·ṇi कुसलमूलानि—ku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni

    Tīṇi kusalamūlāni—

    <b>Three skillful roots:</b>

99. 99

    अलोभोa·lo·bho कुसलमूलं,ku·sa·la·mū·laṃ अदोसोa·do·so कुसलमूलं,ku·sa·la·mū·laṃ अमोहोa·mo·ho कुसलमूलं।ku·sa·la·mū·laṃ

    alobho kusalamūlaṁ, adoso kusalamūlaṁ, amoho kusalamūlaṁ.

    contentment, love, and understanding.

100. 100

     तीणिtī·ṇi दुच्चरितानि—duc·ca·ri·tā·ni

     Tīṇi duccaritāni—

     <b>Three ways of performing bad conduct:</b>

101. 101

     कायदुच्चरितं,kā·ya·duc·ca·ri·taṃ वचीदुच्चरितं,va·cī·duc·ca·ri·taṃ मनोदुच्चरितं।ma·no·duc·ca·ri·taṃ

     kāyaduccaritaṁ, vacīduccaritaṁ, manoduccaritaṁ.

     by body, speech, and mind.

102. 102

     तीणिtī·ṇi सुचरितानि—su·ca·ri·tā·ni

     Tīṇi sucaritāni—

     <b>Three ways of performing good conduct:</b>

103. 103

     कायसुचरितं,kā·ya·su·ca·ri·taṃ वचीसुचरितं,va·cī·su·ca·ri·taṃ मनोसुचरितं।ma·no·su·ca·ri·taṃ

     kāyasucaritaṁ, vacīsucaritaṁ, manosucaritaṁ.

     by body, speech, and mind.

104. 104

     तयोta·yo अकुसलवितक्का—a·ku·sa·la·vi·tak·kā

     Tayo akusalavitakkā—

     <b>Three unskillful thoughts:</b>

105. 105

     कामवितक्को,kā·ma·vi·tak·ko ब्यापादवितक्को,byā·pā·da·vi·tak·ko विहिंसावितक्को।vi·hiṃ·sā·vi·tak·ko

     kāmavitakko, byāpādavitakko, vihiṁsāvitakko.

     sensuality, malice, and cruelty.

106. 106

     तयोta·yo कुसलवितक्का—ku·sa·la·vi·tak·kā

     Tayo kusalavitakkā—

     <b>Three skillful thoughts:</b>

107. 107

     नेक्खम्मवितक्को,nek·kham·ma·vi·tak·ko अब्यापादवितक्को,ab·yā·pā·da·vi·tak·ko अविहिंसावितक्को।a·vi·hiṃ·sā·vi·tak·ko

     nekkhammavitakko, abyāpādavitakko, avihiṁsāvitakko.

     renunciation, good will, and harmlessness.

108. 108

     तयोta·yo अकुसलसङ्कप्पा—a·ku·sa·la·saṅ·kap·pā

     Tayo akusalasaṅkappā—

     <b>Three unskillful intentions:</b>

109. 109

     कामसङ्कप्पो,kā·ma·saṅ·kap·po ब्यापादसङ्कप्पो,byā·pā·da·saṅ·kap·po विहिंसासङ्कप्पो।vi·hiṃ·sā·saṅ·kap·po

     kāmasaṅkappo, byāpādasaṅkappo, vihiṁsāsaṅkappo.

     sensuality, malice, and cruelty.

110. 110

     तयोta·yo कुसलसङ्कप्पा—ku·sa·la·saṅ·kap·pā

     Tayo kusalasaṅkappā—

     <b>Three skillful intentions:</b>

111. 111

     नेक्खम्मसङ्कप्पो,nek·kham·ma·saṅ·kap·po अब्यापादसङ्कप्पो,ab·yā·pā·da·saṅ·kap·po अविहिंसासङ्कप्पो।a·vi·hiṃ·sā·saṅ·kap·po

     nekkhammasaṅkappo, abyāpādasaṅkappo, avihiṁsāsaṅkappo.

     renunciation, good will, and harmlessness.

112. 112

     तिस्सोtis·so अकुसलसञ्ञा—a·ku·sa·la·sañ·ñā

     Tisso akusalasaññā—

     <b>Three unskillful perceptions:</b>

113. 113

     कामसञ्ञा,kā·ma·sañ·ñā ब्यापादसञ्ञा,byā·pā·da·sañ·ñā विहिंसासञ्ञा।vi·hiṃ·sā·sañ·ñā

     kāmasaññā, byāpādasaññā, vihiṁsāsaññā.

     sensuality, malice, and cruelty.

114. 114

     तिस्सोtis·so कुसलसञ्ञा—ku·sa·la·sañ·ñā

     Tisso kusalasaññā—

     <b>Three skillful perceptions:</b>

115. 115

     नेक्खम्मसञ्ञा,nek·kham·ma·sañ·ñā अब्यापादसञ्ञा,ab·yā·pā·da·sañ·ñā अविहिंसासञ्ञा।a·vi·hiṃ·sā·sañ·ñā

     nekkhammasaññā, abyāpādasaññā, avihiṁsāsaññā.

     renunciation, good will, and harmlessness.

116. 116

     तिस्सोtis·so अकुसलधातुयो—a·ku·sa·la·dhā·tu·yo

     Tisso akusaladhātuyo—

     <b>Three unskillful elements:</b>

117. 117

     कामधातु,kā·ma·dhā·tu ब्यापादधातु,byā·pā·da·dhā·tu विहिंसाधातु।vi·hiṃ·sā·dhā·tu

     kāmadhātu, byāpādadhātu, vihiṁsādhātu.

     sensuality, malice, and cruelty.

118. 118

     तिस्सोtis·so कुसलधातुयो—ku·sa·la·dhā·tu·yo

     Tisso kusaladhātuyo—

     <b>Three skillful elements:</b>

119. 119

     नेक्खम्मधातु,nek·kham·ma·dhā·tu अब्यापादधातु,ab·yā·pā·da·dhā·tu अविहिंसाधातु।a·vi·hiṃ·sā·dhā·tu

     nekkhammadhātu, abyāpādadhātu, avihiṁsādhātu.

     renunciation, good will, and harmlessness.

120. 120

     अपरापिa·pa·rā·pi तिस्सोtis·so धातुयो—dhā·tu·yo

     Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo—

     <b>Another three elements:</b>

121. 121

     कामधातु,kā·ma·dhā·tu रूपधातु,rū·pa·dhā·tu अरूपधातु।a·rū·pa·dhā·tu

     kāmadhātu, rūpadhātu, arūpadhātu.

     the sensual realm, the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm.

122. 122

     अपरापिa·pa·rā·pi तिस्सोtis·so धातुयो—dhā·tu·yo

     Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo—

     <b>Another three elements:</b>

123. 123

     रूपधातु,rū·pa·dhā·tu अरूपधातु,a·rū·pa·dhā·tu निरोधधातु।ni·ro·dha·dhā·tu

     rūpadhātu, arūpadhātu, nirodhadhātu.

     the realm of luminous form, the formless realm, and cessation.

124. 124

     अपरापिa·pa·rā·pi तिस्सोtis·so धातुयो—dhā·tu·yo

     Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo—

     <b>Another three elements:</b>

125. 125

     हीनधातु,hī·na·dhā·tu मज्झिमधातु,maj·jhi·ma·dhā·tu पणीतधातु।pa·ṇī·ta·dhā·tu

     hīnadhātu, majjhimadhātu, paṇītadhātu.

     lower, middle, and higher.

126. 126

     तिस्सोtis·so तण्हा—taṇ·hā

     Tisso taṇhā—

     <b>Three cravings:</b>

127. 127

     कामतण्हा,kā·ma·taṇ·hā भवतण्हा,bha·va·taṇ·hā विभवतण्हा।vi·bha·va·taṇ·hā

     kāmataṇhā, bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhā.

     for sensual pleasures, for continued existence, and for nonexistence.

128. 128

     अपरापिa·pa·rā·pi तिस्सोtis·so तण्हा—taṇ·hā

     Aparāpi tisso taṇhā—

     <b>Another three cravings:</b>

129. 129

     कामतण्हा,kā·ma·taṇ·hā रूपतण्हा,rū·pa·taṇ·hā अरूपतण्हा।a·rū·pa·taṇ·hā

     kāmataṇhā, rūpataṇhā, arūpataṇhā.

     for the sensual realm, the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm.

130. 130

     अपरापिa·pa·rā·pi तिस्सोtis·so तण्हा—taṇ·hā

     Aparāpi tisso taṇhā—

     <b>Another three cravings:</b>

131. 131

     रूपतण्हा,rū·pa·taṇ·hā अरूपतण्हा,a·rū·pa·taṇ·hā निरोधतण्हा।ni·ro·dha·taṇ·hā

     rūpataṇhā, arūpataṇhā, nirodhataṇhā.

     for the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm, and cessation.

132. 132

     तीणिtī·ṇi संयोजनानि—saṃ·yo·ja·nā·ni

     Tīṇi saṁyojanāni—

     <b>Three fetters:</b>

133. 133

     सक्कायदिट्ठि,sak·kā·ya·diṭ·ṭhi विचिकिच्छा,vi·ci·kic·chā सीलब्बतपरामासो।sī·lab·ba·ta·pa·rā·mā·so

     sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāso.

     substantialist view, doubt, and misapprehension of precepts and observances.

134. 134

     तयोta·yo आसवा—ā·sa·vā

     Tayo āsavā—

     <b>Three defilements:</b>

135. 135

     कामासवो,kā·mā·sa·vo भवासवो,bha·vā·sa·vo अविज्जासवो।a·vij·jā·sa·vo

     kāmāsavo, bhavāsavo, avijjāsavo.

     sensuality, desire for continued existence, and ignorance.

136. 136

     तयोta·yo भवा—bha·vā

     Tayo bhavā—

     <b>Three realms of existence:</b>

137. 137

     कामभवो,kā·ma·bha·vo रूपभवो,rū·pa·bha·vo अरूपभवो।a·rū·pa·bha·vo

     kāmabhavo, rūpabhavo, arūpabhavo.

     sensual, luminous form, and formless.

138. 138

     तिस्सोtis·so एसना—e·sa·nā

     Tisso esanā—

     <b>Three searches:</b>

139. 139

     कामेसना,kā·me·sa·nā भवेसना,bha·ve·sa·nā ब्रह्मचरियेसना।brah·ma·ca·ri·ye·sa·nā

     kāmesanā, bhavesanā, brahmacariyesanā.

     for sensual pleasures, for continued existence, and for a spiritual path.

140. 140

     तिस्सोtis·so विधा—vi·dhā

     Tisso vidhā—

     <b>Three kinds of discrimination:</b>

141. 141

     सेय्योहमस्मीतिsey·yo·ha·mas·mī·ti विधा,vi·dhā सदिसोहमस्मीतिsa·di·so·ha·mas·mī·ti विधा,vi·dhā हीनोहमस्मीतिhī·no·ha·mas·mī·ti विधा।vi·dhā

     seyyohamasmīti vidhā, sadisohamasmīti vidhā, hīnohamasmīti vidhā.

     ‘I’m better’, ‘I’m equal’, and ‘I’m worse’.

142. 142

     तयोta·yo अद्धा—ad·dhā

     Tayo addhā—

     <b>Three periods:</b>

143. 143

     अतीतोa·tī·to अद्धा,ad·dhā अनागतोa·nā·ga·to अद्धा,ad·dhā पच्चुप्पन्नोpac·cup·pan·no अद्धा।ad·dhā

     atīto addhā, anāgato addhā, paccuppanno addhā.

     past, future, and present.

144. 144

     तयोta·yo अन्ता—an·tā

     Tayo antā—

     <b>Three extremes:</b>

145. 145

     सक्कायोsak·kā·yo अन्तो,an·to सक्कायसमुदयोsak·kā·ya·sa·mu·da·yo अन्तो,an·to सक्कायनिरोधोsak·kā·ya·ni·ro·dho अन्तो।an·to

     sakkāyo anto, sakkāyasamudayo anto, sakkāyanirodho anto.

     substantial reality, the origin of substantial reality, and the cessation of substantial reality.

146. 146

     तिस्सोtis·so वेदना—ve·da·nā

     Tisso vedanā—

     <b>Three feelings:</b>

147. 147

     सुखाsu·khā वेदना,ve·da·nā दुक्खाduk·khā वेदना,ve·da·nā अदुक्खमसुखाa·duk·kha·ma·su·khā वेदना।ve·da·nā

     sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā.

     pleasure, pain, and neutral.

148. 148

     तिस्सोtis·so दुक्खता—duk·kha·tā

     Tisso dukkhatā—

     <b>Three forms of suffering:</b>

149. 149

     दुक्खदुक्खता,duk·kha·duk·kha·tā सङ्खारदुक्खता,saṅ·khā·ra·duk·kha·tā विपरिणामदुक्खता।vi·pa·ri·ṇā·ma·duk·kha·tā

     dukkhadukkhatā, saṅkhāradukkhatā, vipariṇāmadukkhatā.

     the suffering inherent in painful feeling, the suffering inherent in conditions, and the suffering inherent in perishing.

150. 150

     तयोta·yo रासी—rā·sī

     Tayo rāsī—

     <b>Three heaps:</b>

151. 151

     मिच्छत्तनियतोmic·chat·ta·ni·ya·to रासि,rā·si सम्मत्तनियतोsam·mat·ta·ni·ya·to रासि,rā·si अनियतोa·ni·ya·to रासि।rā·si

     micchattaniyato rāsi, sammattaniyato rāsi, aniyato rāsi.

     the heap of surety in the wrong way, the heap of surety in the right way, and the heap of lack of surety.

152. 152

     तयोta·yo तमा—ta·mā

     Tayo tamā—

     <b>Three darknesses:</b>

153. 153

     अतीतंa·tī·taṃ वाvā अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ आरब्भā·rab·bha कङ्खतिkaṅ·kha·ti विचिकिच्छतिvi·ci·kic·cha·ti नाधिमुच्चतिnā·dhi·muc·ca·ti नna सम्पसीदति,sam·pa·sī·da·ti अनागतंa·nā·ga·taṃ वाvā अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ आरब्भā·rab·bha कङ्खतिkaṅ·kha·ti विचिकिच्छतिvi·ci·kic·cha·ti नाधिमुच्चतिnā·dhi·muc·ca·ti नna सम्पसीदति,sam·pa·sī·da·ti एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi वाvā पच्चुप्पन्नंpac·cup·pan·naṃ अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ आरब्भā·rab·bha कङ्खतिkaṅ·kha·ti विचिकिच्छतिvi·ci·kic·cha·ti नाधिमुच्चतिnā·dhi·muc·ca·ti नna सम्पसीदति।sam·pa·sī·da·ti

     atītaṁ vā addhānaṁ ārabbha kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, anāgataṁ vā addhānaṁ ārabbha kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, etarahi vā paccuppannaṁ addhānaṁ ārabbha kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati.

     one is doubtful, uncertain, undecided, and lacking confidence about the past, future, and present.

154. 154

     तीणिtī·ṇi तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa अरक्खेय्यानि—a·rak·khey·yā·ni

     Tīṇi tathāgatassa arakkheyyāni—

     <b>Three things a Realized One need not hide:</b>

155. 155

     परिसुद्धकायसमाचारोpa·ri·sud·dha·kā·ya·sa·mā·cā·ro आवुसोā·vu·so तथागतो,ta·thā·ga·to नत्थिnat·thi तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa कायदुच्चरितं,kā·ya·duc·ca·ri·taṃ यंyaṃ तथागतोta·thā·ga·to रक्खेय्य:rak·khey·ya

     parisuddhakāyasamācāro āvuso tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa kāyaduccaritaṁ, yaṁ tathāgato rakkheyya:

     The Realized One’s behavior by way of body, speech, and mind is pure. He has no misconduct in these three ways that need be hidden, thinking:

156. 156

     ‘माmā मेme इदंi·daṃ परोpa·ro अञ्ञासी’ति।añ·ñā·sī

     ‘mā me idaṁ paro aññāsī’ti.

     ‘Don’t let others find this out about me!’

157. 157

     परिसुद्धवचीसमाचारोpa·ri·sud·dha·va·cī·sa·mā·cā·ro आवुसो,ā·vu·so तथागतो,ta·thā·ga·to नत्थिnat·thi तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa वचीदुच्चरितं,va·cī·duc·ca·ri·taṃ यंyaṃ तथागतोta·thā·ga·to रक्खेय्य:rak·khey·ya

     Parisuddhavacīsamācāro āvuso, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa vacīduccaritaṁ, yaṁ tathāgato rakkheyya:

     (Pāli only)

158. 158

     ‘माmā मेme इदंi·daṃ परोpa·ro अञ्ञासी’ति।añ·ñā·sī

     ‘mā me idaṁ paro aññāsī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

159. 159

     परिसुद्धमनोसमाचारो,pa·ri·sud·dha·ma·no·sa·mā·cā·ro आवुसो,ā·vu·so तथागतो,ta·thā·ga·to नत्थिnat·thi तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa मनोदुच्चरितंma·no·duc·ca·ri·taṃ यंyaṃ तथागतोta·thā·ga·to रक्खेय्य:rak·khey·ya

     Parisuddhamanosamācāro, āvuso, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa manoduccaritaṁ yaṁ tathāgato rakkheyya:

     (Pāli only)

160. 160

     ‘माmā मेme इदंi·daṃ परोpa·ro अञ्ञासी’ति।añ·ñā·sī

     ‘mā me idaṁ paro aññāsī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

161. 161

     तयोta·yo किञ्चना—kiñ·ca·nā

     Tayo kiñcanā—

     <b>Three possessions:</b>

162. 162

     रागोrā·go किञ्चनं,kiñ·ca·naṃ दोसोdo·so किञ्चनं,kiñ·ca·naṃ मोहोmo·ho किञ्चनं।kiñ·ca·naṃ

     rāgo kiñcanaṁ, doso kiñcanaṁ, moho kiñcanaṁ.

     greed, hate, and delusion.

163. 163

     तयोta·yo अग्गी—ag·gī

     Tayo aggī—

     <b>Three fires:</b>

164. 164

     रागग्गि,rā·gag·gi दोसग्गि,do·sag·gi मोहग्गि।mo·hag·gi

     rāgaggi, dosaggi, mohaggi.

     greed, hate, and delusion.

165. 165

     अपरेपिa·pa·re·pi तयोta·yo अग्गी—ag·gī

     Aparepi tayo aggī—

     <b>Another three fires:</b>

166. 166

     आहुनेय्यग्गि,ā·hu·ney·yag·gi गहपतग्गि,ga·ha·pa·tag·gi दक्खिणेय्यग्गि।dak·khi·ṇey·yag·gi

     āhuneyyaggi, gahapataggi, dakkhiṇeyyaggi.

     a fire for those worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, a fire for householders, and a fire for those worthy of a religious donation.

167. 167

     तिविधेनti·vi·dhe·na रूपसङ्गहो—rū·pa·saṅ·ga·ho

     Tividhena rūpasaṅgaho—

     <b>Threefold classification of the physical:</b>

168. 168

     सनिदस्सनसप्पटिघंsa·ni·das·sa·na·sap·pa·ṭi·ghaṃ रूपं,rū·paṃ अनिदस्सनसप्पटिघंa·ni·das·sa·na·sap·pa·ṭi·ghaṃ रूपं,rū·paṃ अनिदस्सनअप्पटिघंa·ni·das·sa·na·ap·pa·ṭi·ghaṃ रूपं।rū·paṃ

     sanidassanasappaṭighaṁ rūpaṁ, anidassanasappaṭighaṁ rūpaṁ, anidassanaappaṭighaṁ rūpaṁ.

     visible and resistant, invisible and resistant, and invisible and non-resistant.

169. 169

     तयोta·yo सङ्खारा—saṅ·khā·rā

     Tayo saṅkhārā—

     <b>Three choices:</b>

170. 170

     पुञ्ञाभिसङ्खारो,puñ·ñā·bhi·saṅ·khā·ro अपुञ्ञाभिसङ्खारो,a·puñ·ñā·bhi·saṅ·khā·ro आनेञ्जाभिसङ्खारो।ā·neñ·jā·bhi·saṅ·khā·ro

     puññābhisaṅkhāro, apuññābhisaṅkhāro, āneñjābhisaṅkhāro.

     good choices, bad choices, and imperturbable choices.

171. 171

     तयोta·yo पुग्गला—pug·ga·lā

     Tayo puggalā—

     <b>Three individuals:</b>

172. 172

     सेक्खोsek·kho पुग्गलो,pug·ga·lo असेक्खोa·sek·kho पुग्गलो,pug·ga·lo नेवसेक्खोne·va·sek·kho नासेक्खोnā·sek·kho पुग्गलो।pug·ga·lo

     sekkho puggalo, asekkho puggalo, nevasekkho nāsekkho puggalo.

     a trainee, an adept, and one who is neither a trainee nor an adept.

173. 173

     तयोta·yo थेरा—the·rā

     Tayo therā—

     <b>Three seniors:</b>

174. 174

     जातिथेरो,jā·ti·the·ro धम्मथेरो,dham·ma·the·ro सम्मुतिथेरो।sam·mu·ti·the·ro

     jātithero, dhammathero, sammutithero.

     a senior by birth, a senior in the teaching, and a senior by convention.

175. 175

     तीणिtī·ṇi पुञ्ञकिरियवत्थूनि—puñ·ña·ki·ri·ya·vat·thū·ni

     Tīṇi puññakiriyavatthūni—

     <b>Three grounds for making merit:</b>

176. 176

     दानमयंdā·na·ma·yaṃ पुञ्ञकिरियवत्थु,puñ·ña·ki·ri·ya·vat·thu सीलमयंsī·la·ma·yaṃ पुञ्ञकिरियवत्थु,puñ·ña·ki·ri·ya·vat·thu भावनामयंbhā·va·nā·ma·yaṃ पुञ्ञकिरियवत्थु।puñ·ña·ki·ri·ya·vat·thu

     dānamayaṁ puññakiriyavatthu, sīlamayaṁ puññakiriyavatthu, bhāvanāmayaṁ puññakiriyavatthu.

     giving, ethical conduct, and meditation.

177. 177

     तीणिtī·ṇi चोदनावत्थूनि—co·da·nā·vat·thū·ni

     Tīṇi codanāvatthūni—

     <b>Three grounds for accusations:</b>

178. 178

     दिट्ठेन,diṭ·ṭhe·na सुतेन,su·te·na परिसङ्काय।pa·ri·saṅ·kā·ya

     diṭṭhena, sutena, parisaṅkāya.

     what is seen, heard, and suspected.

179. 179

     तिस्सोtis·so कामूपपत्तियो—kā·mū·pa·pat·ti·yo

     Tisso kāmūpapattiyo—

     <b>Three kinds of sensual rebirth:</b>

180. 180

     सन्तावुसोsan·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā पच्चुपट्ठितकामा,pac·cu·paṭ·ṭhi·ta·kā·mā तेte पच्चुपट्ठितेसुpac·cu·paṭ·ṭhi·te·su कामेसुkā·me·su वसंva·saṃ वत्तेन्ति,vat·ten·ti सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi मनुस्साma·nus·sā एकच्चेe·kac·ce चca देवाde·vā एकच्चेe·kac·ce चca विनिपातिका।vi·ni·pā·ti·kā

     santāvuso sattā paccupaṭṭhitakāmā, te paccupaṭṭhitesu kāmesu vasaṁ vattenti, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā.

     There are sentient beings who desire what is present. They fall under the sway of presently arisen sensual pleasures. Namely, humans, some gods, and some beings in the underworld.

181. 181

     अयंa·yaṃ पठमाpa·ṭha·mā कामूपपत्ति।kā·mū·pa·pat·ti

     Ayaṁ paṭhamā kāmūpapatti.

     This is the first kind of sensual rebirth.

182. 182

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā निम्मितकामा,nim·mi·ta·kā·mā तेte निम्मिनित्वाnim·mi·nit·vā निम्मिनित्वाnim·mi·nit·vā कामेसुkā·me·su वसंva·saṃ वत्तेन्ति,vat·ten·ti सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā निम्मानरती।nim·mā·na·ra·tī

     Santāvuso, sattā nimmitakāmā, te nimminitvā nimminitvā kāmesu vasaṁ vattenti, seyyathāpi devā nimmānaratī.

     There are sentient beings who desire to create. Having repeatedly created, they fall under the sway of sensual pleasures. Namely, the gods who love to create.

183. 183

     अयंa·yaṃ दुतियाdu·ti·yā कामूपपत्ति।kā·mū·pa·pat·ti

     Ayaṁ dutiyā kāmūpapatti.

     This is the second kind of sensual rebirth.

184. 184

     सन्तावुसोsan·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā परनिम्मितकामा,pa·ra·nim·mi·ta·kā·mā तेte परनिम्मितेसुpa·ra·nim·mi·te·su कामेसुkā·me·su वसंva·saṃ वत्तेन्ति,vat·ten·ti सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā परनिम्मितवसवत्ती।pa·ra·nim·mi·ta·va·sa·vat·tī

     Santāvuso sattā paranimmitakāmā, te paranimmitesu kāmesu vasaṁ vattenti, seyyathāpi devā paranimmitavasavattī.

     There are sentient beings who desire what is created by others. They fall under the sway of sensual pleasures created by others. Namely, the gods who control what is created by others.

185. 185

     अयंa·yaṃ ततियाta·ti·yā कामूपपत्ति।kā·mū·pa·pat·ti

     Ayaṁ tatiyā kāmūpapatti.

     This is the third kind of sensual rebirth.

186. 186

     तिस्सोtis·so सुखूपपत्तियो—su·khū·pa·pat·ti·yo

     Tisso sukhūpapattiyo—

     <b>Three kinds of pleasant rebirth:</b>

187. 187

     सन्तावुसोsan·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā उप्पादेत्वाup·pā·det·vā उप्पादेत्वाup·pā·det·vā सुखंsu·khaṃ विहरन्ति,vi·ha·ran·ti सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā ब्रह्मकायिका।brah·ma·kā·yi·kā

     santāvuso sattā uppādetvā uppādetvā sukhaṁ viharanti, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā.

     There are sentient beings who, having repeatedly given rise to it, dwell in pleasure. Namely, the gods of the Divinity’s host.

188. 188

     अयंa·yaṃ पठमाpa·ṭha·mā सुखूपपत्ति।su·khū·pa·pat·ti

     Ayaṁ paṭhamā sukhūpapatti.

     This is the first pleasant rebirth.

189. 189

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā सुखेनsu·khe·na अभिसन्नाa·bhi·san·nā परिसन्नाpa·ri·san·nā परिपूराpa·ri·pū·rā परिप्फुटा।pa·rip·phu·ṭā

     Santāvuso, sattā sukhena abhisannā parisannā paripūrā paripphuṭā.

     There are sentient beings who are drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with pleasure.

190. 190

     तेte कदाचिka·dā·ci करहचिka·ra·ha·ci उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेन्ति:u·dā·nen·ti

     Te kadāci karahaci udānaṁ udānenti:

     Every so often they feel inspired to exclaim:

191. 191

     ‘अहोa·ho सुखं,su·khaṃ अहोa·ho सुखन्’ति,su·khan सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā आभस्सरा।ā·bhas·sa·rā

     ‘aho sukhaṁ, aho sukhan’ti, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā.

     ‘Oh, what bliss! Oh, what bliss!’ Namely, the gods of sublime luminosity.

192. 192

     अयंa·yaṃ दुतियाdu·ti·yā सुखूपपत्ति।su·khū·pa·pat·ti

     Ayaṁ dutiyā sukhūpapatti.

     This is the second pleasant rebirth.

193. 193

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā सुखेनsu·khe·na अभिसन्नाa·bhi·san·nā परिसन्नाpa·ri·san·nā परिपूराpa·ri·pū·rā परिप्फुटा।pa·rip·phu·ṭā

     Santāvuso, sattā sukhena abhisannā parisannā paripūrā paripphuṭā.

     There are sentient beings who are drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with pleasure.

194. 194

     तेte सन्तंयेवsan·taṃ·ye·va तुसिताtu·si·tā सुखंsu·khaṃ पटिसंवेदेन्ति,pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·den·ti सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā सुभकिण्हा।su·bha·kiṇ·hā

     Te santaṁyeva tusitā sukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā.

     Since they’re truly content, they experience pleasure. Namely, the gods of universal beauty.

195. 195

     अयंa·yaṃ ततियाta·ti·yā सुखूपपत्ति।su·khū·pa·pat·ti

     Ayaṁ tatiyā sukhūpapatti.

     This is the third pleasant rebirth.

196. 196

     तिस्सोtis·so पञ्ञा—pañ·ñā

     Tisso paññā—

     <b>Three kinds of wisdom:</b>

197. 197

     सेक्खाsek·khā पञ्ञा,pañ·ñā असेक्खाa·sek·khā पञ्ञा,pañ·ñā नेवसेक्खानासेक्खाne·va·sek·khā·nā·sek·khā पञ्ञा।pañ·ñā

     sekkhā paññā, asekkhā paññā, nevasekkhānāsekkhā paññā.

     the wisdom of a trainee, the wisdom of an adept, and the wisdom of one who is neither a trainee nor an adept.

198. 198

     अपरापिa·pa·rā·pi तिस्सोtis·so पञ्ञा—pañ·ñā

     Aparāpi tisso paññā—

     <b>Another three kinds of wisdom:</b>

199. 199

     चिन्तामयाcin·tā·ma·yā पञ्ञा,pañ·ñā सुतमयाsu·ta·ma·yā पञ्ञा,pañ·ñā भावनामयाbhā·va·nā·ma·yā पञ्ञा।pañ·ñā

     cintāmayā paññā, sutamayā paññā, bhāvanāmayā paññā.

     wisdom produced by thought, learning, and meditation.

200. 200

     तीणावुधानि—tī·ṇā·vu·dhā·ni

     Tīṇāvudhāni—

     <b>Three weapons:</b>

201. 201

     सुतावुधं,su·tā·vu·dhaṃ पविवेकावुधं,pa·vi·ve·kā·vu·dhaṃ पञ्ञावुधं।pañ·ñā·vu·dhaṃ

     sutāvudhaṁ, pavivekāvudhaṁ, paññāvudhaṁ.

     learning, seclusion, and wisdom.

202. 202

     तीणिन्द्रियानि—tī·ṇin·dri·yā·ni

     Tīṇindriyāni—

     <b>Three faculties:</b>

203. 203

     अनञ्ञातञ्ञस्सामीतिन्द्रियं,a·nañ·ñā·tañ·ñas·sā·mī·tin·dri·yaṃ अञ्ञिन्द्रियं,añ·ñin·dri·yaṃ अञ्ञाताविन्द्रियं।añ·ñā·tā·vin·dri·yaṃ

     anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṁ, aññindriyaṁ, aññātāvindriyaṁ.

     the faculty of understanding that enlightenment is imminent, the faculty of enlightenment, and the faculty of one who is enlightened.

204. 204

     तीणिtī·ṇi चक्खूनि—cak·khū·ni

     Tīṇi cakkhūni—

     <b>Three eyes:</b>

205. 205

     मंसचक्खु,maṃ·sa·cak·khu दिब्बचक्खु,dib·ba·cak·khu पञ्ञाचक्खु।pañ·ñā·cak·khu

     maṁsacakkhu, dibbacakkhu, paññācakkhu.

     the eye of the flesh, the eye of clairvoyance, and the eye of wisdom.

206. 206

     तिस्सोtis·so सिक्खा—sik·khā

     Tisso sikkhā—

     <b>Three trainings:</b>

207. 207

     अधिसीलसिक्खा,a·dhi·sī·la·sik·khā अधिचित्तसिक्खा,a·dhi·cit·ta·sik·khā अधिपञ्ञासिक्खा।a·dhi·pañ·ñā·sik·khā

     adhisīlasikkhā, adhicittasikkhā, adhipaññāsikkhā.

     in higher ethics, higher mind, and higher wisdom.

208. 208

     तिस्सोtis·so भावना—bhā·va·nā

     Tisso bhāvanā—

     <b>Three kinds of development:</b>

209. 209

     कायभावना,kā·ya·bhā·va·nā चित्तभावना,cit·ta·bhā·va·nā पञ्ञाभावना।pañ·ñā·bhā·va·nā

     kāyabhāvanā, cittabhāvanā, paññābhāvanā.

     the development of physical endurance, the development of the mind, and the development of wisdom.

210. 210

     तीणिtī·ṇi अनुत्तरियानि—a·nut·ta·ri·yā·ni

     Tīṇi anuttariyāni—

     <b>Three unsurpassable qualities:</b>

211. 211

     दस्सनानुत्तरियं,das·sa·nā·nut·ta·ri·yaṃ पटिपदानुत्तरियं,pa·ṭi·pa·dā·nut·ta·ri·yaṃ विमुत्तानुत्तरियं।vi·mut·tā·nut·ta·ri·yaṃ

     dassanānuttariyaṁ, paṭipadānuttariyaṁ, vimuttānuttariyaṁ.

     unsurpassable seeing, practice, and freedom.

212. 212

     तयोta·yo समाधी—sa·mā·dhī

     Tayo samādhī—

     <b>Three kinds of immersion:</b>

213. 213

     सवितक्कसविचारोsa·vi·tak·ka·sa·vi·cā·ro समाधि,sa·mā·dhi अवितक्कविचारमत्तोa·vi·tak·ka·vi·cā·ra·mat·to समाधि,sa·mā·dhi अवितक्कअविचारोa·vi·tak·ka·a·vi·cā·ro समाधि।sa·mā·dhi

     savitakkasavicāro samādhi, avitakkavicāramatto samādhi, avitakkaavicāro samādhi.

     Immersion with placing the mind and keeping it connected. Immersion without placing the mind, merely keeping it connected. Immersion without placing the mind or keeping it connected.

214. 214

     अपरेपिa·pa·re·pi तयोta·yo समाधी—sa·mā·dhī

     Aparepi tayo samādhī—

     <b>Another three kinds of immersion:</b>

215. 215

     सुञ्ञतोsuñ·ña·to समाधि,sa·mā·dhi अनिमित्तोa·ni·mit·to समाधि,sa·mā·dhi अप्पणिहितोap·pa·ṇi·hi·to समाधि।sa·mā·dhi

     suññato samādhi, animitto samādhi, appaṇihito samādhi.

     emptiness, signless, and undirected.

216. 216

     तीणिtī·ṇi सोचेय्यानि—so·cey·yā·ni

     Tīṇi soceyyāni—

     <b>Three purities:</b>

217. 217

     कायसोचेय्यं,kā·ya·so·cey·yaṃ वचीसोचेय्यं,va·cī·so·cey·yaṃ मनोसोचेय्यं।ma·no·so·cey·yaṃ

     kāyasoceyyaṁ, vacīsoceyyaṁ, manosoceyyaṁ.

     purity of body, speech, and mind.

218. 218

     तीणिtī·ṇi मोनेय्यानि—mo·ney·yā·ni

     Tīṇi moneyyāni—

     <b>Three kinds of sagacity:</b>

219. 219

     कायमोनेय्यं,kā·ya·mo·ney·yaṃ वचीमोनेय्यं,va·cī·mo·ney·yaṃ मनोमोनेय्यं।ma·no·mo·ney·yaṃ

     kāyamoneyyaṁ, vacīmoneyyaṁ, manomoneyyaṁ.

     sagacity of body, speech, and mind.

220. 220

     तीणिtī·ṇi कोसल्लानि—ko·sal·lā·ni

     Tīṇi kosallāni—

     <b>Three skills:</b>

221. 221

     आयकोसल्लं,ā·ya·ko·sal·laṃ अपायकोसल्लं,a·pā·ya·ko·sal·laṃ उपायकोसल्लं।u·pā·ya·ko·sal·laṃ

     āyakosallaṁ, apāyakosallaṁ, upāyakosallaṁ.

     skill in progress, skill in regress, and skill in means.

222. 222

     तयोta·yo मदा—ma·dā

     Tayo madā—

     <b>Three vanities:</b>

223. 223

     आरोग्यमदो,ā·rog·ya·ma·do योब्बनमदो,yob·ba·na·ma·do जीवितमदो।jī·vi·ta·ma·do

     ārogyamado, yobbanamado, jīvitamado.

     the vanity of health, the vanity of youth, and the vanity of life.

224. 224

     तीणिtī·ṇi आधिपतेय्यानि—ā·dhi·pa·tey·yā·ni

     Tīṇi ādhipateyyāni—

     <b>Three ways of putting something in charge:</b>

225. 225

     अत्ताधिपतेय्यं,at·tā·dhi·pa·tey·yaṃ लोकाधिपतेय्यं,lo·kā·dhi·pa·tey·yaṃ धम्माधिपतेय्यं।dham·mā·dhi·pa·tey·yaṃ

     attādhipateyyaṁ, lokādhipateyyaṁ, dhammādhipateyyaṁ.

     putting oneself, the world, or the teaching in charge.

226. 226

     तीणिtī·ṇi कथावत्थूनि—ka·thā·vat·thū·ni

     Tīṇi kathāvatthūni—

     <b>Three topics of discussion:</b>

227. 227

     अतीतंa·tī·taṃ वाvā अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ आरब्भā·rab·bha कथंka·thaṃ कथेय्य:ka·they·ya

     atītaṁ vā addhānaṁ ārabbha kathaṁ katheyya:

     You might discuss the past:

228. 228

     ‘एवंe·vaṃ अहोसिa·ho·si अतीतमद्धानन्’ति;a·tī·ta·mad·dhā·nan

     ‘evaṁ ahosi atītamaddhānan’ti;

     ‘That is how it was in the past.’

229. 229

     अनागतंa·nā·ga·taṃ वाvā अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ आरब्भā·rab·bha कथंka·thaṃ कथेय्य:ka·they·ya

     anāgataṁ vā addhānaṁ ārabbha kathaṁ katheyya:

     You might discuss the future:

230. 230

     ‘एवंe·vaṃ भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti अनागतमद्धानन्’ति;a·nā·ga·ta·mad·dhā·nan

     ‘evaṁ bhavissati anāgatamaddhānan’ti;

     ‘That is how it will be in the future.’

231. 231

     एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi वाvā पच्चुप्पन्नंpac·cup·pan·naṃ अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ आरब्भā·rab·bha कथंka·thaṃ कथेय्य:ka·they·ya

     etarahi vā paccuppannaṁ addhānaṁ ārabbha kathaṁ katheyya:

     Or you might discuss the present:

232. 232

     ‘एवंe·vaṃ होतिho·ti एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi पच्चुप्पन्नंpac·cup·pan·naṃ अद्धानन्’ति।ad·dhā·nan

     ‘evaṁ hoti etarahi paccuppannaṁ addhānan’ti.

     ‘This is how it is at present.’

233. 233

     तिस्सोtis·so विज्जा—vij·jā

     Tisso vijjā—

     <b>Three knowledges:</b>

234. 234

     पुब्बेनिवासानुस्सतिञाणंpub·be·ni·vā·sā·nus·sa·ti·ñā·ṇaṃ विज्जा,vij·jā सत्तानंsat·tā·naṃ चुतूपपातेञाणंcu·tū·pa·pā·te·ñā·ṇaṃ विज्जा,vij·jā आसवानंā·sa·vā·naṃ खयेञाणंkha·ye·ñā·ṇaṃ विज्जा।vij·jā

     pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṁ vijjā, sattānaṁ cutūpapāteñāṇaṁ vijjā, āsavānaṁ khayeñāṇaṁ vijjā.

     recollection of past lives, knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings, and knowledge of the ending of defilements.

235. 235

     तयोta·yo विहारा—vi·hā·rā

     Tayo vihārā—

     <b>Three meditative abidings:</b>

236. 236

     दिब्बोdib·bo विहारो,vi·hā·ro ब्रह्माbrah·mā विहारो,vi·hā·ro अरियोa·ri·yo विहारो।vi·hā·ro

     dibbo vihāro, brahmā vihāro, ariyo vihāro.

     the heavenly meditation, the divine meditation, and the noble meditation.

237. 237

     तीणिtī·ṇi पाटिहारियानि—pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yā·ni

     Tīṇi pāṭihāriyāni—

     <b>Three demonstrations:</b>

238. 238

     इद्धिपाटिहारियं,id·dhi·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yaṃ आदेसनापाटिहारियं,ā·de·sa·nā·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yaṃ अनुसासनीपाटिहारियं।a·nu·sā·sa·nī·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yaṃ

     iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ, ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṁ, anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ.

     The demonstration of psychic power, the demonstration of revealing, and the demonstration of instruction.

239. 239

     इमेi·me खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na तयोta·yo धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता।sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tayo dhammā sammadakkhātā.

     These are the teachings grouped by three that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

240. 240

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

241. 241

     4। चतुक्कca·tuk·ka

     4. Catukka

     4. Fours

242. 242

     अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na चत्तारोcat·tā·ro धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता।sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammā sammadakkhātā.

     There are teachings grouped by four that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

243. 243

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बं,saṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ नna विवदितब्बंvi·va·di·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

244. 244

     कतमेka·ta·me चत्तारो?cat·tā·ro

     Katame cattāro?

     What are the teachings grouped by four?

245. 245

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro सतिपट्ठाना।sa·ti·paṭ·ṭhā·nā

     Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā.

     <b>Four kinds of mindfulness meditation:</b>

246. 246

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu कायेkā·ye कायानुपस्सीkā·yā·nu·pas·sī विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti आतापीā·tā·pī सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no सतिमा,sa·ti·mā विनेय्यvi·ney·ya लोकेlo·ke अभिज्झादोमनस्सं।a·bhij·jhā·do·ma·nas·saṃ

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.

     It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.

247. 247

     वेदनासुve·da·nā·su वेदनानुपस्सीve·da·nā·nu·pas·sī …पे…pe

     Vedanāsu vedanānupassī …pe…

     They meditate observing an aspect of feelings …

248. 248

     चित्तेcit·te चित्तानुपस्सीcit·tā·nu·pas·sī …पे…pe

     citte cittānupassī …pe…

     mind …

249. 249

     धम्मेसुdham·me·su धम्मानुपस्सीdham·mā·nu·pas·sī विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti आतापीā·tā·pī सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no सतिमाsa·ti·mā विनेय्यvi·ney·ya लोकेlo·ke अभिज्झादोमनस्सं।a·bhij·jhā·do·ma·nas·saṃ

     dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.

     principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.

250. 250

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro सम्मप्पधाना।sam·map·pa·dhā·nā

     Cattāro sammappadhānā.

     <b>Four right efforts:</b>

251. 251

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अनुप्पन्नानंa·nup·pan·nā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ अनुप्पादायa·nup·pā·dā·ya छन्दंchan·daṃ जनेतिja·ne·ti वायमतिvā·ya·ma·ti वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti चित्तंcit·taṃ पग्गण्हातिpag·gaṇ·hā·ti पदहति।pa·da·ha·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati.

     A mendicant generates enthusiasm, tries, makes an effort, exerts the mind, and strives so that bad, unskillful qualities don’t arise.

252. 252

     उप्पन्नानंup·pan·nā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ पहानायpa·hā·nā·ya छन्दंchan·daṃ जनेतिja·ne·ti वायमतिvā·ya·ma·ti वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti चित्तंcit·taṃ पग्गण्हातिpag·gaṇ·hā·ti पदहति।pa·da·ha·ti

     Uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati.

     They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen are given up.

253. 253

     अनुप्पन्नानंa·nup·pan·nā·naṃ कुसलानंku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ उप्पादायup·pā·dā·ya छन्दंchan·daṃ जनेतिja·ne·ti वायमतिvā·ya·ma·ti वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti चित्तंcit·taṃ पग्गण्हातिpag·gaṇ·hā·ti पदहति।pa·da·ha·ti

     Anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati.

     They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities arise.

254. 254

     उप्पन्नानंup·pan·nā·naṃ कुसलानंku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ ठितियाṭhi·ti·yā असम्मोसायa·sam·mo·sā·ya भिय्योभावायbhiy·yo·bhā·vā·ya वेपुल्लायve·pul·lā·ya भावनायbhā·va·nā·ya पारिपूरियाpā·ri·pū·ri·yā छन्दंchan·daṃ जनेतिja·ne·ti वायमतिvā·ya·ma·ti वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti चित्तंcit·taṃ पग्गण्हातिpag·gaṇ·hā·ti पदहति।pa·da·ha·ti

     Uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati.

     They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities that have arisen remain, are not lost, but increase, mature, and are fully developed.

255. 255

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro इद्धिपादा।id·dhi·pā·dā

     Cattāro iddhipādā.

     <b>Four bases of psychic power:</b>

256. 256

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu छन्दसमाधिपधानसङ्खारसमन्नागतंchan·da·sa·mā·dhi·pa·dhā·na·saṅ·khā·ra·sa·man·nā·ga·taṃ इद्धिपादंid·dhi·pā·daṃ भावेति।bhā·ve·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti.

     A mendicant develops the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to enthusiasm, and active effort.

257. 257

     चित्तसमाधिपधानसङ्खारसमन्नागतंcit·ta·sa·mā·dhi·pa·dhā·na·saṅ·khā·ra·sa·man·nā·ga·taṃ इद्धिपादंid·dhi·pā·daṃ भावेति।bhā·ve·ti

     Cittasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti.

     They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to mental development, and active effort.

258. 258

     वीरियसमाधिपधानसङ्खारसमन्नागतंvī·ri·ya·sa·mā·dhi·pa·dhā·na·saṅ·khā·ra·sa·man·nā·ga·taṃ इद्धिपादंid·dhi·pā·daṃ भावेति।bhā·ve·ti

     Vīriyasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti.

     They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to energy, and active effort.

259. 259

     वीमंसासमाधिपधानसङ्खारसमन्नागतंvī·maṃ·sā·sa·mā·dhi·pa·dhā·na·saṅ·khā·ra·sa·man·nā·ga·taṃ इद्धिपादंid·dhi·pā·daṃ भावेति।bhā·ve·ti

     Vīmaṁsāsamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti.

     They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to inquiry, and active effort.

260. 260

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri झानानि।jhā·nā·ni

     Cattāri jhānāni.

     <b>Four absorptions:</b>

261. 261

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu विविच्चेवvi·vic·ce·va कामेहिkā·me·hi विविच्चvi·vic·ca अकुसलेहिa·ku·sa·le·hi धम्मेहिdham·me·hi सवितक्कंsa·vi·tak·kaṃ सविचारंsa·vi·cā·raṃ विवेकजंvi·ve·ka·jaṃ पीतिसुखंpī·ti·su·khaṃ पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     A mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected.

262. 262

     वितक्कविचारानंvi·tak·ka·vi·cā·rā·naṃ वूपसमाvū·pa·sa·mā अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ सम्पसादनंsam·pa·sā·da·naṃ चेतसोce·ta·so एकोदिभावंe·ko·di·bhā·vaṃ अवितक्कंa·vi·tak·kaṃ अविचारंa·vi·cā·raṃ समाधिजंsa·mā·dhi·jaṃ पीतिसुखंpī·ti·su·khaṃ दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected.

263. 263

     पीतियाpī·ti·yā चca विरागाvi·rā·gā उपेक्खकोu·pek·kha·ko चca विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सतोsa·to चca सम्पजानो,sam·pa·jā·no सुखञ्चsu·khañ·ca कायेनkā·ye·na पटिसंवेदेति,pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·de·ti यंyaṃ तंtaṃ अरियाa·ri·yā आचिक्खन्ति:ā·cik·khan·ti ‘उपेक्खकोu·pek·kha·ko सतिमाsa·ti·mā सुखविहारी’तिsu·kha·vi·hā·rī ततियंta·ti·yaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’

264. 264

     सुखस्सsu·khas·sa चca पहानाpa·hā·nā दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa चca पहाना,pa·hā·nā पुब्बेवpub·be·va सोमनस्सदोमनस्सानंso·ma·nas·sa·do·ma·nas·sā·naṃ अत्थङ्गमा,at·thaṅ·ga·mā अदुक्खमसुखंa·duk·kha·ma·su·khaṃ उपेक्खासतिपारिसुद्धिंu·pek·khā·sa·ti·pā·ri·sud·dhiṃ चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.

265. 265

     चतस्सोca·tas·so समाधिभावना।sa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā

     Catasso samādhibhāvanā.

     <b>Four ways of developing immersion further:</b>

266. 266

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā दिट्ठधम्मसुखविहारायdiṭ·ṭha·dham·ma·su·kha·vi·hā·rā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Atthāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṁvattati.

     There is a way of developing immersion further that leads to blissful meditation in this life.

267. 267

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā ञाणदस्सनपटिलाभायñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·pa·ṭi·lā·bhā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Atthāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāya saṁvattati.

     There is a way of developing immersion further that leads to gaining knowledge and vision.

268. 268

     अत्थावुसोat·thā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā सतिसम्पजञ्ञायsa·ti·sam·pa·jañ·ñā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Atthāvuso samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satisampajaññāya saṁvattati.

     There is a way of developing immersion further that leads to mindfulness and awareness.

269. 269

     अत्थावुसोat·thā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā आसवानंā·sa·vā·naṃ खयायkha·yā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Atthāvuso samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā āsavānaṁ khayāya saṁvattati.

     There is a way of developing immersion further that leads to the ending of defilements.

270. 270

     कतमाka·ta·mā चावुसो,cā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā दिट्ठधम्मसुखविहारायdiṭ·ṭha·dham·ma·su·kha·vi·hā·rā·ya संवत्तति?saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Katamā cāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṁvattati?

     And what is the way of developing immersion further that leads to blissful meditation in this life?

271. 271

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu विविच्चेवvi·vic·ce·va कामेहिkā·me·hi विविच्चvi·vic·ca अकुसलेहिa·ku·sa·le·hi धम्मेहिdham·me·hi सवितक्कंsa·vi·tak·kaṃ …

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ …

     It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption …

272. 272

     पे…pe

     pe…

     second absorption …

273. 273

     चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     fourth absorption.

274. 274

     अयं,a·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā दिट्ठधम्मसुखविहारायdiṭ·ṭha·dham·ma·su·kha·vi·hā·rā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayaṁ, āvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṁvattati.

     This is the way of developing immersion further that leads to blissful meditation in this life.

275. 275

     कतमाka·ta·mā चावुसो,cā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā ञाणदस्सनपटिलाभायñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·pa·ṭi·lā·bhā·ya संवत्तति?saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Katamā cāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāya saṁvattati?

     And what is the way of developing immersion further that leads to gaining knowledge and vision?

276. 276

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu आलोकसञ्ञंā·lo·ka·sañ·ñaṃ मनसिma·na·si करोति,ka·ro·ti दिवासञ्ञंdi·vā·sañ·ñaṃ अधिट्ठातिa·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti यथाya·thā दिवाdi·vā तथाta·thā रत्तिं,rat·tiṃ यथाya·thā रत्तिंrat·tiṃ तथाta·thā दिवा।di·vā

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu ālokasaññaṁ manasi karoti, divāsaññaṁ adhiṭṭhāti yathā divā tathā rattiṁ, yathā rattiṁ tathā divā.

     A mendicant applies their mind to the perception of light, focusing on the perception of day regardless of whether it’s night or day.

277. 277

     इतिi·ti विवटेनvi·va·ṭe·na चेतसाce·ta·sā अपरियोनद्धेनa·pa·ri·yo·nad·dhe·na सप्पभासंsap·pa·bhā·saṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ भावेति।bhā·ve·ti

     Iti vivaṭena cetasā apariyonaddhena sappabhāsaṁ cittaṁ bhāveti.

     And so, with an open and unenveloped heart, they develop a mind that’s full of radiance.

278. 278

     अयं,a·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā ञाणदस्सनपटिलाभायñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·pa·ṭi·lā·bhā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayaṁ, āvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāya saṁvattati.

     This is the way of developing immersion further that leads to gaining knowledge and vision.

279. 279

     कतमाka·ta·mā चावुसो,cā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā सतिसम्पजञ्ञायsa·ti·sam·pa·jañ·ñā·ya संवत्तति?saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Katamā cāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satisampajaññāya saṁvattati?

     And what is the way of developing immersion further that leads to mindfulness and awareness?

280. 280

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no विदिताvi·di·tā वेदनाve·da·nā उप्पज्जन्ति,up·paj·jan·ti विदिताvi·di·tā उपट्ठहन्ति,u·paṭ·ṭha·han·ti विदिताvi·di·tā अब्भत्थंab·bhat·thaṃ गच्छन्ति।gac·chan·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno viditā vedanā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti.

     A mendicant knows feelings as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away.

281. 281

     विदिताvi·di·tā सञ्ञाsañ·ñā उप्पज्जन्ति,up·paj·jan·ti विदिताvi·di·tā उपट्ठहन्ति,u·paṭ·ṭha·han·ti विदिताvi·di·tā अब्भत्थंab·bhat·thaṃ गच्छन्ति।gac·chan·ti

     Viditā saññā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti.

     They know perceptions as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away.

282. 282

     विदिताvi·di·tā वितक्काvi·tak·kā उप्पज्जन्ति,up·paj·jan·ti विदिताvi·di·tā उपट्ठहन्ति,u·paṭ·ṭha·han·ti विदिताvi·di·tā अब्भत्थंab·bhat·thaṃ गच्छन्ति।gac·chan·ti

     Viditā vitakkā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti.

     They know thoughts as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away.

283. 283

     अयं,a·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā सतिसम्पजञ्ञायsa·ti·sam·pa·jañ·ñā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayaṁ, āvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satisampajaññāya saṁvattati.

     This is the way of developing immersion further that leads to mindfulness and awareness.

284. 284

     कतमाka·ta·mā चावुसो,cā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā आसवानंā·sa·vā·naṃ खयायkha·yā·ya संवत्तति?saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Katamā cāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā āsavānaṁ khayāya saṁvattati?

     And what is the way of developing immersion further that leads to the ending of defilements?

285. 285

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पञ्चसुpañ·ca·su उपादानक्खन्धेसुu·pā·dā·nak·khan·dhe·su उदयब्बयानुपस्सीu·da·yab·ba·yā·nu·pas·sī विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu udayabbayānupassī viharati.

     A mendicant meditates observing rise and fall in the five grasping aggregates.

286. 286

     इतिi·ti रूपं,rū·paṃ इतिi·ti रूपस्सrū·pas·sa समुदयो,sa·mu·da·yo इतिi·ti रूपस्सrū·pas·sa अत्थङ्गमो।at·thaṅ·ga·mo

     Iti rūpaṁ, iti rūpassa samudayo, iti rūpassa atthaṅgamo.

     ‘Such is form, such is the origin of form, such is the disappearance of form.

287. 287

     इतिi·ti वेदनाve·da·nā …पे…pe

     Iti vedanā …pe…

     Such are feelings …

288. 288

     इतिi·ti सञ्ञाsañ·ñā …

     iti saññā …

     perceptions …

289. 289

     इतिi·ti सङ्खाराsaṅ·khā·rā …

     iti saṅkhārā …

     choices …

290. 290

     इतिi·ti विञ्ञाणं,viñ·ñā·ṇaṃ इतिi·ti विञ्ञाणस्सviñ·ñā·ṇas·sa समुदयो,sa·mu·da·yo इतिi·ti विञ्ञाणस्सviñ·ñā·ṇas·sa अत्थङ्गमो।at·thaṅ·ga·mo

     iti viññāṇaṁ, iti viññāṇassa samudayo, iti viññāṇassa atthaṅgamo.

     consciousness, such is the origin of consciousness, such is the disappearance of consciousness.’

291. 291

     अयं,a·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so समाधिभावनाsa·mā·dhi·bhā·va·nā भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā आसवानंā·sa·vā·naṃ खयायkha·yā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayaṁ, āvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā āsavānaṁ khayāya saṁvattati.

     This is the way of developing immersion further that leads to the ending of defilements.

292. 292

     चतस्सोca·tas·so अप्पमञ्ञा।ap·pa·mañ·ñā

     Catasso appamaññā.

     <b>Four limitless states:</b>

293. 293

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu मेत्तासहगतेनmet·tā·sa·ha·ga·te·na चेतसाce·ta·sā एकंe·kaṃ दिसंdi·saṃ फरित्वाpha·rit·vā विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti तथाta·thā दुतियं।du·ti·yaṃ तथाta·thā ततियं।ta·ti·yaṃ तथाta·thā चतुत्थं।ca·tut·thaṃ इतिi·ti उद्धमधोud·dha·ma·dho तिरियंti·ri·yaṃ सब्बधिsab·ba·dhi सब्बत्ततायsab·bat·ta·tā·ya सब्बावन्तंsab·bā·van·taṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ मेत्तासहगतेनmet·tā·sa·ha·ga·te·na चेतसाce·ta·sā विपुलेनvi·pu·le·na महग्गतेनma·hag·ga·te·na अप्पमाणेनap·pa·mā·ṇe·na अवेरेनa·ve·re·na अब्यापज्जेनab·yā·paj·je·na फरित्वाpha·rit·vā विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati. Tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati.

     A mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.

294. 294

     करुणासहगतेनka·ru·ṇā·sa·ha·ga·te·na चेतसाce·ta·sā …पे…pe

     Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe…

     They meditate spreading a heart full of compassion …

295. 295

     मुदितासहगतेनmu·di·tā·sa·ha·ga·te·na चेतसाce·ta·sā …पे…pe

     muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe…

     rejoicing …

296. 296

     उपेक्खासहगतेनu·pek·khā·sa·ha·ga·te·na चेतसाce·ta·sā एकंe·kaṃ दिसंdi·saṃ फरित्वाpha·rit·vā विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti तथाta·thā दुतियं।du·ti·yaṃ तथाta·thā ततियं।ta·ti·yaṃ तथाta·thā चतुत्थं।ca·tut·thaṃ इतिi·ti उद्धमधोud·dha·ma·dho तिरियंti·ri·yaṃ सब्बधिsab·ba·dhi सब्बत्ततायsab·bat·ta·tā·ya सब्बावन्तंsab·bā·van·taṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपेक्खासहगतेनu·pek·khā·sa·ha·ga·te·na चेतसाce·ta·sā विपुलेनvi·pu·le·na महग्गतेनma·hag·ga·te·na अप्पमाणेनap·pa·mā·ṇe·na अवेरेनa·ve·re·na अब्यापज्जेनab·yā·paj·je·na फरित्वाpha·rit·vā विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati. Tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati.

     equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.

297. 297

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro आरुप्पा।ā·rup·pā

     Cattāro āruppā.

     <b>Four formless states:</b>

298. 298

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सब्बसोsab·ba·so रूपसञ्ञानंrū·pa·sañ·ñā·naṃ समतिक्कमाsa·ma·tik·ka·mā पटिघसञ्ञानंpa·ṭi·gha·sañ·ñā·naṃ अत्थङ्गमाat·thaṅ·ga·mā नानत्तसञ्ञानंnā·nat·ta·sañ·ñā·naṃ अमनसिकाराa·ma·na·si·kā·rā ‘अनन्तोa·nan·to आकासो’तिā·kā·so आकासानञ्चायतनंā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     A mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space.

299. 299

     सब्बसोsab·ba·so आकासानञ्चायतनंā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘अनन्तंa·nan·taṃ विञ्ञाणन्’तिviñ·ñā·ṇan विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनंviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness.

300. 300

     सब्बसोsab·ba·so विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनंviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘नत्थिnat·thi किञ्ची’तिkiñ·cī आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनंā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness.

301. 301

     सब्बसोsab·ba·so आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनंā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma नेवसञ्ञानासञ्ञायतनंne·va·sañ·ñā·nā·sañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.

302. 302

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri अपस्सेनानि।a·pas·se·nā·ni

     Cattāri apassenāni.

     <b>Four supports:</b>

303. 303

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्खायेकंsaṅ·khā·ye·kaṃ पटिसेवति,pa·ṭi·se·va·ti सङ्खायेकंsaṅ·khā·ye·kaṃ अधिवासेति,a·dhi·vā·se·ti सङ्खायेकंsaṅ·khā·ye·kaṃ परिवज्जेति,pa·ri·vaj·je·ti सङ्खायेकंsaṅ·khā·ye·kaṃ विनोदेति।vi·no·de·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu saṅkhāyekaṁ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṁ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṁ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṁ vinodeti.

     After appraisal, a mendicant uses some things, endures some things, avoids some things, and dispels some things.

304. 304

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro अरियवंसा।a·ri·ya·vaṃ·sā

     Cattāro ariyavaṁsā.

     <b>Four noble customs:</b>

305. 305

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्तुट्ठोsan·tuṭ·ṭho होतिho·ti इतरीतरेनi·ta·rī·ta·re·na चीवरेन,cī·va·re·na इतरीतरचीवरसन्तुट्ठियाi·ta·rī·ta·ra·cī·va·ra·san·tuṭ·ṭhi·yā चca वण्णवादी,vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī नna चca चीवरहेतुcī·va·ra·he·tu अनेसनंa·ne·sa·naṃ अप्पतिरूपंap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ आपज्जति;ā·paj·ja·ti अलद्धाa·lad·dhā चca चीवरंcī·va·raṃ नna परितस्सति,pa·ri·tas·sa·ti लद्धाlad·dhā चca चीवरंcī·va·raṃ अगधितोa·ga·dhi·to अमुच्छितोa·muc·chi·to अनज्झापन्नोa·naj·jhā·pan·no आदीनवदस्सावीā·dī·na·va·das·sā·vī निस्सरणपञ्ञोnis·sa·ra·ṇa·pañ·ño परिभुञ्जति;pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·ti तायtā·ya चca पनpa·na इतरीतरचीवरसन्तुट्ठियाi·ta·rī·ta·ra·cī·va·ra·san·tuṭ·ṭhi·yā नेवत्तानुक्कंसेतिne·vat·tā·nuk·kaṃ·se·ti नna परंpa·raṃ वम्भेति।vam·bhe·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti itarītarena cīvarena, itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, na ca cīvarahetu anesanaṁ appatirūpaṁ āpajjati; aladdhā ca cīvaraṁ na paritassati, laddhā ca cīvaraṁ agadhito amucchito anajjhāpanno ādīnavadassāvī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati; tāya ca pana itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā nevattānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti.

     A mendicant is content with any kind of robe, and praises such contentment. They don’t employ improper solicitation for the sake of a robe. They don’t worry if they don’t get a robe. And if they do get a robe, they use it untied, uninfatuated, unattached, seeing the drawback, and understanding the escape. And on account of that they don’t glorify themselves or put others down.

306. 306

     योyo हिhi तत्थtat·tha दक्खोdak·kho अनलसोa·na·la·so सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no पटिस्सतो,pa·ṭis·sa·to अयंa·yaṃ वुच्चतावुसो:vuc·ca·tā·vu·so ‘भिक्खुbhik·khu पोराणेpo·rā·ṇe अग्गञ्ञेag·gañ·ñe अरियवंसेa·ri·ya·vaṃ·se ठितो’।ṭhi·to

     Yo hi tattha dakkho analaso sampajāno paṭissato, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘bhikkhu porāṇe aggaññe ariyavaṁse ṭhito’.

     A mendicant who is deft, tireless, aware, and mindful in this is said to stand in the ancient, primordial noble custom.

307. 307

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्तुट्ठोsan·tuṭ·ṭho होतिho·ti इतरीतरेनi·ta·rī·ta·re·na पिण्डपातेन,piṇ·ḍa·pā·te·na इतरीतरपिण्डपातसन्तुट्ठियाi·ta·rī·ta·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·san·tuṭ·ṭhi·yā चca वण्णवादी,vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī नna चca पिण्डपातहेतुpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·he·tu अनेसनंa·ne·sa·naṃ अप्पतिरूपंap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ आपज्जति;ā·paj·ja·ti अलद्धाa·lad·dhā चca पिण्डपातंpiṇ·ḍa·pā·taṃ नna परितस्सति,pa·ri·tas·sa·ti लद्धाlad·dhā चca पिण्डपातंpiṇ·ḍa·pā·taṃ अगधितोa·ga·dhi·to अमुच्छितोa·muc·chi·to अनज्झापन्नोa·naj·jhā·pan·no आदीनवदस्सावीā·dī·na·va·das·sā·vī निस्सरणपञ्ञोnis·sa·ra·ṇa·pañ·ño परिभुञ्जति;pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·ti तायtā·ya चca पनpa·na इतरीतरपिण्डपातसन्तुट्ठियाi·ta·rī·ta·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·san·tuṭ·ṭhi·yā नेवत्तानुक्कंसेतिne·vat·tā·nuk·kaṃ·se·ti नna परंpa·raṃ वम्भेति।vam·bhe·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti itarītarena piṇḍapātena, itarītarapiṇḍapātasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, na ca piṇḍapātahetu anesanaṁ appatirūpaṁ āpajjati; aladdhā ca piṇḍapātaṁ na paritassati, laddhā ca piṇḍapātaṁ agadhito amucchito anajjhāpanno ādīnavadassāvī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati; tāya ca pana itarītarapiṇḍapātasantuṭṭhiyā nevattānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti.

     Furthermore, a mendicant is content with any kind of almsfood …

308. 308

     योyo हिhi तत्थtat·tha दक्खोdak·kho अनलसोa·na·la·so सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no पटिस्सतो,pa·ṭis·sa·to अयंa·yaṃ वुच्चतावुसो:vuc·ca·tā·vu·so ‘भिक्खुbhik·khu पोराणेpo·rā·ṇe अग्गञ्ञेag·gañ·ñe अरियवंसेa·ri·ya·vaṃ·se ठितो’।ṭhi·to

     Yo hi tattha dakkho analaso sampajāno paṭissato, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘bhikkhu porāṇe aggaññe ariyavaṁse ṭhito’.

     (Pāli only)

309. 309

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्तुट्ठोsan·tuṭ·ṭho होतिho·ti इतरीतरेनi·ta·rī·ta·re·na सेनासनेन,se·nā·sa·ne·na इतरीतरसेनासनसन्तुट्ठियाi·ta·rī·ta·ra·se·nā·sa·na·san·tuṭ·ṭhi·yā चca वण्णवादी,vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī नna चca सेनासनहेतुse·nā·sa·na·he·tu अनेसनंa·ne·sa·naṃ अप्पतिरूपंap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ आपज्जति;ā·paj·ja·ti अलद्धाa·lad·dhā चca सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ नna परितस्सति,pa·ri·tas·sa·ti लद्धाlad·dhā चca सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ अगधितोa·ga·dhi·to अमुच्छितोa·muc·chi·to अनज्झापन्नोa·naj·jhā·pan·no आदीनवदस्सावीā·dī·na·va·das·sā·vī निस्सरणपञ्ञोnis·sa·ra·ṇa·pañ·ño परिभुञ्जति;pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·ti तायtā·ya चca पनpa·na इतरीतरसेनासनसन्तुट्ठियाi·ta·rī·ta·ra·se·nā·sa·na·san·tuṭ·ṭhi·yā नेवत्तानुक्कंसेतिne·vat·tā·nuk·kaṃ·se·ti नna परंpa·raṃ वम्भेति।vam·bhe·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti itarītarena senāsanena, itarītarasenāsanasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, na ca senāsanahetu anesanaṁ appatirūpaṁ āpajjati; aladdhā ca senāsanaṁ na paritassati, laddhā ca senāsanaṁ agadhito amucchito anajjhāpanno ādīnavadassāvī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati; tāya ca pana itarītarasenāsanasantuṭṭhiyā nevattānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti.

     Furthermore, a mendicant is content with any kind of lodgings …

310. 310

     योyo हिhi तत्थtat·tha दक्खोdak·kho अनलसोa·na·la·so सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no पटिस्सतो,pa·ṭis·sa·to अयंa·yaṃ वुच्चतावुसो:vuc·ca·tā·vu·so ‘भिक्खुbhik·khu पोराणेpo·rā·ṇe अग्गञ्ञेag·gañ·ñe अरियवंसेa·ri·ya·vaṃ·se ठितो’।ṭhi·to

     Yo hi tattha dakkho analaso sampajāno paṭissato, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘bhikkhu porāṇe aggaññe ariyavaṁse ṭhito’.

     (Pāli only)

311. 311

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पहानारामोpa·hā·nā·rā·mo होतिho·ti पहानरतो,pa·hā·na·ra·to भावनारामोbhā·va·nā·rā·mo होतिho·ti भावनारतो;bhā·va·nā·ra·to तायtā·ya चca पनpa·na पहानारामतायpa·hā·nā·rā·ma·tā·ya पहानरतियाpa·hā·na·ra·ti·yā भावनारामतायbhā·va·nā·rā·ma·tā·ya भावनारतियाbhā·va·nā·ra·ti·yā नेवत्तानुक्कंसेतिne·vat·tā·nuk·kaṃ·se·ti नna परंpa·raṃ वम्भेति।vam·bhe·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu pahānārāmo hoti pahānarato, bhāvanārāmo hoti bhāvanārato; tāya ca pana pahānārāmatāya pahānaratiyā bhāvanārāmatāya bhāvanāratiyā nevattānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti.

     Furthermore, a mendicant enjoys giving up and loves to give up. They enjoy meditation and love to meditate. But they don’t glorify themselves or put down others on account of their love for giving up and meditation.

312. 312

     योyo हिhi तत्थtat·tha दक्खोdak·kho अनलसोa·na·la·so सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no पटिस्सतोpa·ṭis·sa·to अयंa·yaṃ वुच्चतावुसो:vuc·ca·tā·vu·so ‘भिक्खुbhik·khu पोराणेpo·rā·ṇe अग्गञ्ञेag·gañ·ñe अरियवंसेa·ri·ya·vaṃ·se ठितो’।ṭhi·to

     Yo hi tattha dakkho analaso sampajāno paṭissato ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘bhikkhu porāṇe aggaññe ariyavaṁse ṭhito’.

     A mendicant who is deft, tireless, aware, and mindful in this is said to stand in the ancient, primordial noble custom.

313. 313

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri पधानानि।pa·dhā·nā·ni

     Cattāri padhānāni.

     <b>Four efforts:</b>

314. 314

     संवरपधानंsaṃ·va·ra·pa·dhā·naṃ पहानपधानंpa·hā·na·pa·dhā·naṃ भावनापधानंbhā·va·nā·pa·dhā·naṃ अनुरक्खणापधानं।a·nu·rak·kha·ṇā·pa·dhā·naṃ

     Saṁvarapadhānaṁ pahānapadhānaṁ bhāvanāpadhānaṁ anurakkhaṇāpadhānaṁ.

     The efforts to restrain, to give up, to develop, and to preserve.

315. 315

     कतमञ्चावुसो,ka·ta·mañ·cā·vu·so संवरपधानं?saṃ·va·ra·pa·dhā·naṃ

     Katamañcāvuso, saṁvarapadhānaṁ?

     And what is the effort to restrain?

316. 316

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā रूपंrū·paṃ दिस्वाdis·vā नna निमित्तग्गाहीni·mit·tag·gā·hī होतिho·ti नानुब्यञ्जनग्गाही।nā·nub·yañ·ja·nag·gā·hī

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī.

     When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details.

317. 317

     यत्वाधिकरणमेनंyat·vā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·me·naṃ चक्खुन्द्रियंcak·khun·dri·yaṃ असंवुतंa·saṃ·vu·taṃ विहरन्तंvi·ha·ran·taṃ अभिज्झादोमनस्साa·bhij·jhā·do·ma·nas·sā पापकाpā·pa·kā अकुसलाa·ku·sa·lā धम्माdham·mā अन्वास्सवेय्युं,an·vās·sa·vey·yuṃ तस्सtas·sa संवरायsaṃ·va·rā·ya पटिपज्जति,pa·ṭi·paj·ja·ti रक्खतिrak·kha·ti चक्खुन्द्रियं,cak·khun·dri·yaṃ चक्खुन्द्रियेcak·khun·dri·ye संवरंsaṃ·va·raṃ आपज्जति।ā·paj·ja·ti

     Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati.

     If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint.

318. 318

     सोतेनso·te·na सद्दंsad·daṃ सुत्वाsut·vā …

     Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …

     When they hear a sound with their ears …

319. 319

     घानेनghā·ne·na गन्धंgan·dhaṃ घायित्वाghā·yit·vā …

     ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …

     When they smell an odor with their nose …

320. 320

     जिव्हायjiv·hā·ya रसंra·saṃ सायित्वाsā·yit·vā …

     jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …

     When they taste a flavor with their tongue …

321. 321

     कायेनkā·ye·na फोट्ठब्बंphoṭ·ṭhab·baṃ फुसित्वाphu·sit·vā …

     kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …

     When they feel a touch with their body …

322. 322

     मनसाma·na·sā धम्मंdham·maṃ विञ्ञायviñ·ñā·ya नna निमित्तग्गाहीni·mit·tag·gā·hī होतिho·ti नानुब्यञ्जनग्गाही।nā·nub·yañ·ja·nag·gā·hī

     manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī.

     When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details.

323. 323

     यत्वाधिकरणमेनंyat·vā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·me·naṃ मनिन्द्रियंma·nin·dri·yaṃ असंवुतंa·saṃ·vu·taṃ विहरन्तंvi·ha·ran·taṃ अभिज्झादोमनस्साa·bhij·jhā·do·ma·nas·sā पापकाpā·pa·kā अकुसलाa·ku·sa·lā धम्माdham·mā अन्वास्सवेय्युं,an·vās·sa·vey·yuṃ तस्सtas·sa संवरायsaṃ·va·rā·ya पटिपज्जति,pa·ṭi·paj·ja·ti रक्खतिrak·kha·ti मनिन्द्रियं,ma·nin·dri·yaṃ मनिन्द्रियेma·nin·dri·ye संवरंsaṃ·va·raṃ आपज्जति।ā·paj·ja·ti

     Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati.

     If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint.

324. 324

     इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतावुसो,vuc·ca·tā·vu·so संवरपधानं।saṃ·va·ra·pa·dhā·naṃ

     Idaṁ vuccatāvuso, saṁvarapadhānaṁ.

     This is called the effort to restrain.

325. 325

     कतमञ्चावुसो,ka·ta·mañ·cā·vu·so पहानपधानं?pa·hā·na·pa·dhā·naṃ

     Katamañcāvuso, pahānapadhānaṁ?

     And what is the effort to give up?

326. 326

     इध,i·dha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ कामवितक्कंkā·ma·vi·tak·kaṃ नाधिवासेतिnā·dhi·vā·se·ti पजहतिpa·ja·ha·ti विनोदेतिvi·no·de·ti ब्यन्तिंbyan·tiṃ करोतिka·ro·ti अनभावंa·na·bhā·vaṃ गमेति;ga·me·ti

     Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu uppannaṁ kāmavitakkaṁ nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantiṁ karoti anabhāvaṁ gameti;

     It’s when a mendicant doesn’t tolerate a sensual,

327. 327

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ ब्यापादवितक्कंbyā·pā·da·vi·tak·kaṃ …पे…pe

     uppannaṁ byāpādavitakkaṁ …pe…

     malicious,

328. 328

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ विहिंसावितक्कंvi·hiṃ·sā·vi·tak·kaṃ …पे…pe

     uppannaṁ vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ …pe…

     or cruel thought that’s arisen, but gives it up, dispels it, eliminates it, and obliterates it.

329. 329

     उप्पन्नुप्पन्नेup·pan·nup·pan·ne पापकेpā·pa·ke अकुसलेa·ku·sa·le धम्मेdham·me नाधिवासेतिnā·dhi·vā·se·ti पजहतिpa·ja·ha·ti विनोदेतिvi·no·de·ti ब्यन्तिंbyan·tiṃ करोतिka·ro·ti अनभावंa·na·bhā·vaṃ गमेति।ga·me·ti

     uppannuppanne pāpake akusale dhamme nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantiṁ karoti anabhāvaṁ gameti.

     They don’t tolerate any bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen, but give them up, dispel them, eliminate them, and obliterate them.

330. 330

     इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतावुसो,vuc·ca·tā·vu·so पहानपधानं।pa·hā·na·pa·dhā·naṃ

     Idaṁ vuccatāvuso, pahānapadhānaṁ.

     This is called the effort to give up.

331. 331

     कतमञ्चावुसो,ka·ta·mañ·cā·vu·so भावनापधानं?bhā·va·nā·pa·dhā·naṃ

     Katamañcāvuso, bhāvanāpadhānaṁ?

     And what is the effort to develop?

332. 332

     इध,i·dha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu सतिसम्बोज्झङ्गंsa·ti·sam·boj·jhaṅ·gaṃ भावेतिbhā·ve·ti विवेकनिस्सितंvi·ve·ka·nis·si·taṃ विरागनिस्सितंvi·rā·ga·nis·si·taṃ निरोधनिस्सितंni·ro·dha·nis·si·taṃ वोस्सग्गपरिणामिं,vos·sag·ga·pa·ri·ṇā·miṃ

     Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ,

     It’s when a mendicant develops the awakening factors of mindfulness,

333. 333

     धम्मविचयसम्बोज्झङ्गंdham·ma·vi·ca·ya·sam·boj·jhaṅ·gaṃ भावेतिbhā·ve·ti …

     dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …

     investigation of principles,

334. 334

     वीरियसम्बोज्झङ्गंvī·ri·ya·sam·boj·jhaṅ·gaṃ भावेतिbhā·ve·ti …

     vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …

     energy,

335. 335

     पीतिसम्बोज्झङ्गंpī·ti·sam·boj·jhaṅ·gaṃ भावेतिbhā·ve·ti …

     pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …

     rapture,

336. 336

     पस्सद्धिसम्बोज्झङ्गंpas·sad·dhi·sam·boj·jhaṅ·gaṃ भावेतिbhā·ve·ti …

     passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …

     tranquility,

337. 337

     समाधिसम्बोज्झङ्गंsa·mā·dhi·sam·boj·jhaṅ·gaṃ भावेतिbhā·ve·ti …

     samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti …

     immersion,

338. 338

     उपेक्खासम्बोज्झङ्गंu·pek·khā·sam·boj·jhaṅ·gaṃ भावेतिbhā·ve·ti विवेकनिस्सितंvi·ve·ka·nis·si·taṃ विरागनिस्सितंvi·rā·ga·nis·si·taṃ निरोधनिस्सितंni·ro·dha·nis·si·taṃ वोस्सग्गपरिणामिं।vos·sag·ga·pa·ri·ṇā·miṃ

     upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ.

     and equanimity, which rely on seclusion, fading away, and cessation, and ripen as letting go.

339. 339

     इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतावुसो,vuc·ca·tā·vu·so भावनापधानं।bhā·va·nā·pa·dhā·naṃ

     Idaṁ vuccatāvuso, bhāvanāpadhānaṁ.

     This is called the effort to develop.

340. 340

     कतमञ्चावुसो,ka·ta·mañ·cā·vu·so अनुरक्खणापधानं?a·nu·rak·kha·ṇā·pa·dhā·naṃ

     Katamañcāvuso, anurakkhaṇāpadhānaṁ?

     And what is the effort to preserve?

341. 341

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ भद्रकंbhad·ra·kaṃ समाधिनिमित्तंsa·mā·dhi·ni·mit·taṃ अनुरक्खति—अट्ठिकसञ्ञं,a·nu·rak·kha·ti पुळुवकसञ्ञं,pu·ḷu·va·ka·sañ·ñaṃ विनीलकसञ्ञं,vi·nī·la·ka·sañ·ñaṃ विच्छिद्दकसञ्ञं,vic·chid·da·ka·sañ·ñaṃ उद्धुमातकसञ्ञं।ud·dhu·mā·ta·ka·sañ·ñaṃ

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu uppannaṁ bhadrakaṁ samādhinimittaṁ anurakkhati—aṭṭhikasaññaṁ, puḷuvakasaññaṁ, vinīlakasaññaṁ, vicchiddakasaññaṁ, uddhumātakasaññaṁ.

     It’s when a mendicant preserves a meditation subject that’s a fine basis of immersion: the perception of a skeleton, a worm-infested corpse, a livid corpse, a split open corpse, or a bloated corpse.

342. 342

     इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतावुसो,vuc·ca·tā·vu·so अनुरक्खणापधानं।a·nu·rak·kha·ṇā·pa·dhā·naṃ

     Idaṁ vuccatāvuso, anurakkhaṇāpadhānaṁ.

     This is called the effort to preserve.

343. 343

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri ञाणानि—ñā·ṇā·ni

     Cattāri ñāṇāni—

     <b>Four knowledges:</b>

344. 344

     धम्मेdham·me ञाणं,ñā·ṇaṃ अन्वयेan·va·ye ञाणं,ñā·ṇaṃ परियेpa·ri·ye ञाणं,ñā·ṇaṃ सम्मुतियाsam·mu·ti·yā ञाणं।ñā·ṇaṃ

     dhamme ñāṇaṁ, anvaye ñāṇaṁ, pariye ñāṇaṁ, sammutiyā ñāṇaṁ.

     knowledge of the teaching, inferential knowledge, knowledge of encompassing, and conventional knowledge.

345. 345

     अपरानिपिa·pa·rā·ni·pi चत्तारिcat·tā·ri ञाणानि—ñā·ṇā·ni

     Aparānipi cattāri ñāṇāni—

     <b>Another four knowledges:</b>

346. 346

     दुक्खेduk·khe ञाणं,ñā·ṇaṃ दुक्खसमुदयेduk·kha·sa·mu·da·ye ञाणं,ñā·ṇaṃ दुक्खनिरोधेduk·kha·ni·ro·dhe ञाणं,ñā·ṇaṃ दुक्खनिरोधगामिनियाduk·kha·ni·ro·dha·gā·mi·ni·yā पटिपदायpa·ṭi·pa·dā·ya ञाणं।ñā·ṇaṃ

     dukkhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ñāṇaṁ.

     knowing about suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.

347. 347

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri सोतापत्तियङ्गानि—so·tā·pat·ti·yaṅ·gā·ni

     Cattāri sotāpattiyaṅgāni—

     <b>Four factors for stream-entry:</b>

348. 348

     सप्पुरिससंसेवो,sap·pu·ri·sa·saṃ·se·vo सद्धम्मस्सवनं,sad·dham·mas·sa·va·naṃ योनिसोमनसिकारो,yo·ni·so·ma·na·si·kā·ro धम्मानुधम्मप्पटिपत्ति।dham·mā·nu·dham·map·pa·ṭi·pat·ti

     sappurisasaṁsevo, saddhammassavanaṁ, yonisomanasikāro, dhammānudhammappaṭipatti.

     associating with true persons, listening to the true teaching, rational application of mind, and practicing in line with the teaching.

349. 349

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri सोतापन्नस्सso·tā·pan·nas·sa अङ्गानि।aṅ·gā·ni

     Cattāri sotāpannassa aṅgāni.

     <b>Four factors of a stream-enterer:</b>

350. 350

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so अरियसावकोa·ri·ya·sā·va·ko बुद्धेbud·dhe अवेच्चप्पसादेनa·vec·cap·pa·sā·de·na समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to होति:ho·ti

     Idhāvuso, ariyasāvako buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti:

     A noble disciple has experiential confidence in the Buddha:

351. 351

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धोsam·mā·sam·bud·dho विज्जाचरणसम्पन्नोvij·jā·ca·ra·ṇa·sam·pan·no सुगतोsu·ga·to लोकविदूlo·ka·vi·dū अनुत्तरोa·nut·ta·ro पुरिसदम्मसारथिpu·ri·sa·dam·ma·sā·ra·thi सत्थाsat·thā देवमनुस्सानंde·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ बुद्धो,bud·dho भगवा’ति।bha·ga·vā

     ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho, bhagavā’ti.

     ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’

352. 352

     धम्मेdham·me अवेच्चप्पसादेनa·vec·cap·pa·sā·de·na समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to होति:ho·ti

     Dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti:

     They have experiential confidence in the teaching:

353. 353

     ‘स्वाक्खातोsvāk·khā·to भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मोdham·mo सन्दिट्ठिकोsan·diṭ·ṭhi·ko अकालिकोa·kā·li·ko एहिपस्सिकोe·hi·pas·si·ko ओपनेय्यिकोo·pa·ney·yi·ko पच्चत्तंpac·cat·taṃ वेदितब्बोve·di·tab·bo विञ्ञूही’ति।viñ·ñū·hī

     ‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhī’ti.

     ‘The teaching is well explained by the Buddha—apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves.’

354. 354

     सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अवेच्चप्पसादेनa·vec·cap·pa·sā·de·na समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to होति:ho·ti

     Saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti:

     They have experiential confidence in the Saṅgha:

355. 355

     ‘सुप्पटिपन्नोsup·pa·ṭi·pan·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सावकसङ्घोsā·va·ka·saṅ·gho उजुप्पटिपन्नोu·jup·pa·ṭi·pan·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सावकसङ्घोsā·va·ka·saṅ·gho ञायप्पटिपन्नोñā·yap·pa·ṭi·pan·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सावकसङ्घोsā·va·ka·saṅ·gho सामीचिप्पटिपन्नोsā·mī·cip·pa·ṭi·pan·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सावकसङ्घोsā·va·ka·saṅ·gho यदिदंya·di·daṃ चत्तारिcat·tā·ri पुरिसयुगानिpu·ri·sa·yu·gā·ni अट्ठaṭ·ṭha पुरिसपुग्गला,pu·ri·sa·pug·ga·lā एसe·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सावकसङ्घोsā·va·ka·saṅ·gho आहुनेय्योā·hu·ney·yo पाहुनेय्योpā·hu·ney·yo दक्खिणेय्योdak·khi·ṇey·yo अञ्जलिकरणीयोañ·ja·li·ka·ra·ṇī·yo अनुत्तरंa·nut·ta·raṃ पुञ्ञक्खेत्तंpuñ·ñak·khet·taṃ लोकस्सा’ति।lo·kas·sā

     ‘suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho ujuppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho ñāyappaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho sāmīcippaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho yadidaṁ cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā, esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho āhuneyyo pāhuneyyo dakkhiṇeyyo añjalikaraṇīyo anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassā’ti.

     ‘The Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples is practicing the way that’s good, direct, systematic, and proper. It consists of the four pairs, the eight individual persons. This is the Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples that is worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, worthy of hospitality, worthy of a religious donation, worthy of greeting with cupped palms, and is the supreme field of merit for the world.’

356. 356

     अरियकन्तेहिa·ri·ya·kan·te·hi सीलेहिsī·le·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to होतिho·ti अखण्डेहिa·khaṇ·ḍe·hi अच्छिद्देहिac·chid·de·hi असबलेहिa·sa·ba·le·hi अकम्मासेहिa·kam·mā·se·hi भुजिस्सेहिbhu·jis·se·hi विञ्ञुप्पसत्थेहिviñ·ñup·pa·sat·the·hi अपरामट्ठेहिa·pa·rā·maṭ·ṭhe·hi समाधिसंवत्तनिकेहि।sa·mā·dhi·saṃ·vat·ta·ni·ke·hi

     Ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgato hoti akhaṇḍehi acchiddehi asabalehi akammāsehi bhujissehi viññuppasatthehi aparāmaṭṭhehi samādhisaṁvattanikehi.

     And a noble disciple’s ethical conduct is loved by the noble ones, unbroken, impeccable, spotless, and unmarred, liberating, praised by sensible people, not mistaken, and leading to immersion.

357. 357

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri सामञ्ञफलानि—sā·mañ·ña·pha·lā·ni

     Cattāri sāmaññaphalāni—

     <b>Four fruits of the ascetic life:</b>

358. 358

     सोतापत्तिफलं,so·tā·pat·ti·pha·laṃ सकदागामिफलं,sa·ka·dā·gā·mi·pha·laṃ अनागामिफलं,a·nā·gā·mi·pha·laṃ अरहत्तफलं।a·ra·hat·ta·pha·laṃ

     sotāpattiphalaṁ, sakadāgāmiphalaṁ, anāgāmiphalaṁ, arahattaphalaṁ.

     stream-entry, once-return, non-return, and perfection.

359. 359

     चतस्सोca·tas·so धातुयो—dhā·tu·yo

     Catasso dhātuyo—

     <b>Four elements:</b>

360. 360

     पथवीधातु,pa·tha·vī·dhā·tu आपोधातु,ā·po·dhā·tu तेजोधातु,te·jo·dhā·tu वायोधातु।vā·yo·dhā·tu

     pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu.

     earth, water, fire, and air.

361. 361

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro आहारा—ā·hā·rā

     Cattāro āhārā—

     <b>Four foods:</b>

362. 362

     कबळीकारोka·ba·ḷī·kā·ro आहारोā·hā·ro ओळारिकोo·ḷā·ri·ko वाvā सुखुमोsu·khu·mo वा,vā फस्सोphas·so दुतियो,du·ti·yo मनोसञ्चेतनाma·no·sañ·ce·ta·nā ततिया,ta·ti·yā विञ्ञाणंviñ·ñā·ṇaṃ चतुत्थं।ca·tut·thaṃ

     kabaḷīkāro āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā, phasso dutiyo, manosañcetanā tatiyā, viññāṇaṁ catutthaṁ.

     edible food, whether solid or subtle; contact is the second, mental intention the third, and consciousness the fourth.

363. 363

     चतस्सोca·tas·so विञ्ञाणट्ठितियो।viñ·ñā·ṇaṭ·ṭhi·ti·yo

     Catasso viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo.

     <b>Four establishings of consciousness:</b>

364. 364

     रूपूपायंrū·pū·pā·yaṃ वा,vā आवुसो,ā·vu·so विञ्ञाणंviñ·ñā·ṇaṃ तिट्ठमानंtiṭ·ṭha·mā·naṃ तिट्ठतिtiṭ·ṭha·ti रूपारम्मणंrū·pā·ram·ma·ṇaṃ रूपप्पतिट्ठंrū·pap·pa·tiṭ·ṭhaṃ नन्दूपसेचनंnan·dū·pa·se·ca·naṃ वुद्धिंvud·dhiṃ विरूळ्हिंvi·rū·ḷhiṃ वेपुल्लंve·pul·laṃ आपज्जति;ā·paj·ja·ti

     Rūpūpāyaṁ vā, āvuso, viññāṇaṁ tiṭṭhamānaṁ tiṭṭhati rūpārammaṇaṁ rūpappatiṭṭhaṁ nandūpasecanaṁ vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjati;

     As long as consciousness continues, it gets involved with form, supported by form, established on form. And with a sprinkle of relishing, it grows, increases, and matures.

365. 365

     वेदनूपायंve·da·nū·pā·yaṃ वाvā आवुसोā·vu·so …

     vedanūpāyaṁ vā āvuso …

     Or consciousness gets involved with feeling …

366. 366

     सञ्ञूपायंsañ·ñū·pā·yaṃ वा,vā आवुसोā·vu·so …पे…pe

     saññūpāyaṁ vā, āvuso …pe…

     Or consciousness gets involved with perception …

367. 367

     सङ्खारूपायंsaṅ·khā·rū·pā·yaṃ वा,vā आवुसो,ā·vu·so विञ्ञाणंviñ·ñā·ṇaṃ तिट्ठमानंtiṭ·ṭha·mā·naṃ तिट्ठतिtiṭ·ṭha·ti सङ्खारारम्मणंsaṅ·khā·rā·ram·ma·ṇaṃ सङ्खारप्पतिट्ठंsaṅ·khā·rap·pa·tiṭ·ṭhaṃ नन्दूपसेचनंnan·dū·pa·se·ca·naṃ वुद्धिंvud·dhiṃ विरूळ्हिंvi·rū·ḷhiṃ वेपुल्लंve·pul·laṃ आपज्जति।ā·paj·ja·ti

     saṅkhārūpāyaṁ vā, āvuso, viññāṇaṁ tiṭṭhamānaṁ tiṭṭhati saṅkhārārammaṇaṁ saṅkhārappatiṭṭhaṁ nandūpasecanaṁ vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjati.

     Or as long as consciousness continues, it gets involved with choices, supported by choices, established on choices. And with a sprinkle of relishing, it grows, increases, and matures.

368. 368

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri अगतिगमनानि—a·ga·ti·ga·ma·nā·ni

     Cattāri agatigamanāni—

     <b>Four prejudices:</b>

369. 369

     छन्दागतिंchan·dā·ga·tiṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti दोसागतिंdo·sā·ga·tiṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti मोहागतिंmo·hā·ga·tiṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti भयागतिंbha·yā·ga·tiṃ गच्छति।gac·cha·ti

     chandāgatiṁ gacchati, dosāgatiṁ gacchati, mohāgatiṁ gacchati, bhayāgatiṁ gacchati.

     making decisions prejudiced by favoritism, hostility, stupidity, and cowardice.

370. 370

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro तण्हुप्पादा—taṇ·hup·pā·dā

     Cattāro taṇhuppādā—

     <b>Four things that give rise to craving:</b>

371. 371

     चीवरहेतुcī·va·ra·he·tu वा,vā आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तण्हाtaṇ·hā उप्पज्जमानाup·paj·ja·mā·nā उप्पज्जति;up·paj·ja·ti

     cīvarahetu vā, āvuso, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati;

     Craving arises in a mendicant for the sake of robes,

372. 372

     पिण्डपातहेतुpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·he·tu वा,vā आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तण्हाtaṇ·hā उप्पज्जमानाup·paj·ja·mā·nā उप्पज्जति;up·paj·ja·ti

     piṇḍapātahetu vā, āvuso, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati;

     almsfood,

373. 373

     सेनासनहेतुse·nā·sa·na·he·tu वा,vā आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तण्हाtaṇ·hā उप्पज्जमानाup·paj·ja·mā·nā उप्पज्जति;up·paj·ja·ti

     senāsanahetu vā, āvuso, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati;

     lodgings,

374. 374

     इतिभवाभवहेतुi·ti·bha·vā·bha·va·he·tu वा,vā आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तण्हाtaṇ·hā उप्पज्जमानाup·paj·ja·mā·nā उप्पज्जति।up·paj·ja·ti

     itibhavābhavahetu vā, āvuso, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati.

     or rebirth in this or that state.

375. 375

     चतस्सोca·tas·so पटिपदा—pa·ṭi·pa·dā

     Catasso paṭipadā—

     <b>Four ways of practice:</b>

376. 376

     दुक्खाduk·khā पटिपदाpa·ṭi·pa·dā दन्धाभिञ्ञा,dan·dhā·bhiñ·ñā दुक्खाduk·khā पटिपदाpa·ṭi·pa·dā खिप्पाभिञ्ञा,khip·pā·bhiñ·ñā सुखाsu·khā पटिपदाpa·ṭi·pa·dā दन्धाभिञ्ञा,dan·dhā·bhiñ·ñā सुखाsu·khā पटिपदाpa·ṭi·pa·dā खिप्पाभिञ्ञा।khip·pā·bhiñ·ñā

     dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā, dukkhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā, sukhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā, sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā.

     painful practice with slow insight, painful practice with swift insight, pleasant practice with slow insight, and pleasant practice with swift insight.

377. 377

     अपरापिa·pa·rā·pi चतस्सोca·tas·so पटिपदा—pa·ṭi·pa·dā

     Aparāpi catasso paṭipadā—

     <b>Another four ways of practice:</b>

378. 378

     अक्खमाak·kha·mā पटिपदा,pa·ṭi·pa·dā खमाkha·mā पटिपदा,pa·ṭi·pa·dā दमाda·mā पटिपदा,pa·ṭi·pa·dā समाsa·mā पटिपदा।pa·ṭi·pa·dā

     akkhamā paṭipadā, khamā paṭipadā, damā paṭipadā, samā paṭipadā.

     impatient practice, patient practice, taming practice, and calming practice.

379. 379

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri धम्मपदानि—dham·ma·pa·dā·ni

     Cattāri dhammapadāni—

     <b>Four footprints of the Dhamma:</b>

380. 380

     अनभिज्झाa·na·bhij·jhā धम्मपदं,dham·ma·pa·daṃ अब्यापादोab·yā·pā·do धम्मपदं,dham·ma·pa·daṃ सम्मासतिsam·mā·sa·ti धम्मपदं,dham·ma·pa·daṃ सम्मासमाधिsam·mā·sa·mā·dhi धम्मपदं।dham·ma·pa·daṃ

     anabhijjhā dhammapadaṁ, abyāpādo dhammapadaṁ, sammāsati dhammapadaṁ, sammāsamādhi dhammapadaṁ.

     contentment, good will, right mindfulness, and right immersion.

381. 381

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri धम्मसमादानानि—dham·ma·sa·mā·dā·nā·ni

     Cattāri dhammasamādānāni—

     <b>Four ways of taking up practices:</b>

382. 382

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so धम्मसमादानंdham·ma·sa·mā·dā·naṃ पच्चुप्पन्नदुक्खञ्चेवpac·cup·pan·na·duk·khañ·ce·va आयतिञ्चā·ya·tiñ·ca दुक्खविपाकं।duk·kha·vi·pā·kaṃ

     atthāvuso, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ.

     There is a way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain.

383. 383

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so धम्मसमादानंdham·ma·sa·mā·dā·naṃ पच्चुप्पन्नदुक्खंpac·cup·pan·na·duk·khaṃ आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ सुखविपाकं।su·kha·vi·pā·kaṃ

     Atthāvuso, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ.

     There is a way of taking up practices that is painful now but results in future pleasure.

384. 384

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so धम्मसमादानंdham·ma·sa·mā·dā·naṃ पच्चुप्पन्नसुखंpac·cup·pan·na·su·khaṃ आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ दुक्खविपाकं।duk·kha·vi·pā·kaṃ

     Atthāvuso, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ.

     There is a way of taking up practices that is pleasant now but results in future pain.

385. 385

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so धम्मसमादानंdham·ma·sa·mā·dā·naṃ पच्चुप्पन्नसुखञ्चेवpac·cup·pan·na·su·khañ·ce·va आयतिञ्चā·ya·tiñ·ca सुखविपाकं।su·kha·vi·pā·kaṃ

     Atthāvuso, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ.

     There is a way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure.

386. 386

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro धम्मक्खन्धा—dham·mak·khan·dhā

     Cattāro dhammakkhandhā—

     <b>Four spectrums of the teaching:</b>

387. 387

     सीलक्खन्धो,sī·lak·khan·dho समाधिक्खन्धो,sa·mā·dhik·khan·dho पञ्ञाक्खन्धो,pañ·ñāk·khan·dho विमुत्तिक्खन्धो।vi·mut·tik·khan·dho

     sīlakkhandho, samādhikkhandho, paññākkhandho, vimuttikkhandho.

     ethics, immersion, wisdom, and freedom.

388. 388

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri बलानि—ba·lā·ni

     Cattāri balāni—

     <b>Four powers:</b>

389. 389

     वीरियबलं,vī·ri·ya·ba·laṃ सतिबलं,sa·ti·ba·laṃ समाधिबलं,sa·mā·dhi·ba·laṃ पञ्ञाबलं।pañ·ñā·ba·laṃ

     vīriyabalaṁ, satibalaṁ, samādhibalaṁ, paññābalaṁ.

     energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom.

390. 390

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri अधिट्ठानानि—a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·nā·ni

     Cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni—

     <b>Four foundations:</b>

391. 391

     पञ्ञाधिट्ठानं,pañ·ñā·dhiṭ·ṭhā·naṃ सच्चाधिट्ठानं,sac·cā·dhiṭ·ṭhā·naṃ चागाधिट्ठानं,cā·gā·dhiṭ·ṭhā·naṃ उपसमाधिट्ठानं।u·pa·sa·mā·dhiṭ·ṭhā·naṃ

     paññādhiṭṭhānaṁ, saccādhiṭṭhānaṁ, cāgādhiṭṭhānaṁ, upasamādhiṭṭhānaṁ.

     the foundations of wisdom, truth, generosity, and peace.

392. 392

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri पञ्हब्याकरणानि—pañ·hab·yā·ka·ra·ṇā·ni

     Cattāri pañhabyākaraṇāni—

     <b>Four ways of answering questions:</b>

393. 393

     एकंसब्याकरणीयोe·kaṃ·sab·yā·ka·ra·ṇī·yo पञ्हो,pañ·ho पटिपुच्छाब्याकरणीयोpa·ṭi·puc·chāb·yā·ka·ra·ṇī·yo पञ्हो,pañ·ho विभज्जब्याकरणीयोvi·bhaj·jab·yā·ka·ra·ṇī·yo पञ्हो,pañ·ho ठपनीयोṭha·pa·nī·yo पञ्हो।pañ·ho

     ekaṁsabyākaraṇīyo pañho, paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyo pañho, vibhajjabyākaraṇīyo pañho, ṭhapanīyo pañho.

     There is a question that should be answered categorically. There is a question that should be answered analytically. There is a question that should be answered with a counter-question. There is a question that should be set aside.

394. 394

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri कम्मानि—kam·mā·ni

     Cattāri kammāni—

     <b>Four deeds:</b>

395. 395

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so कम्मंkam·maṃ कण्हंkaṇ·haṃ कण्हविपाकं।kaṇ·ha·vi·pā·kaṃ

     atthāvuso, kammaṁ kaṇhaṁ kaṇhavipākaṁ.

     There are deeds that are dark with dark result.

396. 396

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so कम्मंkam·maṃ सुक्कंsuk·kaṃ सुक्कविपाकं।suk·ka·vi·pā·kaṃ

     Atthāvuso, kammaṁ sukkaṁ sukkavipākaṁ.

     There are deeds that are bright with bright result.

397. 397

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so कम्मंkam·maṃ कण्हसुक्कंkaṇ·ha·suk·kaṃ कण्हसुक्कविपाकं।kaṇ·ha·suk·ka·vi·pā·kaṃ

     Atthāvuso, kammaṁ kaṇhasukkaṁ kaṇhasukkavipākaṁ.

     There are deeds that are dark and bright with dark and bright result.

398. 398

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so कम्मंkam·maṃ अकण्हअसुक्कंa·kaṇ·ha·a·suk·kaṃ अकण्हअसुक्कविपाकंa·kaṇ·ha·a·suk·ka·vi·pā·kaṃ कम्मक्खयायkam·mak·kha·yā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Atthāvuso, kammaṁ akaṇhaasukkaṁ akaṇhaasukkavipākaṁ kammakkhayāya saṁvattati.

     There are neither dark nor bright deeds with neither dark nor bright results, which lead to the ending of deeds.

399. 399

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro सच्छिकरणीयाsac·chi·ka·ra·ṇī·yā धम्मा—dham·mā

     Cattāro sacchikaraṇīyā dhammā—

     <b>Four things to be realized:</b>

400. 400

     पुब्बेनिवासोpub·be·ni·vā·so सतियाsa·ti·yā सच्छिकरणीयो;sac·chi·ka·ra·ṇī·yo

     pubbenivāso satiyā sacchikaraṇīyo;

     Past lives are to be realized with recollection.

401. 401

     सत्तानंsat·tā·naṃ चुतूपपातोcu·tū·pa·pā·to चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā सच्छिकरणीयो;sac·chi·ka·ra·ṇī·yo

     sattānaṁ cutūpapāto cakkhunā sacchikaraṇīyo;

     The passing away and rebirth of sentient beings is to be realized with vision.

402. 402

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha विमोक्खाvi·mok·khā कायेनkā·ye·na सच्छिकरणीया;sac·chi·ka·ra·ṇī·yā

     aṭṭha vimokkhā kāyena sacchikaraṇīyā;

     The eight liberations are to be realized with direct meditative experience.

403. 403

     आसवानंā·sa·vā·naṃ खयोkha·yo पञ्ञायpañ·ñā·ya सच्छिकरणीयो।sac·chi·ka·ra·ṇī·yo

     āsavānaṁ khayo paññāya sacchikaraṇīyo.

     The ending of defilements is to be realized with wisdom.

404. 404

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro ओघा—o·ghā

     Cattāro oghā—

     <b>Four floods:</b>

405. 405

     कामोघो,kā·mo·gho भवोघो,bha·vo·gho दिट्ठोघो,diṭ·ṭho·gho अविज्जोघो।a·vij·jo·gho

     kāmogho, bhavogho, diṭṭhogho, avijjogho.

     the floods of sensuality, desire for rebirth, views, and ignorance.

406. 406

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro योगा—yo·gā

     Cattāro yogā—

     <b>Four yokes:</b>

407. 407

     कामयोगो,kā·ma·yo·go भवयोगो,bha·va·yo·go दिट्ठियोगो,diṭ·ṭhi·yo·go अविज्जायोगो।a·vij·jā·yo·go

     kāmayogo, bhavayogo, diṭṭhiyogo, avijjāyogo.

     the yokes of sensuality, desire for rebirth, views, and ignorance.

408. 408

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro विसञ्ञोगा—vi·sañ·ño·gā

     Cattāro visaññogā—

     <b>Four unyokings:</b>

409. 409

     कामयोगविसञ्ञोगो,kā·ma·yo·ga·vi·sañ·ño·go भवयोगविसञ्ञोगो,bha·va·yo·ga·vi·sañ·ño·go दिट्ठियोगविसञ्ञोगो,diṭ·ṭhi·yo·ga·vi·sañ·ño·go अविज्जायोगविसञ्ञोगो।a·vij·jā·yo·ga·vi·sañ·ño·go

     kāmayogavisaññogo, bhavayogavisaññogo, diṭṭhiyogavisaññogo, avijjāyogavisaññogo.

     unyoking from the yokes of sensuality, desire for rebirth, views, and ignorance.

410. 410

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro गन्था—gan·thā

     Cattāro ganthā—

     <b>Four ties:</b>

411. 411

     अभिज्झाa·bhij·jhā कायगन्थो,kā·ya·gan·tho ब्यापादोbyā·pā·do कायगन्थो,kā·ya·gan·tho सीलब्बतपरामासोsī·lab·ba·ta·pa·rā·mā·so कायगन्थो,kā·ya·gan·tho इदंसच्चाभिनिवेसोi·daṃ·sac·cā·bhi·ni·ve·so कायगन्थो।kā·ya·gan·tho

     abhijjhā kāyagantho, byāpādo kāyagantho, sīlabbataparāmāso kāyagantho, idaṁsaccābhiniveso kāyagantho.

     the personal ties to covetousness, ill will, misapprehension of precepts and observances, and the insistence that this is the only truth.

412. 412

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri उपादानानि—u·pā·dā·nā·ni

     Cattāri upādānāni—

     <b>Four kinds of grasping:</b>

413. 413

     कामुपादानं,kā·mu·pā·dā·naṃ दिट्ठुपादानं,diṭ·ṭhu·pā·dā·naṃ सीलब्बतुपादानं,sī·lab·ba·tu·pā·dā·naṃ अत्तवादुपादानं।at·ta·vā·du·pā·dā·naṃ

     kāmupādānaṁ, diṭṭhupādānaṁ, sīlabbatupādānaṁ, attavādupādānaṁ.

     grasping at sensual pleasures, views, precepts and observances, and theories of a self.

414. 414

     चतस्सोca·tas·so योनियो—yo·ni·yo

     Catasso yoniyo—

     <b>Four kinds of reproduction:</b>

415. 415

     अण्डजयोनि,aṇ·ḍa·ja·yo·ni जलाबुजयोनि,ja·lā·bu·ja·yo·ni संसेदजयोनि,saṃ·se·da·ja·yo·ni ओपपातिकयोनि।o·pa·pā·ti·ka·yo·ni

     aṇḍajayoni, jalābujayoni, saṁsedajayoni, opapātikayoni.

     reproduction for creatures born from an egg, from a womb, from moisture, or spontaneously.

416. 416

     चतस्सोca·tas·so गब्भावक्कन्तियो।gab·bhā·vak·kan·ti·yo

     Catasso gabbhāvakkantiyo.

     <b>Four kinds of conception:</b>

417. 417

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co असम्पजानोa·sam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिंmā·tu·kuc·chiṃ ओक्कमति,ok·ka·ma·ti असम्पजानोa·sam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिस्मिंmā·tu·kuc·chis·miṃ ठाति,ṭhā·ti असम्पजानोa·sam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिम्हाmā·tu·kuc·chim·hā निक्खमति,nik·kha·ma·ti अयंa·yaṃ पठमाpa·ṭha·mā गब्भावक्कन्ति।gab·bhā·vak·kan·ti

     Idhāvuso, ekacco asampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, asampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṁ paṭhamā gabbhāvakkanti.

     Someone is unaware when conceived in their mother’s womb, unaware as they remain there, and unaware as they emerge. This is the first kind of conception.

418. 418

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिंmā·tu·kuc·chiṃ ओक्कमति,ok·ka·ma·ti असम्पजानोa·sam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिस्मिंmā·tu·kuc·chis·miṃ ठाति,ṭhā·ti असम्पजानोa·sam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिम्हाmā·tu·kuc·chim·hā निक्खमति,nik·kha·ma·ti अयंa·yaṃ दुतियाdu·ti·yā गब्भावक्कन्ति।gab·bhā·vak·kan·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, asampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṁ dutiyā gabbhāvakkanti.

     Furthermore, someone is aware when conceived in their mother’s womb, but unaware as they remain there, and unaware as they emerge. This is the second kind of conception.

419. 419

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिंmā·tu·kuc·chiṃ ओक्कमति,ok·ka·ma·ti सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिस्मिंmā·tu·kuc·chis·miṃ ठाति,ṭhā·ti असम्पजानोa·sam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिम्हाmā·tu·kuc·chim·hā निक्खमति,nik·kha·ma·ti अयंa·yaṃ ततियाta·ti·yā गब्भावक्कन्ति।gab·bhā·vak·kan·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, sampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṁ tatiyā gabbhāvakkanti.

     Furthermore, someone is aware when conceived in their mother’s womb, aware as they remain there, but unaware as they emerge. This is the third kind of conception.

420. 420

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिंmā·tu·kuc·chiṃ ओक्कमति,ok·ka·ma·ti सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिस्मिंmā·tu·kuc·chis·miṃ ठाति,ṭhā·ti सम्पजानोsam·pa·jā·no मातुकुच्छिम्हाmā·tu·kuc·chim·hā निक्खमति,nik·kha·ma·ti अयंa·yaṃ चतुत्थाca·tut·thā गब्भावक्कन्ति।gab·bhā·vak·kan·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, sampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti, sampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṁ catutthā gabbhāvakkanti.

     Furthermore, someone is aware when conceived in their mother’s womb, aware as they remain there, and aware as they emerge. This is the fourth kind of conception.

421. 421

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro अत्तभावपटिलाभा।at·ta·bhā·va·pa·ṭi·lā·bhā

     Cattāro attabhāvapaṭilābhā.

     <b>Four kinds of incarnation:</b>

422. 422

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so अत्तभावपटिलाभो,at·ta·bhā·va·pa·ṭi·lā·bho यस्मिंyas·miṃ अत्तभावपटिलाभेat·ta·bhā·va·pa·ṭi·lā·bhe अत्तसञ्चेतनायेवat·ta·sañ·ce·ta·nā·ye·va कमति,ka·ma·ti नोno परसञ्चेतना।pa·ra·sañ·ce·ta·nā

     Atthāvuso, attabhāvapaṭilābho, yasmiṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhe attasañcetanāyeva kamati, no parasañcetanā.

     There is an incarnation where only one’s own intention is effective, not that of others.

423. 423

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so अत्तभावपटिलाभो,at·ta·bhā·va·pa·ṭi·lā·bho यस्मिंyas·miṃ अत्तभावपटिलाभेat·ta·bhā·va·pa·ṭi·lā·bhe परसञ्चेतनायेवpa·ra·sañ·ce·ta·nā·ye·va कमति,ka·ma·ti नोno अत्तसञ्चेतना।at·ta·sañ·ce·ta·nā

     Atthāvuso, attabhāvapaṭilābho, yasmiṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhe parasañcetanāyeva kamati, no attasañcetanā.

     There is an incarnation where only the intention of others is effective, not one’s own.

424. 424

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so अत्तभावपटिलाभो,at·ta·bhā·va·pa·ṭi·lā·bho यस्मिंyas·miṃ अत्तभावपटिलाभेat·ta·bhā·va·pa·ṭi·lā·bhe अत्तसञ्चेतनाat·ta·sañ·ce·ta·nā चेवce·va कमतिka·ma·ti परसञ्चेतनाpa·ra·sañ·ce·ta·nā च।ca

     Atthāvuso, attabhāvapaṭilābho, yasmiṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhe attasañcetanā ceva kamati parasañcetanā ca.

     There is an incarnation where both one’s own and others’ intentions are effective.

425. 425

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so अत्तभावपटिलाभो,at·ta·bhā·va·pa·ṭi·lā·bho यस्मिंyas·miṃ अत्तभावपटिलाभेat·ta·bhā·va·pa·ṭi·lā·bhe नेवne·va अत्तसञ्चेतनाat·ta·sañ·ce·ta·nā कमति,ka·ma·ti नोno परसञ्चेतना।pa·ra·sañ·ce·ta·nā

     Atthāvuso, attabhāvapaṭilābho, yasmiṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhe neva attasañcetanā kamati, no parasañcetanā.

     There is an incarnation where neither one’s own nor others’ intentions are effective.

426. 426

     चतस्सोca·tas·so दक्खिणाविसुद्धियो।dak·khi·ṇā·vi·sud·dhi·yo

     Catasso dakkhiṇāvisuddhiyo.

     <b>Four ways of purifying a religious donation:</b>

427. 427

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so दक्खिणाdak·khi·ṇā दायकतोdā·ya·ka·to विसुज्झतिvi·suj·jha·ti नोno पटिग्गाहकतो।pa·ṭig·gā·ha·ka·to

     Atthāvuso, dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato.

     There’s a religious donation that’s purified by the giver, not the recipient.

428. 428

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so दक्खिणाdak·khi·ṇā पटिग्गाहकतोpa·ṭig·gā·ha·ka·to विसुज्झतिvi·suj·jha·ti नोno दायकतो।dā·ya·ka·to

     Atthāvuso, dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati no dāyakato.

     There’s a religious donation that’s purified by the recipient, not the giver.

429. 429

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so दक्खिणाdak·khi·ṇā नेवne·va दायकतोdā·ya·ka·to विसुज्झतिvi·suj·jha·ti नोno पटिग्गाहकतो।pa·ṭig·gā·ha·ka·to

     Atthāvuso, dakkhiṇā neva dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato.

     There’s a religious donation that’s purified by neither the giver nor the recipient.

430. 430

     अत्थावुसो,at·thā·vu·so दक्खिणाdak·khi·ṇā दायकतोdā·ya·ka·to चेवce·va विसुज्झतिvi·suj·jha·ti पटिग्गाहकतोpa·ṭig·gā·ha·ka·to च।ca

     Atthāvuso, dakkhiṇā dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato ca.

     There’s a religious donation that’s purified by both the giver and the recipient.

431. 431

     चत्तारिcat·tā·ri सङ्गहवत्थूनि—saṅ·ga·ha·vat·thū·ni

     Cattāri saṅgahavatthūni—

     <b>Four ways of being inclusive:</b>

432. 432

     दानं,dā·naṃ पेय्यवज्जं,pey·ya·vaj·jaṃ अत्थचरिया,at·tha·ca·ri·yā समानत्तता।sa·mā·nat·ta·tā

     dānaṁ, peyyavajjaṁ, atthacariyā, samānattatā.

     giving, kindly words, taking care, and equality.

433. 433

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro अनरियवोहारा—a·na·ri·ya·vo·hā·rā

     Cattāro anariyavohārā—

     <b>Four ignoble expressions:</b>

434. 434

     मुसावादो,mu·sā·vā·do पिसुणावाचा,pi·su·ṇā·vā·cā फरुसावाचा,pha·ru·sā·vā·cā सम्फप्पलापो।sam·phap·pa·lā·po

     musāvādo, pisuṇāvācā, pharusāvācā, samphappalāpo.

     speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical.

435. 435

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro अरियवोहारा—a·ri·ya·vo·hā·rā

     Cattāro ariyavohārā—

     <b>Four noble expressions:</b>

436. 436

     मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī पिसुणायpi·su·ṇā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī फरुसायpha·ru·sā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī सम्फप्पलापाsam·phap·pa·lā·pā वेरमणी।ve·ra·ma·ṇī

     musāvādā veramaṇī, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī, samphappalāpā veramaṇī.

     refraining from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical.

437. 437

     अपरेपिa·pa·re·pi चत्तारोcat·tā·ro अनरियवोहारा—a·na·ri·ya·vo·hā·rā

     Aparepi cattāro anariyavohārā—

     <b>Another four ignoble expressions:</b>

438. 438

     अदिट्ठेa·diṭ·ṭhe दिट्ठवादिता,diṭ·ṭha·vā·di·tā अस्सुतेas·su·te सुतवादिता,su·ta·vā·di·tā अमुतेa·mu·te मुतवादिता,mu·ta·vā·di·tā अविञ्ञातेa·viñ·ñā·te विञ्ञातवादिता।viñ·ñā·ta·vā·di·tā

     adiṭṭhe diṭṭhavāditā, assute sutavāditā, amute mutavāditā, aviññāte viññātavāditā.

     saying you’ve seen, heard, thought, or known something, but you haven’t.

439. 439

     अपरेपिa·pa·re·pi चत्तारोcat·tā·ro अरियवोहारा—a·ri·ya·vo·hā·rā

     Aparepi cattāro ariyavohārā—

     <b>Another four noble expressions:</b>

440. 440

     अदिट्ठेa·diṭ·ṭhe अदिट्ठवादिता,a·diṭ·ṭha·vā·di·tā अस्सुतेas·su·te अस्सुतवादिता,as·su·ta·vā·di·tā अमुतेa·mu·te अमुतवादिता,a·mu·ta·vā·di·tā अविञ्ञातेa·viñ·ñā·te अविञ्ञातवादिता।a·viñ·ñā·ta·vā·di·tā

     adiṭṭhe adiṭṭhavāditā, assute assutavāditā, amute amutavāditā, aviññāte aviññātavāditā.

     saying you haven’t seen, heard, thought, or known something, and you haven’t.

441. 441

     अपरेपिa·pa·re·pi चत्तारोcat·tā·ro अनरियवोहारा—a·na·ri·ya·vo·hā·rā

     Aparepi cattāro anariyavohārā—

     <b>Another four ignoble expressions:</b>

442. 442

     दिट्ठेdiṭ·ṭhe अदिट्ठवादिता,a·diṭ·ṭha·vā·di·tā सुतेsu·te अस्सुतवादिता,as·su·ta·vā·di·tā मुतेmu·te अमुतवादिता,a·mu·ta·vā·di·tā विञ्ञातेviñ·ñā·te अविञ्ञातवादिता।a·viñ·ñā·ta·vā·di·tā

     diṭṭhe adiṭṭhavāditā, sute assutavāditā, mute amutavāditā, viññāte aviññātavāditā.

     saying you haven’t seen, heard, thought, or known something, and you have.

443. 443

     अपरेपिa·pa·re·pi चत्तारोcat·tā·ro अरियवोहारा—a·ri·ya·vo·hā·rā

     Aparepi cattāro ariyavohārā—

     <b>Another four noble expressions:</b>

444. 444

     दिट्ठेdiṭ·ṭhe दिट्ठवादिता,diṭ·ṭha·vā·di·tā सुतेsu·te सुतवादिता,su·ta·vā·di·tā मुतेmu·te मुतवादिता,mu·ta·vā·di·tā विञ्ञातेviñ·ñā·te विञ्ञातवादिता।viñ·ñā·ta·vā·di·tā

     diṭṭhe diṭṭhavāditā, sute sutavāditā, mute mutavāditā, viññāte viññātavāditā.

     saying you’ve seen, heard, thought, or known something, and you have.

445. 445

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro पुग्गला।pug·ga·lā

     Cattāro puggalā.

     <b>Four individuals:</b>

446. 446

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo अत्तन्तपोat·tan·ta·po होतिho·ti अत्तपरितापनानुयोगमनुयुत्तो।at·ta·pa·ri·tā·pa·nā·nu·yo·ga·ma·nu·yut·to

     Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo attantapo hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.

     One individual mortifies themselves, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves.

447. 447

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo परन्तपोpa·ran·ta·po होतिho·ti परपरितापनानुयोगमनुयुत्तो।pa·ra·pa·ri·tā·pa·nā·nu·yo·ga·ma·nu·yut·to

     Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo parantapo hoti paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.

     One individual mortifies others, committed to the practice of mortifying others.

448. 448

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo अत्तन्तपोat·tan·ta·po चca होतिho·ti अत्तपरितापनानुयोगमनुयुत्तो,at·ta·pa·ri·tā·pa·nā·nu·yo·ga·ma·nu·yut·to परन्तपोpa·ran·ta·po चca परपरितापनानुयोगमनुयुत्तो।pa·ra·pa·ri·tā·pa·nā·nu·yo·ga·ma·nu·yut·to

     Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo attantapo ca hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.

     One individual mortifies themselves and others, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others.

449. 449

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo नेवne·va अत्तन्तपोat·tan·ta·po होतिho·ti नna अत्तपरितापनानुयोगमनुयुत्तोat·ta·pa·ri·tā·pa·nā·nu·yo·ga·ma·nu·yut·to नna परन्तपोpa·ran·ta·po नna परपरितापनानुयोगमनुयुत्तो।pa·ra·pa·ri·tā·pa·nā·nu·yo·ga·ma·nu·yut·to

     Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo neva attantapo hoti na attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto.

     One individual doesn’t mortify either themselves or others, committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others.

450. 450

     सोso अनत्तन्तपोa·nat·tan·ta·po अपरन्तपोa·pa·ran·ta·po दिट्ठेवdiṭ·ṭhe·va धम्मेdham·me निच्छातोnic·chā·to निब्बुतोnib·bu·to सीतीभूतोsī·tī·bhū·to सुखप्पटिसंवेदीsu·khap·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·dī ब्रह्मभूतेनbrah·ma·bhū·te·na अत्तनाat·ta·nā विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     So anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati.

     They live without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine.

451. 451

     अपरेपिa·pa·re·pi चत्तारोcat·tā·ro पुग्गला।pug·ga·lā

     Aparepi cattāro puggalā.

     <b>Another four individuals:</b>

452. 452

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo अत्तहितायat·ta·hi·tā·ya पटिपन्नोpa·ṭi·pan·no होतिho·ti नोno परहिताय।pa·ra·hi·tā·ya

     Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo attahitāya paṭipanno hoti no parahitāya.

     One individual practices to benefit themselves, but not others.

453. 453

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo परहितायpa·ra·hi·tā·ya पटिपन्नोpa·ṭi·pan·no होतिho·ti नोno अत्तहिताय।at·ta·hi·tā·ya

     Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo parahitāya paṭipanno hoti no attahitāya.

     One individual practices to benefit others, but not themselves.

454. 454

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo नेवne·va अत्तहितायat·ta·hi·tā·ya पटिपन्नोpa·ṭi·pan·no होतिho·ti नोno परहिताय।pa·ra·hi·tā·ya

     Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo neva attahitāya paṭipanno hoti no parahitāya.

     One individual practices to benefit neither themselves nor others.

455. 455

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo अत्तहितायat·ta·hi·tā·ya चेवce·va पटिपन्नोpa·ṭi·pan·no होतिho·ti परहितायpa·ra·hi·tā·ya च।ca

     Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo attahitāya ceva paṭipanno hoti parahitāya ca.

     One individual practices to benefit both themselves and others.

456. 456

     अपरेपिa·pa·re·pi चत्तारोcat·tā·ro पुग्गला—pug·ga·lā

     Aparepi cattāro puggalā—

     <b>Another four individuals:</b>

457. 457

     तमोta·mo तमपरायनो,ta·ma·pa·rā·ya·no तमोta·mo जोतिपरायनो,jo·ti·pa·rā·ya·no जोतिjo·ti तमपरायनो,ta·ma·pa·rā·ya·no जोतिjo·ti जोतिपरायनो।jo·ti·pa·rā·ya·no

     tamo tamaparāyano, tamo jotiparāyano, joti tamaparāyano, joti jotiparāyano.

     the dark bound for darkness, the dark bound for light, the light bound for darkness, and the light bound for light.

458. 458

     अपरेपिa·pa·re·pi चत्तारोcat·tā·ro पुग्गला—pug·ga·lā

     Aparepi cattāro puggalā—

     <b>Another four individuals:</b>

459. 459

     समणमचलो,sa·ma·ṇa·ma·ca·lo समणपदुमो,sa·ma·ṇa·pa·du·mo समणपुण्डरीको,sa·ma·ṇa·puṇ·ḍa·rī·ko समणेसुsa·ma·ṇe·su समणसुखुमालो।sa·ma·ṇa·su·khu·mā·lo

     samaṇamacalo, samaṇapadumo, samaṇapuṇḍarīko, samaṇesu samaṇasukhumālo.

     the confirmed ascetic, the white lotus ascetic, the pink lotus ascetic, and the delicate ascetic of ascetics.

460. 460

     इमेi·me खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na चत्तारोcat·tā·ro धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता;sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammā sammadakkhātā;

     These are the teachings grouped by four that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

461. 461

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

462. 462

     पठमभाणवारोpa·ṭha·ma·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

     The first recitation section is complete.

463. 463

     5। पञ्चकpañ·ca·ka

     5. Pañcaka

     5. Fives

464. 464

     अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na पञ्चpañ·ca धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता।sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena pañca dhammā sammadakkhātā.

     There are teachings grouped by five that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

465. 465

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

466. 466

     कतमेka·ta·me पञ्च?pañ·ca

     Katame pañca?

     What are the teachings grouped by five?

467. 467

     पञ्चक्खन्धा।pañ·cak·khan·dhā

     Pañcakkhandhā.

     <b>Five aggregates:</b>

468. 468

     रूपक्खन्धोrū·pak·khan·dho वेदनाक्खन्धोve·da·nāk·khan·dho सञ्ञाक्खन्धोsañ·ñāk·khan·dho सङ्खारक्खन्धोsaṅ·khā·rak·khan·dho विञ्ञाणक्खन्धो।viñ·ñā·ṇak·khan·dho

     Rūpakkhandho vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho saṅkhārakkhandho viññāṇakkhandho.

     form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness.

469. 469

     पञ्चुपादानक्खन्धा।pañ·cu·pā·dā·nak·khan·dhā

     Pañcupādānakkhandhā.

     <b>Five grasping aggregates:</b>

470. 470

     रूपुपादानक्खन्धोrū·pu·pā·dā·nak·khan·dho वेदनुपादानक्खन्धोve·da·nu·pā·dā·nak·khan·dho सञ्ञुपादानक्खन्धोsañ·ñu·pā·dā·nak·khan·dho सङ्खारुपादानक्खन्धोsaṅ·khā·ru·pā·dā·nak·khan·dho विञ्ञाणुपादानक्खन्धो।viñ·ñā·ṇu·pā·dā·nak·khan·dho

     Rūpupādānakkhandho vedanupādānakkhandho saññupādānakkhandho saṅkhārupādānakkhandho viññāṇupādānakkhandho.

     form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness.

471. 471

     पञ्चpañ·ca कामगुणा।kā·ma·gu·ṇā

     Pañca kāmaguṇā.

     <b>Five kinds of sensual stimulation:</b>

472. 472

     चक्खुविञ्ञेय्याcak·khu·viñ·ñey·yā रूपाrū·pā इट्ठाiṭ·ṭhā कन्ताkan·tā मनापाma·nā·pā पियरूपाpi·ya·rū·pā कामूपसञ्हिताkā·mū·pa·sañ·hi·tā रजनीया,ra·ja·nī·yā

     Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasañhitā rajanīyā,

     Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing.

473. 473

     सोतविञ्ञेय्याso·ta·viñ·ñey·yā सद्दाsad·dā …

     sotaviññeyyā saddā …

     Sounds known by the ear …

474. 474

     घानविञ्ञेय्याghā·na·viñ·ñey·yā गन्धाgan·dhā …

     ghānaviññeyyā gandhā …

     Smells known by the nose …

475. 475

     जिव्हाविञ्ञेय्याjiv·hā·viñ·ñey·yā रसाra·sā …

     jivhāviññeyyā rasā …

     Tastes known by the tongue …

476. 476

     कायविञ्ञेय्याkā·ya·viñ·ñey·yā फोट्ठब्बाphoṭ·ṭhab·bā इट्ठाiṭ·ṭhā कन्ताkan·tā मनापाma·nā·pā पियरूपाpi·ya·rū·pā कामूपसञ्हिताkā·mū·pa·sañ·hi·tā रजनीया।ra·ja·nī·yā

     kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasañhitā rajanīyā.

     Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing.

477. 477

     पञ्चpañ·ca गतियो—ga·ti·yo

     Pañca gatiyo—

     <b>Five destinations:</b>

478. 478

     निरयो,ni·ra·yo तिरच्छानयोनि,ti·rac·chā·na·yo·ni पेत्तिविसयो,pet·ti·vi·sa·yo मनुस्सा,ma·nus·sā देवा।de·vā

     nirayo, tiracchānayoni, pettivisayo, manussā, devā.

     hell, the animal realm, the ghost realm, humanity, and the gods.

479. 479

     पञ्चpañ·ca मच्छरियानि—mac·cha·ri·yā·ni

     Pañca macchariyāni—

     <b>Five kinds of stinginess:</b>

480. 480

     आवासमच्छरियं,ā·vā·sa·mac·cha·ri·yaṃ कुलमच्छरियं,ku·la·mac·cha·ri·yaṃ लाभमच्छरियं,lā·bha·mac·cha·ri·yaṃ वण्णमच्छरियं,vaṇ·ṇa·mac·cha·ri·yaṃ धम्ममच्छरियं।dham·ma·mac·cha·ri·yaṃ

     āvāsamacchariyaṁ, kulamacchariyaṁ, lābhamacchariyaṁ, vaṇṇamacchariyaṁ, dhammamacchariyaṁ.

     stinginess with dwellings, families, material things, praise, and the teachings.

481. 481

     पञ्चpañ·ca नीवरणानि—nī·va·ra·ṇā·ni

     Pañca nīvaraṇāni—

     <b>Five hindrances:</b>

482. 482

     कामच्छन्दनीवरणं,kā·mac·chan·da·nī·va·ra·ṇaṃ ब्यापादनीवरणं,byā·pā·da·nī·va·ra·ṇaṃ थिनमिद्धनीवरणं,thi·na·mid·dha·nī·va·ra·ṇaṃ उद्धच्चकुक्कुच्चनीवरणं,ud·dhac·ca·kuk·kuc·ca·nī·va·ra·ṇaṃ विचिकिच्छानीवरणं।vi·ci·kic·chā·nī·va·ra·ṇaṃ

     kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṁ, byāpādanīvaraṇaṁ, thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṁ, uddhaccakukkuccanīvaraṇaṁ, vicikicchānīvaraṇaṁ.

     sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt.

483. 483

     पञ्चpañ·ca ओरम्भागियानिo·ram·bhā·gi·yā·ni संयोजनानि—saṃ·yo·ja·nā·ni

     Pañca orambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni—

     <b>Five lower fetters:</b>

484. 484

     सक्कायदिट्ठि,sak·kā·ya·diṭ·ṭhi विचिकिच्छा,vi·ci·kic·chā सीलब्बतपरामासो,sī·lab·ba·ta·pa·rā·mā·so कामच्छन्दो,kā·mac·chan·do ब्यापादो।byā·pā·do

     sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāso, kāmacchando, byāpādo.

     substantialist view, doubt, misapprehension of precepts and observances, sensual desire, and ill will.

485. 485

     पञ्चpañ·ca उद्धम्भागियानिud·dham·bhā·gi·yā·ni संयोजनानि—saṃ·yo·ja·nā·ni

     Pañca uddhambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni—

     <b>Five higher fetters:</b>

486. 486

     रूपरागो,rū·pa·rā·go अरूपरागो,a·rū·pa·rā·go मानो,mā·no उद्धच्चं,ud·dhac·caṃ अविज्जा।a·vij·jā

     rūparāgo, arūparāgo, māno, uddhaccaṁ, avijjā.

     desire for rebirth in the realm of luminous form, desire for rebirth in the formless realm, conceit, restlessness, and ignorance.

487. 487

     पञ्चpañ·ca सिक्खापदानि—sik·khā·pa·dā·ni

     Pañca sikkhāpadāni—

     <b>Five precepts:</b>

488. 488

     पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī सुरामेरयमज्जप्पमादट्ठानाsu·rā·me·ra·ya·maj·jap·pa·mā·daṭ·ṭhā·nā वेरमणी।ve·ra·ma·ṇī

     pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, adinnādānā veramaṇī, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī, musāvādā veramaṇī, surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇī.

     refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor.

489. 489

     पञ्चpañ·ca अभब्बट्ठानानि।a·bhab·baṭ·ṭhā·nā·ni

     Pañca abhabbaṭṭhānāni.

     <b>Five things that can’t be done:</b>

490. 490

     अभब्बो,a·bhab·bo आवुसो,ā·vu·so खीणासवोkhī·ṇā·sa·vo भिक्खुbhik·khu सञ्चिच्चsañ·cic·ca पाणंpā·ṇaṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेतुं।vo·ro·pe·tuṃ अभब्बोa·bhab·bo खीणासवोkhī·ṇā·sa·vo भिक्खुbhik·khu अदिन्नंa·din·naṃ थेय्यसङ्खातंthey·ya·saṅ·khā·taṃ आदियितुं।ā·di·yi·tuṃ अभब्बोa·bhab·bo खीणासवोkhī·ṇā·sa·vo भिक्खुbhik·khu मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेवितुं।pa·ṭi·se·vi·tuṃ अभब्बोa·bhab·bo खीणासवोkhī·ṇā·sa·vo भिक्खुbhik·khu सम्पजानमुसाsam·pa·jā·na·mu·sā भासितुं।bhā·si·tuṃ अभब्बोa·bhab·bo खीणासवोkhī·ṇā·sa·vo भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्निधिकारकंsan·ni·dhi·kā·ra·kaṃ कामेkā·me परिभुञ्जितुं,pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tuṃ सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi पुब्बेpub·be आगारिकभूतो।ā·gā·ri·ka·bhū·to

     Abhabbo, āvuso, khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sañcicca pāṇaṁ jīvitā voropetuṁ. Abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyituṁ. Abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevituṁ. Abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sampajānamusā bhāsituṁ. Abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sannidhikārakaṁ kāme paribhuñjituṁ, seyyathāpi pubbe āgārikabhūto.

     A mendicant with defilements ended can’t deliberately take the life of a living creature, take something with the intention to steal, have sex, tell a deliberate lie, or store up goods for their own enjoyment like they used to as a layperson.

491. 491

     पञ्चpañ·ca ब्यसनानि—bya·sa·nā·ni

     Pañca byasanāni—

     <b>Five losses:</b>

492. 492

     ञातिब्यसनं,ñā·tib·ya·sa·naṃ भोगब्यसनं,bho·gab·ya·sa·naṃ रोगब्यसनं,ro·gab·ya·sa·naṃ सीलब्यसनं,sī·lab·ya·sa·naṃ दिट्ठिब्यसनं।diṭ·ṭhib·ya·sa·naṃ

     ñātibyasanaṁ, bhogabyasanaṁ, rogabyasanaṁ, sīlabyasanaṁ, diṭṭhibyasanaṁ.

     loss of relatives, wealth, health, ethics, and view.

493. 493

     नावुसो,nā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā ञातिब्यसनहेतुñā·tib·ya·sa·na·he·tu वाvā भोगब्यसनहेतुbho·gab·ya·sa·na·he·tu वाvā रोगब्यसनहेतुro·gab·ya·sa·na·he·tu वाvā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जन्ति।u·pa·paj·jan·ti

     Nāvuso, sattā ñātibyasanahetu vā bhogabyasanahetu vā rogabyasanahetu vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti.

     It is not because of loss of relatives, wealth, or health that sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.

494. 494

     सीलब्यसनहेतुsī·lab·ya·sa·na·he·tu वा,vā आवुसो,ā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā दिट्ठिब्यसनहेतुdiṭ·ṭhib·ya·sa·na·he·tu वाvā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जन्ति।u·pa·paj·jan·ti

     Sīlabyasanahetu vā, āvuso, sattā diṭṭhibyasanahetu vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti.

     It is because of loss of ethics or view that sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.

495. 495

     पञ्चpañ·ca सम्पदा—sam·pa·dā

     Pañca sampadā—

     <b>Five endowments:</b>

496. 496

     ञातिसम्पदा,ñā·ti·sam·pa·dā भोगसम्पदा,bho·ga·sam·pa·dā आरोग्यसम्पदा,ā·rog·ya·sam·pa·dā सीलसम्पदा,sī·la·sam·pa·dā दिट्ठिसम्पदा।diṭ·ṭhi·sam·pa·dā

     ñātisampadā, bhogasampadā, ārogyasampadā, sīlasampadā, diṭṭhisampadā.

     endowment with relatives, wealth, health, ethics, and view.

497. 497

     नावुसो,nā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā ञातिसम्पदाहेतुñā·ti·sam·pa·dā·he·tu वाvā भोगसम्पदाहेतुbho·ga·sam·pa·dā·he·tu वाvā आरोग्यसम्पदाहेतुā·rog·ya·sam·pa·dā·he·tu वाvā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जन्ति।u·pa·paj·jan·ti

     Nāvuso, sattā ñātisampadāhetu vā bhogasampadāhetu vā ārogyasampadāhetu vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti.

     It is not because of endowment with family, wealth, or health that sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.

498. 498

     सीलसम्पदाहेतुsī·la·sam·pa·dā·he·tu वा,vā आवुसो,ā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā दिट्ठिसम्पदाहेतुdiṭ·ṭhi·sam·pa·dā·he·tu वाvā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जन्ति।u·pa·paj·jan·ti

     Sīlasampadāhetu vā, āvuso, sattā diṭṭhisampadāhetu vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti.

     It is because of endowment with ethics or view that sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.

499. 499

     पञ्चpañ·ca आदीनवाā·dī·na·vā दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

     Pañca ādīnavā dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

     <b>Five drawbacks for an unethical person because of their failure in ethics:</b>

500. 500

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so दुस्सीलोdus·sī·lo सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no पमादाधिकरणंpa·mā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ महतिंma·ha·tiṃ भोगजानिंbho·ga·jā·niṃ निगच्छति,ni·gac·cha·ti

     Idhāvuso, dussīlo sīlavipanno pamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahatiṁ bhogajāniṁ nigacchati,

     Firstly, an unethical person loses great wealth on account of negligence.

501. 501

     अयंa·yaṃ पठमोpa·ṭha·mo आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

     ayaṁ paṭhamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

     This is the first drawback.

502. 502

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपन्नस्सsī·la·vi·pan·nas·sa पापकोpā·pa·ko कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गच्छति,ab·bhug·gac·cha·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, dussīlassa sīlavipannassa pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchati,

     Furthermore, an unethical person gets a bad reputation.

503. 503

     अयंa·yaṃ दुतियोdu·ti·yo आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

     ayaṁ dutiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

     This is the second drawback.

504. 504

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so दुस्सीलोdus·sī·lo सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no यञ्ञदेवyañ·ña·de·va परिसंpa·ri·saṃ उपसङ्कमतिu·pa·saṅ·ka·ma·ti यदिya·di खत्तियपरिसंkhat·ti·ya·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di ब्राह्मणपरिसंbrāh·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di गहपतिपरिसंga·ha·pa·ti·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di समणपरिसं,sa·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·saṃ अविसारदोa·vi·sā·ra·do उपसङ्कमतिu·pa·saṅ·ka·ma·ti मङ्कुभूतो,maṅ·ku·bhū·to

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, dussīlo sīlavipanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati yadi khattiyaparisaṁ yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ yadi gahapatiparisaṁ yadi samaṇaparisaṁ, avisārado upasaṅkamati maṅkubhūto,

     Furthermore, an unethical person enters any kind of assembly unconfident and embarrassed, whether it’s an assembly of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or ascetics.

505. 505

     अयंa·yaṃ ततियोta·ti·yo आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

     ayaṁ tatiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

     This is the third drawback.

506. 506

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so दुस्सीलोdus·sī·lo सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no सम्मूळ्होsam·mū·ḷho कालंkā·laṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, dussīlo sīlavipanno sammūḷho kālaṁ karoti,

     Furthermore, an unethical person feels lost when they die.

507. 507

     अयंa·yaṃ चतुत्थोca·tut·tho आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

     ayaṁ catuttho ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

     This is the fourth drawback.

508. 508

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so दुस्सीलोdus·sī·lo सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जति,u·pa·paj·ja·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, dussīlo sīlavipanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati,

     Furthermore, an unethical person, when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.

509. 509

     अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

     ayaṁ pañcamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

     This is the fifth drawback.

510. 510

     पञ्चpañ·ca आनिसंसाā·ni·saṃ·sā सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

     Pañca ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

     <b>Five benefits for an ethical person because of their accomplishment in ethics:</b>

511. 511

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so सीलवाsī·la·vā सीलसम्पन्नोsī·la·sam·pan·no अप्पमादाधिकरणंap·pa·mā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ महन्तंma·han·taṃ भोगक्खन्धंbho·gak·khan·dhaṃ अधिगच्छति,a·dhi·gac·cha·ti

     Idhāvuso, sīlavā sīlasampanno appamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahantaṁ bhogakkhandhaṁ adhigacchati,

     Firstly, an ethical person gains great wealth on account of diligence.

512. 512

     अयंa·yaṃ पठमोpa·ṭha·mo आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

     ayaṁ paṭhamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

     This is the first benefit.

513. 513

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पन्नस्सsī·la·sam·pan·nas·sa कल्याणोkal·yā·ṇo कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गच्छति,ab·bhug·gac·cha·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, sīlavato sīlasampannassa kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchati,

     Furthermore, an ethical person gets a good reputation.

514. 514

     अयंa·yaṃ दुतियोdu·ti·yo आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

     ayaṁ dutiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

     This is the second benefit.

515. 515

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सीलवाsī·la·vā सीलसम्पन्नोsī·la·sam·pan·no यञ्ञदेवyañ·ña·de·va परिसंpa·ri·saṃ उपसङ्कमतिu·pa·saṅ·ka·ma·ti यदिya·di खत्तियपरिसंkhat·ti·ya·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di ब्राह्मणपरिसंbrāh·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di गहपतिपरिसंga·ha·pa·ti·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di समणपरिसं,sa·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·saṃ विसारदोvi·sā·ra·do उपसङ्कमतिu·pa·saṅ·ka·ma·ti अमङ्कुभूतो,a·maṅ·ku·bhū·to

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, sīlavā sīlasampanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati yadi khattiyaparisaṁ yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ yadi gahapatiparisaṁ yadi samaṇaparisaṁ, visārado upasaṅkamati amaṅkubhūto,

     Furthermore, an ethical person enters any kind of assembly bold and self-assured, whether it’s an assembly of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or ascetics.

516. 516

     अयंa·yaṃ ततियोta·ti·yo आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

     ayaṁ tatiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

     This is the third benefit.

517. 517

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सीलवाsī·la·vā सीलसम्पन्नोsī·la·sam·pan·no असम्मूळ्होa·sam·mū·ḷho कालंkā·laṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, sīlavā sīlasampanno asammūḷho kālaṁ karoti,

     Furthermore, an ethical person dies not feeling lost.

518. 518

     अयंa·yaṃ चतुत्थोca·tut·tho आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

     ayaṁ catuttho ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

     This is the fourth benefit.

519. 519

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सीलवाsī·la·vā सीलसम्पन्नोsī·la·sam·pan·no कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जति,u·pa·paj·ja·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, sīlavā sīlasampanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati,

     Furthermore, when an ethical person’s body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.

520. 520

     अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

     ayaṁ pañcamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

     This is the fifth benefit.

521. 521

     चोदकेन,co·da·ke·na आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā परंpa·raṃ चोदेतुकामेनco·de·tu·kā·me·na पञ्चpañ·ca धम्मेdham·me अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ उपट्ठपेत्वाu·paṭ·ṭha·pet·vā परोpa·ro चोदेतब्बो।co·de·tab·bo

     Codakena, āvuso, bhikkhunā paraṁ codetukāmena pañca dhamme ajjhattaṁ upaṭṭhapetvā paro codetabbo.

     <b>A mendicant who wants to accuse another should first establish five things in themselves:</b>

522. 522

     कालेनkā·le·na वक्खामिvak·khā·mi नोno अकालेन,a·kā·le·na

     Kālena vakkhāmi no akālena,

     I will speak at the right time, not at the wrong time.

523. 523

     भूतेनbhū·te·na वक्खामिvak·khā·mi नोno अभूतेन,a·bhū·te·na

     bhūtena vakkhāmi no abhūtena,

     I will speak truthfully, not falsely.

524. 524

     सण्हेनsaṇ·he·na वक्खामिvak·khā·mi नोno फरुसेन,pha·ru·se·na

     saṇhena vakkhāmi no pharusena,

     I will speak gently, not harshly.

525. 525

     अत्थसंहितेनat·tha·saṃ·hi·te·na वक्खामिvak·khā·mi नोno अनत्थसंहितेन,a·nat·tha·saṃ·hi·te·na

     atthasaṁhitena vakkhāmi no anatthasaṁhitena,

     I will speak beneficially, not harmfully.

526. 526

     मेत्तचित्तेनmet·ta·cit·te·na वक्खामिvak·khā·mi नोno दोसन्तरेनाति।do·san·ta·re·nā·ti

     mettacittena vakkhāmi no dosantarenāti.

     I will speak lovingly, not from secret hate.

527. 527

     चोदकेन,co·da·ke·na आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā परंpa·raṃ चोदेतुकामेनco·de·tu·kā·me·na इमेi·me पञ्चpañ·ca धम्मेdham·me अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ उपट्ठपेत्वाu·paṭ·ṭha·pet·vā परोpa·ro चोदेतब्बो।co·de·tab·bo

     Codakena, āvuso, bhikkhunā paraṁ codetukāmena ime pañca dhamme ajjhattaṁ upaṭṭhapetvā paro codetabbo.

     A mendicant who wants to accuse another should first establish these five things in themselves.

528. 528

     पञ्चpañ·ca पधानियङ्गानि।pa·dhā·ni·yaṅ·gā·ni

     Pañca padhāniyaṅgāni.

     <b>Five factors that support meditation:</b>

529. 529

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सद्धोsad·dho होति,ho·ti सद्दहतिsad·da·ha·ti तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa बोधिं:bo·dhiṃ

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu saddho hoti, saddahati tathāgatassa bodhiṁ:

     A mendicant has faith in the Realized One’s awakening:

530. 530

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धोsam·mā·sam·bud·dho विज्जाचरणसम्पन्नोvij·jā·ca·ra·ṇa·sam·pan·no सुगतो,su·ga·to लोकविदूlo·ka·vi·dū अनुत्तरोa·nut·ta·ro पुरिसदम्मसारथिpu·ri·sa·dam·ma·sā·ra·thi सत्थाsat·thā देवमनुस्सानंde·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा’ति।bha·ga·vā

     ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato, lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti.

     ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’

531. 531

     अप्पाबाधोap·pā·bā·dho होतिho·ti अप्पातङ्को,ap·pā·taṅ·ko समवेपाकिनियाsa·ma·ve·pā·ki·ni·yā गहणियाga·ha·ṇi·yā समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to नातिसीतायnā·ti·sī·tā·ya नाच्चुण्हायnāc·cuṇ·hā·ya मज्झिमायmaj·jhi·mā·ya पधानक्खमाय।pa·dhā·nak·kha·mā·ya

     Appābādho hoti appātaṅko, samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya majjhimāya padhānakkhamāya.

     They are rarely ill or unwell. Their stomach digests well, being neither too hot nor too cold, but just right, and fit for meditation.

532. 532

     असठोa·sa·ṭho होतिho·ti अमायावी,a·mā·yā·vī यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अत्तानंat·tā·naṃ आविकत्ताā·vi·kat·tā सत्थरिsat·tha·ri वाvā विञ्ञूसुviñ·ñū·su वाvā सब्रह्मचारीसु।sab·rah·ma·cā·rī·su

     Asaṭho hoti amāyāvī, yathābhūtaṁ attānaṁ āvikattā satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu.

     They’re not devious or deceitful. They reveal themselves honestly to the Teacher or sensible spiritual companions.

533. 533

     आरद्धवीरियोā·rad·dha·vī·ri·yo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ पहानायpa·hā·nā·ya कुसलानंku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ उपसम्पदायu·pa·sam·pa·dā·ya थामवाthā·ma·vā दळ्हपरक्कमोda·ḷha·pa·rak·ka·mo अनिक्खित्तधुरोa·nik·khit·ta·dhu·ro कुसलेसुku·sa·le·su धम्मेसु।dham·me·su

     Āraddhavīriyo viharati akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadāya thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu.

     They live with energy roused up for giving up unskillful qualities and embracing skillful qualities. They’re strong, staunchly vigorous, not slacking off when it comes to developing skillful qualities.

534. 534

     पञ्ञवाpañ·ña·vā होतिho·ti उदयत्थगामिनियाu·da·yat·tha·gā·mi·ni·yā पञ्ञायpañ·ñā·ya समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to अरियायa·ri·yā·ya निब्बेधिकायnib·be·dhi·kā·ya सम्मादुक्खक्खयगामिनिया।sam·mā·duk·khak·kha·ya·gā·mi·ni·yā

     Paññavā hoti udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammādukkhakkhayagāminiyā.

     They’re wise. They have the wisdom of arising and passing away which is noble, penetrative, and leads to the complete ending of suffering.

535. 535

     पञ्चpañ·ca सुद्धावासा—sud·dhā·vā·sā

     Pañca suddhāvāsā—

     <b>Five pure abodes:</b>

536. 536

     अविहा,a·vi·hā अतप्पा,a·tap·pā सुदस्सा,su·das·sā सुदस्सी,su·das·sī अकनिट्ठा।a·ka·niṭ·ṭhā

     avihā, atappā, sudassā, sudassī, akaniṭṭhā.

     Aviha, Atappa, the gods fair to see, the fair seeing gods, and Akaniṭṭha.

537. 537

     पञ्चpañ·ca अनागामिनो—a·nā·gā·mi·no

     Pañca anāgāmino—

     <b>Five non-returners:</b>

538. 538

     अन्तरापरिनिब्बायी,an·ta·rā·pa·ri·nib·bā·yī उपहच्चपरिनिब्बायी,u·pa·hac·ca·pa·ri·nib·bā·yī असङ्खारपरिनिब्बायी,a·saṅ·khā·ra·pa·ri·nib·bā·yī ससङ्खारपरिनिब्बायी,sa·saṅ·khā·ra·pa·ri·nib·bā·yī उद्धंसोतोअकनिट्ठगामी।ud·dhaṃ·so·to·a·ka·niṭ·ṭha·gā·mī

     antarāparinibbāyī, upahaccaparinibbāyī, asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, uddhaṁsotoakaniṭṭhagāmī.

     one who is extinguished between one life and the next, one who is extinguished upon landing, one who is extinguished without extra effort, one who is extinguished with extra effort, and one who heads upstream, going to the Akaniṭṭha realm.

539. 539

     पञ्चpañ·ca चेतोखिला।ce·to·khi·lā

     Pañca cetokhilā.

     <b>Five kinds of hard-heartedness:</b>

540. 540

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिsat·tha·ri कङ्खतिkaṅ·kha·ti विचिकिच्छतिvi·ci·kic·cha·ti नाधिमुच्चतिnā·dhi·muc·ca·ti नna सम्पसीदति।sam·pa·sī·da·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati.

     Firstly, a mendicant has doubts about the Teacher. They’re uncertain, undecided, and lacking confidence.

541. 541

     योyo सो,so आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिsat·tha·ri कङ्खतिkaṅ·kha·ti विचिकिच्छतिvi·ci·kic·cha·ti नाधिमुच्चतिnā·dhi·muc·ca·ti नna सम्पसीदति,sam·pa·sī·da·ti तस्सtas·sa चित्तंcit·taṃ नna नमतिna·ma·ti आतप्पायā·tap·pā·ya अनुयोगायa·nu·yo·gā·ya सातच्चायsā·tac·cā·ya पधानाय,pa·dhā·nā·ya यस्सyas·sa चित्तंcit·taṃ नna नमतिna·ma·ti आतप्पायā·tap·pā·ya अनुयोगायa·nu·yo·gā·ya सातच्चायsā·tac·cā·ya पधानाय,pa·dhā·nā·ya अयंa·yaṃ पठमोpa·ṭha·mo चेतोखिलो।ce·to·khi·lo

     Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, ayaṁ paṭhamo cetokhilo.

     This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the first kind of hard-heartedness.

542. 542

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मेdham·me कङ्खतिkaṅ·kha·ti विचिकिच्छतिvi·ci·kic·cha·ti …पे…pe

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu dhamme kaṅkhati vicikicchati …pe…

     Furthermore, a mendicant has doubts about the teaching …

543. 543

     सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe कङ्खतिkaṅ·kha·ti विचिकिच्छतिvi·ci·kic·cha·ti …

     saṅghe kaṅkhati vicikicchati …

     the Saṅgha …

544. 544

     सिक्खायsik·khā·ya कङ्खतिkaṅ·kha·ti विचिकिच्छतिvi·ci·kic·cha·ti …

     sikkhāya kaṅkhati vicikicchati …

     the training …

545. 545

     सब्रह्मचारीसुsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·su कुपितोku·pi·to होतिho·ti अनत्तमनोa·nat·ta·ma·no आहतचित्तोā·ha·ta·cit·to खिलजातो।khi·la·jā·to

     sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto.

     A mendicant is angry and upset with their spiritual companions, resentful and closed off.

546. 546

     योyo सो,so आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सब्रह्मचारीसुsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·su कुपितोku·pi·to होतिho·ti अनत्तमनोa·nat·ta·ma·no आहतचित्तोā·ha·ta·cit·to खिलजातो,khi·la·jā·to तस्सtas·sa चित्तंcit·taṃ नna नमतिna·ma·ti आतप्पायā·tap·pā·ya अनुयोगायa·nu·yo·gā·ya सातच्चायsā·tac·cā·ya पधानाय,pa·dhā·nā·ya यस्सyas·sa चित्तंcit·taṃ नna नमतिna·ma·ti आतप्पायā·tap·pā·ya अनुयोगायa·nu·yo·gā·ya सातच्चायsā·tac·cā·ya पधानाय,pa·dhā·nā·ya अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo चेतोखिलो।ce·to·khi·lo

     Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, ayaṁ pañcamo cetokhilo.

     This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the fifth kind of hard-heartedness.

547. 547

     पञ्चpañ·ca चेतसोविनिबन्धा।ce·ta·so·vi·ni·ban·dhā

     Pañca cetasovinibandhā.

     <b>Five shackles of the heart:</b>

548. 548

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu कामेसुkā·me·su अवीतरागोa·vī·ta·rā·go होतिho·ti अविगतच्छन्दोa·vi·ga·tac·chan·do अविगतपेमोa·vi·ga·ta·pe·mo अविगतपिपासोa·vi·ga·ta·pi·pā·so अविगतपरिळाहोa·vi·ga·ta·pa·ri·ḷā·ho अविगततण्हो।a·vi·ga·ta·taṇ·ho

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu kāmesu avītarāgo hoti avigatacchando avigatapemo avigatapipāso avigatapariḷāho avigatataṇho.

     Firstly, a mendicant isn’t free of greed, desire, fondness, thirst, passion, and craving for sensual pleasures.

549. 549

     योyo सो,so आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu कामेसुkā·me·su अवीतरागोa·vī·ta·rā·go होतिho·ti अविगतच्छन्दोa·vi·ga·tac·chan·do अविगतपेमोa·vi·ga·ta·pe·mo अविगतपिपासोa·vi·ga·ta·pi·pā·so अविगतपरिळाहोa·vi·ga·ta·pa·ri·ḷā·ho अविगततण्हो,a·vi·ga·ta·taṇ·ho तस्सtas·sa चित्तंcit·taṃ नna नमतिna·ma·ti आतप्पायā·tap·pā·ya अनुयोगायa·nu·yo·gā·ya सातच्चायsā·tac·cā·ya पधानाय।pa·dhā·nā·ya

     Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu kāmesu avītarāgo hoti avigatacchando avigatapemo avigatapipāso avigatapariḷāho avigatataṇho, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya.

     (Pāli only)

550. 550

     यस्सyas·sa चित्तंcit·taṃ नna नमतिna·ma·ti आतप्पायā·tap·pā·ya अनुयोगायa·nu·yo·gā·ya सातच्चायsā·tac·cā·ya पधानाय।pa·dhā·nā·ya

     Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya.

     This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving.

551. 551

     अयंa·yaṃ पठमोpa·ṭha·mo चेतसोce·ta·so विनिबन्धो।vi·ni·ban·dho

     Ayaṁ paṭhamo cetaso vinibandho.

     This is the first shackle of the heart.

552. 552

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu कायेkā·ye अवीतरागोa·vī·ta·rā·go होतिho·ti …पे…pe

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu kāye avītarāgo hoti …pe…

     Furthermore, a mendicant isn’t free of greed for the body …

553. 553

     रूपेrū·pe अवीतरागोa·vī·ta·rā·go होतिho·ti …पे…pe

     rūpe avītarāgo hoti …pe…

     They’re not free of greed for form …

554. 554

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ उदरावदेहकंu·da·rā·va·de·ha·kaṃ भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā सेय्यसुखंsey·ya·su·khaṃ पस्ससुखंpas·sa·su·khaṃ मिद्धसुखंmid·dha·su·khaṃ अनुयुत्तोa·nu·yut·to विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti …पे…pe

     puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāvadatthaṁ udarāvadehakaṁ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṁ passasukhaṁ middhasukhaṁ anuyutto viharati …pe…

     They eat as much as they like until their bellies are full, then indulge in the pleasures of sleeping, lying down, and drowsing …

555. 555

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ देवनिकायंde·va·ni·kā·yaṃ पणिधायpa·ṇi·dhā·ya ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरति:ca·ra·ti ‘इमिनाहंi·mi·nā·haṃ सीलेनsī·le·na वाvā वतेनva·te·na वाvā तपेनta·pe·na वाvā ब्रह्मचरियेनbrah·ma·ca·ri·ye·na वाvā देवोde·vo वाvā भविस्सामिbha·vis·sā·mi देवञ्ञतरोde·vañ·ña·ta·ro वा’ति।vā

     puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu aññataraṁ devanikāyaṁ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṁ carati: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti.

     They lead the spiritual life hoping to be reborn in one of the orders of gods, thinking: ‘By this precept or observance or fervent austerity or spiritual practice, may I become one of the gods!’

556. 556

     योyo सो,so आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ देवनिकायंde·va·ni·kā·yaṃ पणिधायpa·ṇi·dhā·ya ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरति:ca·ra·ti ‘इमिनाहंi·mi·nā·haṃ सीलेनsī·le·na वाvā वतेनva·te·na वाvā तपेनta·pe·na वाvā ब्रह्मचरियेनbrah·ma·ca·ri·ye·na वाvā देवोde·vo वाvā भविस्सामिbha·vis·sā·mi देवञ्ञतरोde·vañ·ña·ta·ro वा’ति,vā तस्सtas·sa चित्तंcit·taṃ नna नमतिna·ma·ti आतप्पायā·tap·pā·ya अनुयोगायa·nu·yo·gā·ya सातच्चायsā·tac·cā·ya पधानाय।pa·dhā·nā·ya यस्सyas·sa चित्तंcit·taṃ नna नमतिna·ma·ti आतप्पायā·tap·pā·ya अनुयोगायa·nu·yo·gā·ya सातच्चायsā·tac·cā·ya पधानाय।pa·dhā·nā·ya

     Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu aññataraṁ devanikāyaṁ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṁ carati: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya.

     This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving.

557. 557

     अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo चेतसोce·ta·so विनिबन्धो।vi·ni·ban·dho

     Ayaṁ pañcamo cetaso vinibandho.

     This is the fifth shackle of the heart.

558. 558

     पञ्चिन्द्रियानि—pañ·cin·dri·yā·ni

     Pañcindriyāni—

     <b>Five faculties:</b>

559. 559

     चक्खुन्द्रियं,cak·khun·dri·yaṃ सोतिन्द्रियं,so·tin·dri·yaṃ घानिन्द्रियं,ghā·nin·dri·yaṃ जिव्हिन्द्रियं,jiv·hin·dri·yaṃ कायिन्द्रियं।kā·yin·dri·yaṃ

     cakkhundriyaṁ, sotindriyaṁ, ghānindriyaṁ, jivhindriyaṁ, kāyindriyaṁ.

     eye, ear, nose, tongue, and body.

560. 560

     अपरानिपिa·pa·rā·ni·pi पञ्चिन्द्रियानि—pañ·cin·dri·yā·ni

     Aparānipi pañcindriyāni—

     <b>Another five faculties:</b>

561. 561

     सुखिन्द्रियं,su·khin·dri·yaṃ दुक्खिन्द्रियं,duk·khin·dri·yaṃ सोमनस्सिन्द्रियं,so·ma·nas·sin·dri·yaṃ दोमनस्सिन्द्रियं,do·ma·nas·sin·dri·yaṃ उपेक्खिन्द्रियं।u·pek·khin·dri·yaṃ

     sukhindriyaṁ, dukkhindriyaṁ, somanassindriyaṁ, domanassindriyaṁ, upekkhindriyaṁ.

     pleasure, pain, happiness, sadness, and equanimity.

562. 562

     अपरानिपिa·pa·rā·ni·pi पञ्चिन्द्रियानि—pañ·cin·dri·yā·ni

     Aparānipi pañcindriyāni—

     <b>Another five faculties:</b>

563. 563

     सद्धिन्द्रियं,sad·dhin·dri·yaṃ वीरियिन्द्रियं,vī·ri·yin·dri·yaṃ सतिन्द्रियं,sa·tin·dri·yaṃ समाधिन्द्रियं,sa·mā·dhin·dri·yaṃ पञ्ञिन्द्रियं।pañ·ñin·dri·yaṃ

     saddhindriyaṁ, vīriyindriyaṁ, satindriyaṁ, samādhindriyaṁ, paññindriyaṁ.

     faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom.

564. 564

     पञ्चpañ·ca निस्सरणियाnis·sa·ra·ṇi·yā धातुयो।dhā·tu·yo

     Pañca nissaraṇiyā dhātuyo.

     <b>Five elements of escape:</b>

565. 565

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no कामेkā·me मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to कामेसुkā·me·su चित्तंcit·taṃ नna पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti नna पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti नna सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti नna विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāme manasikaroto kāmesu cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati.

     Take a case where a mendicant focuses on sensual pleasures, but on that their mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided.

566. 566

     नेक्खम्मंnek·kham·maṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to नेक्खम्मेnek·kham·me चित्तंcit·taṃ पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Nekkhammaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto nekkhamme cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati.

     But when they focus on renunciation, on that their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided.

567. 567

     तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ सुगतंsu·ga·taṃ सुभावितंsu·bhā·vi·taṃ सुवुट्ठितंsu·vuṭ·ṭhi·taṃ सुविमुत्तंsu·vi·mut·taṃ विसंयुत्तंvi·saṃ·yut·taṃ कामेहि।kā·me·hi

     Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ kāmehi.

     Their mind is in a good state, well developed, well risen, well freed, and well detached from sensual pleasures.

568. 568

     येye चca कामपच्चयाkā·ma·pac·ca·yā उप्पज्जन्तिup·paj·jan·ti आसवाā·sa·vā विघाताvi·ghā·tā परिळाहा,pa·ri·ḷā·hā मुत्तोmut·to सोso तेहि,te·hi नna सोso तंtaṃ वेदनंve·da·naṃ वेदेति।ve·de·ti

     Ye ca kāmapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti.

     They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of sensual pleasures, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling.

569. 569

     इदमक्खातंi·da·mak·khā·taṃ कामानंkā·mā·naṃ निस्सरणं।nis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ

     Idamakkhātaṁ kāmānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.

     This is how the escape from sensual pleasures is explained.

570. 570

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no ब्यापादंbyā·pā·daṃ मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to ब्यापादेbyā·pā·de चित्तंcit·taṃ नna पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti नna पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti नna सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti नna विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno byāpādaṁ manasikaroto byāpāde cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati.

     Take another case where a mendicant focuses on ill will, but their mind does not leap forth …

571. 571

     अब्यापादंab·yā·pā·daṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to अब्यापादेab·yā·pā·de चित्तंcit·taṃ पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Abyāpādaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto abyāpāde cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati.

     But when they focus on good will, their mind leaps forth …

572. 572

     तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ सुगतंsu·ga·taṃ सुभावितंsu·bhā·vi·taṃ सुवुट्ठितंsu·vuṭ·ṭhi·taṃ सुविमुत्तंsu·vi·mut·taṃ विसंयुत्तंvi·saṃ·yut·taṃ ब्यापादेन।byā·pā·de·na

     Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ byāpādena.

     Their mind is in a good state … well detached from ill will.

573. 573

     येye चca ब्यापादपच्चयाbyā·pā·da·pac·ca·yā उप्पज्जन्तिup·paj·jan·ti आसवाā·sa·vā विघाताvi·ghā·tā परिळाहा,pa·ri·ḷā·hā मुत्तोmut·to सोso तेहि,te·hi नna सोso तंtaṃ वेदनंve·da·naṃ वेदेति।ve·de·ti

     Ye ca byāpādapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti.

     They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of ill will, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling.

574. 574

     इदमक्खातंi·da·mak·khā·taṃ ब्यापादस्सbyā·pā·das·sa निस्सरणं।nis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ

     Idamakkhātaṁ byāpādassa nissaraṇaṁ.

     This is how the escape from ill will is explained.

575. 575

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no विहेसंvi·he·saṃ मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to विहेसायvi·he·sā·ya चित्तंcit·taṃ नna पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti नna पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti नna सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti नna विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno vihesaṁ manasikaroto vihesāya cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati.

     Take another case where a mendicant focuses on harming, but their mind does not leap forth …

576. 576

     अविहेसंa·vi·he·saṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to अविहेसायa·vi·he·sā·ya चित्तंcit·taṃ पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Avihesaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto avihesāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati.

     But when they focus on compassion, their mind leaps forth …

577. 577

     तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ सुगतंsu·ga·taṃ सुभावितंsu·bhā·vi·taṃ सुवुट्ठितंsu·vuṭ·ṭhi·taṃ सुविमुत्तंsu·vi·mut·taṃ विसंयुत्तंvi·saṃ·yut·taṃ विहेसाय।vi·he·sā·ya

     Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ vihesāya.

     Their mind is in a good state … well detached from harming.

578. 578

     येye चca विहेसापच्चयाvi·he·sā·pac·ca·yā उप्पज्जन्तिup·paj·jan·ti आसवाā·sa·vā विघाताvi·ghā·tā परिळाहा,pa·ri·ḷā·hā मुत्तोmut·to सोso तेहि,te·hi नna सोso तंtaṃ वेदनंve·da·naṃ वेदेति।ve·de·ti

     Ye ca vihesāpaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti.

     They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of harming, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling.

579. 579

     इदमक्खातंi·da·mak·khā·taṃ विहेसायvi·he·sā·ya निस्सरणं।nis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ

     Idamakkhātaṁ vihesāya nissaraṇaṁ.

     This is how the escape from harming is explained.

580. 580

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no रूपेrū·pe मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to रूपेसुrū·pe·su चित्तंcit·taṃ नna पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti नna पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti नna सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti नna विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno rūpe manasikaroto rūpesu cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati.

     Take another case where a mendicant focuses on form, but their mind does not leap forth …

581. 581

     अरूपंa·rū·paṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to अरूपेa·rū·pe चित्तंcit·taṃ पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Arūpaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto arūpe cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati.

     But when they focus on the formless, their mind leaps forth …

582. 582

     तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ सुगतंsu·ga·taṃ सुभावितंsu·bhā·vi·taṃ सुवुट्ठितंsu·vuṭ·ṭhi·taṃ सुविमुत्तंsu·vi·mut·taṃ विसंयुत्तंvi·saṃ·yut·taṃ रूपेहि।rū·pe·hi

     Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ rūpehi.

     Their mind is in a good state … well detached from forms.

583. 583

     येye चca रूपपच्चयाrū·pa·pac·ca·yā उप्पज्जन्तिup·paj·jan·ti आसवाā·sa·vā विघाताvi·ghā·tā परिळाहा,pa·ri·ḷā·hā मुत्तोmut·to सोso तेहि,te·hi नna सोso तंtaṃ वेदनंve·da·naṃ वेदेति।ve·de·ti

     Ye ca rūpapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti.

     They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of form, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling.

584. 584

     इदमक्खातंi·da·mak·khā·taṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ निस्सरणं।nis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ

     Idamakkhātaṁ rūpānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.

     This is how the escape from forms is explained.

585. 585

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सक्कायंsak·kā·yaṃ मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to सक्कायेsak·kā·ye चित्तंcit·taṃ नna पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti नna पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti नna सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti नna विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno sakkāyaṁ manasikaroto sakkāye cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati.

     Take a case where a mendicant focuses on substantial reality, but their mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided.

586. 586

     सक्कायनिरोधंsak·kā·ya·ni·ro·dhaṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa मनसिकरोतोma·na·si·ka·ro·to सक्कायनिरोधेsak·kā·ya·ni·ro·dhe चित्तंcit·taṃ पक्खन्दतिpak·khan·da·ti पसीदतिpa·sī·da·ti सन्तिट्ठतिsan·tiṭ·ṭha·ti विमुच्चति।vi·muc·ca·ti

     Sakkāyanirodhaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto sakkāyanirodhe cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati.

     But when they focus on the cessation of substantial reality, their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided.

587. 587

     तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ सुगतंsu·ga·taṃ सुभावितंsu·bhā·vi·taṃ सुवुट्ठितंsu·vuṭ·ṭhi·taṃ सुविमुत्तंsu·vi·mut·taṃ विसंयुत्तंvi·saṃ·yut·taṃ सक्कायेन।sak·kā·ye·na

     Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ sakkāyena.

     Their mind is in a good state, well developed, well risen, well freed, and well detached from substantial reality.

588. 588

     येye चca सक्कायपच्चयाsak·kā·ya·pac·ca·yā उप्पज्जन्तिup·paj·jan·ti आसवाā·sa·vā विघाताvi·ghā·tā परिळाहा,pa·ri·ḷā·hā मुत्तोmut·to सोso तेहि,te·hi नna सोso तंtaṃ वेदनंve·da·naṃ वेदेति।ve·de·ti

     Ye ca sakkāyapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti.

     They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of substantial reality, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling.

589. 589

     इदमक्खातंi·da·mak·khā·taṃ सक्कायस्सsak·kā·yas·sa निस्सरणं।nis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ

     Idamakkhātaṁ sakkāyassa nissaraṇaṁ.

     This is how the escape from substantial reality is explained.

590. 590

     पञ्चpañ·ca विमुत्तायतनानि।vi·mut·tā·ya·ta·nā·ni

     Pañca vimuttāyatanāni.

     <b>Five opportunities for freedom:</b>

591. 591

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सत्थाsat·thā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेतिde·se·ti अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro वाvā गरुट्ठानियोga·ruṭ·ṭhā·ni·yo सब्रह्मचारी।sab·rah·ma·cā·rī

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṁ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī.

     Firstly, the Teacher or a respected spiritual companion teaches Dhamma to a mendicant.

592. 592

     यथाya·thā यथा,ya·thā आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सत्थाsat·thā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेतिde·se·ti अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro वाvā गरुट्ठानियोga·ruṭ·ṭhā·ni·yo सब्रह्मचारीsab·rah·ma·cā·rī तथाta·thā तथाta·thā सोso तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मेdham·me अत्थपटिसंवेदीat·tha·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·dī चca होतिho·ti धम्मपटिसंवेदीdham·ma·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·dī च।ca

     Yathā yathā, āvuso, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṁ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme atthapaṭisaṁvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṁvedī ca.

     That mendicant feels inspired by the meaning and the teaching in that Dhamma, no matter how the Teacher or a respected spiritual companion teaches it.

593. 593

     तस्सtas·sa अत्थपटिसंवेदिनोat·tha·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·di·no धम्मपटिसंवेदिनोdham·ma·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·di·no पामोज्जंpā·moj·jaṃ जायति,jā·ya·ti पमुदितस्सpa·mu·di·tas·sa पीतिpī·ti जायति,jā·ya·ti पीतिमनस्सpī·ti·ma·nas·sa कायोkā·yo पस्सम्भति,pas·sam·bha·ti पस्सद्धकायोpas·sad·dha·kā·yo सुखंsu·khaṃ वेदेति,ve·de·ti सुखिनोsu·khi·no चित्तंcit·taṃ समाधियति।sa·mā·dhi·ya·ti

     Tassa atthapaṭisaṁvedino dhammapaṭisaṁvedino pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.

     Feeling inspired, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, one feels bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed.

594. 594

     इदंi·daṃ पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ विमुत्तायतनं।vi·mut·tā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ vimuttāyatanaṁ.

     This is the first opportunity for freedom.

595. 595

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no नna हेवhe·va खोkho सत्थाsat·thā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेतिde·se·ti अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro वाvā गरुट्ठानियोga·ruṭ·ṭhā·ni·yo सब्रह्मचारी,sab·rah·ma·cā·rī अपिa·pi चca खोkho यथासुतंya·thā·su·taṃ यथापरियत्तंya·thā·pa·ri·yat·taṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ वित्थारेनvit·thā·re·na परेसंpa·re·saṃ देसेतिde·se·ti …पे…pe

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno na heva kho satthā dhammaṁ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, api ca kho yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena paresaṁ deseti …pe…

     Furthermore, it may be that neither the Teacher nor a respected spiritual companion teaches Dhamma to a mendicant. But the mendicant teaches Dhamma in detail to others as they learned and memorized it. …

596. 596

     अपिa·pi चca खोkho यथासुतंya·thā·su·taṃ यथापरियत्तंya·thā·pa·ri·yat·taṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ वित्थारेनvit·thā·re·na सज्झायंsaj·jhā·yaṃ करोतिka·ro·ti …पे…pe

     api ca kho yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena sajjhāyaṁ karoti …pe…

     Or the mendicant rehearses the teaching in detail as they learned and memorized it. …

597. 597

     अपिa·pi चca खोkho यथासुतंya·thā·su·taṃ यथापरियत्तंya·thā·pa·ri·yat·taṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ चेतसाce·ta·sā अनुवितक्केतिa·nu·vi·tak·ke·ti अनुविचारेतिa·nu·vi·cā·re·ti मनसानुपेक्खतिma·na·sā·nu·pek·kha·ti …पे…pe

     api ca kho yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati …pe…

     Or the mendicant thinks about and considers the teaching in their heart, examining it with the mind as they learned and memorized it. …

598. 598

     अपिa·pi चca ख्वस्सkhvas·sa अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ समाधिनिमित्तंsa·mā·dhi·ni·mit·taṃ सुग्गहितंsug·ga·hi·taṃ होतिho·ti सुमनसिकतंsu·ma·na·si·ka·taṃ सूपधारितंsū·pa·dhā·ri·taṃ सुप्पटिविद्धंsup·pa·ṭi·vid·dhaṃ पञ्ञाय।pañ·ñā·ya

     api ca khvassa aññataraṁ samādhinimittaṁ suggahitaṁ hoti sumanasikataṁ sūpadhāritaṁ suppaṭividdhaṁ paññāya.

     Or a meditation subject as a basis of immersion is properly grasped, focused on, borne in mind, and penetrated with wisdom.

599. 599

     यथाya·thā यथा,ya·thā आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ समाधिनिमित्तंsa·mā·dhi·ni·mit·taṃ सुग्गहितंsug·ga·hi·taṃ होतिho·ti सुमनसिकतंsu·ma·na·si·ka·taṃ सूपधारितंsū·pa·dhā·ri·taṃ सुप्पटिविद्धंsup·pa·ṭi·vid·dhaṃ पञ्ञायpañ·ñā·ya तथाta·thā तथाta·thā सोso तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मेdham·me अत्थपटिसंवेदीat·tha·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·dī चca होतिho·ti धम्मपटिसंवेदीdham·ma·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·dī च।ca

     Yathā yathā, āvuso, bhikkhuno aññataraṁ samādhinimittaṁ suggahitaṁ hoti sumanasikataṁ sūpadhāritaṁ suppaṭividdhaṁ paññāya tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme atthapaṭisaṁvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṁvedī ca.

     That mendicant feels inspired by the meaning and the teaching in that Dhamma, no matter how a meditation subject as a basis of immersion is properly grasped, focused on, borne in mind, and penetrated with wisdom.

600. 600

     तस्सtas·sa अत्थपटिसंवेदिनोat·tha·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·di·no धम्मपटिसंवेदिनोdham·ma·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·di·no पामोज्जंpā·moj·jaṃ जायति,jā·ya·ti पमुदितस्सpa·mu·di·tas·sa पीतिpī·ti जायति,jā·ya·ti पीतिमनस्सpī·ti·ma·nas·sa कायोkā·yo पस्सम्भति,pas·sam·bha·ti पस्सद्धकायोpas·sad·dha·kā·yo सुखंsu·khaṃ वेदेति,ve·de·ti सुखिनोsu·khi·no चित्तंcit·taṃ समाधियति।sa·mā·dhi·ya·ti

     Tassa atthapaṭisaṁvedino dhammapaṭisaṁvedino pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.

     Feeling inspired, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, one feels bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed.

601. 601

     इदंi·daṃ पञ्चमंpañ·ca·maṃ विमुत्तायतनं।vi·mut·tā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ pañcamaṁ vimuttāyatanaṁ.

     This is the fifth opportunity for freedom.

602. 602

     पञ्चpañ·ca विमुत्तिपरिपाचनीयाvi·mut·ti·pa·ri·pā·ca·nī·yā सञ्ञा—sañ·ñā

     Pañca vimuttiparipācanīyā saññā—

     <b>Five perceptions that ripen in freedom:</b>

603. 603

     अनिच्चसञ्ञा,a·nic·ca·sañ·ñā अनिच्चेa·nic·ce दुक्खसञ्ञा,duk·kha·sañ·ñā दुक्खेduk·khe अनत्तसञ्ञा,a·nat·ta·sañ·ñā पहानसञ्ञा,pa·hā·na·sañ·ñā विरागसञ्ञा।vi·rā·ga·sañ·ñā

     aniccasaññā, anicce dukkhasaññā, dukkhe anattasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññā.

     the perception of impermanence, the perception of suffering in impermanence, the perception of not-self in suffering, the perception of giving up, and the perception of fading away.

604. 604

     इमेi·me खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na पञ्चpañ·ca धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता;sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena pañca dhammā sammadakkhātā;

     These are the teachings grouped by five that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

605. 605

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

606. 606

     6। छक्कchak·ka

     6. Chakka

     6. Sixes

607. 607

     अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na छcha धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता;sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cha dhammā sammadakkhātā;

     There are teachings grouped by six that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

608. 608

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

609. 609

     कतमेka·ta·me छ?cha

     Katame cha?

     What are the teachings grouped by six?

610. 610

     छcha अज्झत्तिकानिaj·jhat·ti·kā·ni आयतनानि—ā·ya·ta·nā·ni

     Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni—

     <b>Six interior sense fields:</b>

611. 611

     चक्खायतनं,cak·khā·ya·ta·naṃ सोतायतनं,so·tā·ya·ta·naṃ घानायतनं,ghā·nā·ya·ta·naṃ जिव्हायतनं,jiv·hā·ya·ta·naṃ कायायतनं,kā·yā·ya·ta·naṃ मनायतनं।ma·nā·ya·ta·naṃ

     cakkhāyatanaṁ, sotāyatanaṁ, ghānāyatanaṁ, jivhāyatanaṁ, kāyāyatanaṁ, manāyatanaṁ.

     eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

612. 612

     छcha बाहिरानिbā·hi·rā·ni आयतनानि—ā·ya·ta·nā·ni

     Cha bāhirāni āyatanāni—

     <b>Six exterior sense fields:</b>

613. 613

     रूपायतनं,rū·pā·ya·ta·naṃ सद्दायतनं,sad·dā·ya·ta·naṃ गन्धायतनं,gan·dhā·ya·ta·naṃ रसायतनं,ra·sā·ya·ta·naṃ फोट्ठब्बायतनं,phoṭ·ṭhab·bā·ya·ta·naṃ धम्मायतनं।dham·mā·ya·ta·naṃ

     rūpāyatanaṁ, saddāyatanaṁ, gandhāyatanaṁ, rasāyatanaṁ, phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṁ, dhammāyatanaṁ.

     sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas.

614. 614

     छcha विञ्ञाणकाया—viñ·ñā·ṇa·kā·yā

     Cha viññāṇakāyā—

     <b>Six classes of consciousness:</b>

615. 615

     चक्खुविञ्ञाणं,cak·khu·viñ·ñā·ṇaṃ सोतविञ्ञाणं,so·ta·viñ·ñā·ṇaṃ घानविञ्ञाणं,ghā·na·viñ·ñā·ṇaṃ जिव्हाविञ्ञाणं,jiv·hā·viñ·ñā·ṇaṃ कायविञ्ञाणं,kā·ya·viñ·ñā·ṇaṃ मनोविञ्ञाणं।ma·no·viñ·ñā·ṇaṃ

     cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, sotaviññāṇaṁ, ghānaviññāṇaṁ, jivhāviññāṇaṁ, kāyaviññāṇaṁ, manoviññāṇaṁ.

     eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind consciousness.

616. 616

     छcha फस्सकाया—phas·sa·kā·yā

     Cha phassakāyā—

     <b>Six classes of contact:</b>

617. 617

     चक्खुसम्फस्सो,cak·khu·sam·phas·so सोतसम्फस्सो,so·ta·sam·phas·so घानसम्फस्सो,ghā·na·sam·phas·so जिव्हासम्फस्सो,jiv·hā·sam·phas·so कायसम्फस्सो,kā·ya·sam·phas·so मनोसम्फस्सो।ma·no·sam·phas·so

     cakkhusamphasso, sotasamphasso, ghānasamphasso, jivhāsamphasso, kāyasamphasso, manosamphasso.

     contact through the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

618. 618

     छcha वेदनाकाया—ve·da·nā·kā·yā

     Cha vedanākāyā—

     <b>Six classes of feeling:</b>

619. 619

     चक्खुसम्फस्सजाcak·khu·sam·phas·sa·jā वेदना,ve·da·nā सोतसम्फस्सजाso·ta·sam·phas·sa·jā वेदना,ve·da·nā घानसम्फस्सजाghā·na·sam·phas·sa·jā वेदना,ve·da·nā जिव्हासम्फस्सजाjiv·hā·sam·phas·sa·jā वेदना,ve·da·nā कायसम्फस्सजाkā·ya·sam·phas·sa·jā वेदना,ve·da·nā मनोसम्फस्सजाma·no·sam·phas·sa·jā वेदना।ve·da·nā

     cakkhusamphassajā vedanā, sotasamphassajā vedanā, ghānasamphassajā vedanā, jivhāsamphassajā vedanā, kāyasamphassajā vedanā, manosamphassajā vedanā.

     feeling born of contact through the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

620. 620

     छcha सञ्ञाकाया—sañ·ñā·kā·yā

     Cha saññākāyā—

     <b>Six classes of perception:</b>

621. 621

     रूपसञ्ञा,rū·pa·sañ·ñā सद्दसञ्ञा,sad·da·sañ·ñā गन्धसञ्ञा,gan·dha·sañ·ñā रससञ्ञा,ra·sa·sañ·ñā फोट्ठब्बसञ्ञा,phoṭ·ṭhab·ba·sañ·ñā धम्मसञ्ञा।dham·ma·sañ·ñā

     rūpasaññā, saddasaññā, gandhasaññā, rasasaññā, phoṭṭhabbasaññā, dhammasaññā.

     perceptions of sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas.

622. 622

     छcha सञ्चेतनाकाया—sañ·ce·ta·nā·kā·yā

     Cha sañcetanākāyā—

     <b>Six bodies of intention:</b>

623. 623

     रूपसञ्चेतना,rū·pa·sañ·ce·ta·nā सद्दसञ्चेतना,sad·da·sañ·ce·ta·nā गन्धसञ्चेतना,gan·dha·sañ·ce·ta·nā रससञ्चेतना,ra·sa·sañ·ce·ta·nā फोट्ठब्बसञ्चेतना,phoṭ·ṭhab·ba·sañ·ce·ta·nā धम्मसञ्चेतना।dham·ma·sañ·ce·ta·nā

     rūpasañcetanā, saddasañcetanā, gandhasañcetanā, rasasañcetanā, phoṭṭhabbasañcetanā, dhammasañcetanā.

     intention regarding sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas.

624. 624

     छcha तण्हाकाया—taṇ·hā·kā·yā

     Cha taṇhākāyā—

     <b>Six classes of craving:</b>

625. 625

     रूपतण्हा,rū·pa·taṇ·hā सद्दतण्हा,sad·da·taṇ·hā गन्धतण्हा,gan·dha·taṇ·hā रसतण्हा,ra·sa·taṇ·hā फोट्ठब्बतण्हा,phoṭ·ṭhab·ba·taṇ·hā धम्मतण्हा।dham·ma·taṇ·hā

     rūpataṇhā, saddataṇhā, gandhataṇhā, rasataṇhā, phoṭṭhabbataṇhā, dhammataṇhā.

     craving for sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas.

626. 626

     छcha अगारवा।a·gā·ra·vā

     Cha agāravā.

     <b>Six kinds of disrespect:</b>

627. 627

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिsat·tha·ri अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो;ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेdham·me अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो;ap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो;ap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायsik·khā·ya अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो;ap·pa·tis·so अप्पमादेap·pa·mā·de अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो;ap·pa·tis·so पटिसन्थारेpa·ṭi·san·thā·re अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो।ap·pa·tis·so

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso; dhamme agāravo viharati appatisso; saṅghe agāravo viharati appatisso; sikkhāya agāravo viharati appatisso; appamāde agāravo viharati appatisso; paṭisanthāre agāravo viharati appatisso.

     A mendicant lacks respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, the training, diligence, and hospitality.

628. 628

     छcha गारवा।gā·ra·vā

     Cha gāravā.

     <b>Six kinds of respect:</b>

629. 629

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिsat·tha·ri सगारवोsa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सप्पतिस्सो;sap·pa·tis·so धम्मेdham·me सगारवोsa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सप्पतिस्सो;sap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe सगारवोsa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सप्पतिस्सो;sap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायsik·khā·ya सगारवोsa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सप्पतिस्सो;sap·pa·tis·so अप्पमादेap·pa·mā·de सगारवोsa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सप्पतिस्सो;sap·pa·tis·so पटिसन्थारेpa·ṭi·san·thā·re सगारवोsa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सप्पतिस्सो।sap·pa·tis·so

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthari sagāravo viharati sappatisso; dhamme sagāravo viharati sappatisso; saṅghe sagāravo viharati sappatisso; sikkhāya sagāravo viharati sappatisso; appamāde sagāravo viharati sappatisso; paṭisanthāre sagāravo viharati sappatisso.

     A mendicant has respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, the training, diligence, and hospitality.

630. 630

     छcha सोमनस्सूपविचारा।so·ma·nas·sū·pa·vi·cā·rā

     Cha somanassūpavicārā.

     <b>Six preoccupations with happiness:</b>

631. 631

     चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā रूपंrū·paṃ दिस्वाdis·vā सोमनस्सट्ठानियंso·ma·nas·saṭ·ṭhā·ni·yaṃ रूपंrū·paṃ उपविचरति;u·pa·vi·ca·ra·ti

     Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā somanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati;

     Seeing a sight with their eyes, one is preoccupied with a sight that’s a basis for happiness.

632. 632

     सोतेनso·te·na सद्दंsad·daṃ सुत्वाsut·vā …

     sotena saddaṁ sutvā …

     Hearing a sound with their ears …

633. 633

     घानेनghā·ne·na गन्धंgan·dhaṃ घायित्वाghā·yit·vā …

     ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …

     Smelling an odor with their nose …

634. 634

     जिव्हायjiv·hā·ya रसंra·saṃ सायित्वाsā·yit·vā …

     jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …

     Tasting a flavor with their tongue …

635. 635

     कायेनkā·ye·na फोट्ठब्बंphoṭ·ṭhab·baṃ फुसित्वा।phu·sit·vā

     kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā.

     Encountering a touch with their body …

636. 636

     मनसाma·na·sā धम्मंdham·maṃ विञ्ञायviñ·ñā·ya सोमनस्सट्ठानियंso·ma·nas·saṭ·ṭhā·ni·yaṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ उपविचरति।u·pa·vi·ca·ra·ti

     Manasā dhammaṁ viññāya somanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati.

     Knowing an idea with their mind, one is preoccupied with an idea that’s a basis for happiness.

637. 637

     छcha दोमनस्सूपविचारा।do·ma·nas·sū·pa·vi·cā·rā

     Cha domanassūpavicārā.

     <b>Six preoccupations with sadness:</b>

638. 638

     चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā रूपंrū·paṃ दिस्वाdis·vā दोमनस्सट्ठानियंdo·ma·nas·saṭ·ṭhā·ni·yaṃ रूपंrū·paṃ उपविचरतिu·pa·vi·ca·ra·ti …पे…pe

     Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā domanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati …pe…

     Seeing a sight with their eyes, one is preoccupied with a sight that’s a basis for sadness. …

639. 639

     मनसाma·na·sā धम्मंdham·maṃ विञ्ञायviñ·ñā·ya दोमनस्सट्ठानियंdo·ma·nas·saṭ·ṭhā·ni·yaṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ उपविचरति।u·pa·vi·ca·ra·ti

     manasā dhammaṁ viññāya domanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati.

     Knowing an idea with their mind, one is preoccupied with an idea that’s a basis for sadness.

640. 640

     छcha उपेक्खूपविचारा।u·pek·khū·pa·vi·cā·rā

     Cha upekkhūpavicārā.

     <b>Six preoccupations with equanimity:</b>

641. 641

     चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā रूपंrū·paṃ दिस्वाdis·vā उपेक्खाट्ठानियंu·pek·khāṭ·ṭhā·ni·yaṃ रूपंrū·paṃ उपविचरतिu·pa·vi·ca·ra·ti …पे…pe

     Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati …pe…

     Seeing a sight with their eyes, one is preoccupied with a sight that’s a basis for equanimity. …

642. 642

     मनसाma·na·sā धम्मंdham·maṃ विञ्ञायviñ·ñā·ya उपेक्खाट्ठानियंu·pek·khāṭ·ṭhā·ni·yaṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ उपविचरति।u·pa·vi·ca·ra·ti

     manasā dhammaṁ viññāya upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati.

     Knowing an idea with their mind, one is preoccupied with an idea that’s a basis for equanimity.

643. 643

     छcha सारणीयाsā·ra·ṇī·yā धम्मा।dham·mā

     Cha sāraṇīyā dhammā.

     <b>Six warm-hearted qualities:</b>

644. 644

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no मेत्तंmet·taṃ कायकम्मंkā·ya·kam·maṃ पच्चुपट्ठितंpac·cu·paṭ·ṭhi·taṃ होतिho·ti सब्रह्मचारीसुsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·su आविā·vi चेवce·va रहोra·ho च।ca

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca.

     Firstly, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with bodily kindness, both in public and in private.

645. 645

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo सारणीयोsā·ra·ṇī·yo पियकरणोpi·ya·ka·ra·ṇo गरुकरणोga·ru·ka·ra·ṇo सङ्गहायsaṅ·ga·hā·ya अविवादायa·vi·vā·dā·ya सामग्गियाsā·mag·gi·yā एकीभावायe·kī·bhā·vā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.

     This warm-hearted quality makes for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling.

646. 646

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no मेत्तंmet·taṃ वचीकम्मंva·cī·kam·maṃ पच्चुपट्ठितंpac·cu·paṭ·ṭhi·taṃ होतिho·ti सब्रह्मचारीसुsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·su आविā·vi चेवce·va रहोra·ho च।ca

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca.

     Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with verbal kindness, both in public and in private.

647. 647

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo सारणीयोsā·ra·ṇī·yo …पे…pe एकीभावायe·kī·bhā·vā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.

     This too is a warm-hearted quality.

648. 648

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no मेत्तंmet·taṃ मनोकम्मंma·no·kam·maṃ पच्चुपट्ठितंpac·cu·paṭ·ṭhi·taṃ होतिho·ti सब्रह्मचारीसुsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·su आविā·vi चेवce·va रहोra·ho च।ca

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca.

     Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with mental kindness, both in public and in private.

649. 649

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo सारणीयोsā·ra·ṇī·yo …पे…pe एकीभावायe·kī·bhā·vā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.

     This too is a warm-hearted quality.

650. 650

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu येye तेte लाभाlā·bhā धम्मिकाdham·mi·kā धम्मलद्धाdham·ma·lad·dhā अन्तमसोan·ta·ma·so पत्तपरियापन्नमत्तम्पि,pat·ta·pa·ri·yā·pan·na·mat·tam·pi तथारूपेहिta·thā·rū·pe·hi लाभेहिlā·bhe·hi अप्पटिविभत्तभोगीap·pa·ṭi·vi·bhat·ta·bho·gī होतिho·ti सीलवन्तेहिsī·la·van·te·hi सब्रह्मचारीहिsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·hi साधारणभोगी।sā·dhā·ra·ṇa·bho·gī

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu ye te lābhā dhammikā dhammaladdhā antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampi, tathārūpehi lābhehi appaṭivibhattabhogī hoti sīlavantehi sabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogī.

     Furthermore, a mendicant shares without reservation any material things they have gained by legitimate means, even the food placed in the alms-bowl, using them in common with their ethical spiritual companions.

651. 651

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo सारणीयोsā·ra·ṇī·yo …पे…pe एकीभावायe·kī·bhā·vā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.

     This too is a warm-hearted quality.

652. 652

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu यानिyā·ni तानिtā·ni सीलानिsī·lā·ni अखण्डानिa·khaṇ·ḍā·ni अच्छिद्दानिac·chid·dā·ni असबलानिa·sa·ba·lā·ni अकम्मासानिa·kam·mā·sā·ni भुजिस्सानिbhu·jis·sā·ni विञ्ञुप्पसत्थानिviñ·ñup·pa·sat·thā·ni अपरामट्ठानिa·pa·rā·maṭ·ṭhā·ni समाधिसंवत्तनिकानि,sa·mā·dhi·saṃ·vat·ta·ni·kā·ni तथारूपेसुta·thā·rū·pe·su सीलेसुsī·le·su सीलसामञ्ञगतोsī·la·sā·mañ·ña·ga·to विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सब्रह्मचारीहिsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·hi आविā·vi चेवce·va रहोra·ho च।ca

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṁvattanikāni, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca.

     Furthermore, a mendicant lives according to the precepts shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. Those precepts are intact, impeccable, spotless, and unmarred, liberating, praised by sensible people, not mistaken, and leading to immersion.

653. 653

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo सारणीयोsā·ra·ṇī·yo …पे…pe एकीभावायe·kī·bhā·vā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.

     This too is a warm-hearted quality.

654. 654

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu यायंyā·yaṃ दिट्ठिdiṭ·ṭhi अरियाa·ri·yā निय्यानिकाniy·yā·ni·kā निय्यातिniy·yā·ti तक्करस्सtak·ka·ras·sa सम्माsam·mā दुक्खक्खयाय,duk·khak·kha·yā·ya तथारूपायta·thā·rū·pā·ya दिट्ठियाdiṭ·ṭhi·yā दिट्ठिसामञ्ञगतोdiṭ·ṭhi·sā·mañ·ña·ga·to विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सब्रह्मचारीहिsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·hi आविā·vi चेवce·va रहोra·ho च।ca

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca.

     They live according to the view shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. That view is noble and emancipating, and delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering.

655. 655

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo सारणीयोsā·ra·ṇī·yo पियकरणोpi·ya·ka·ra·ṇo गरुकरणोga·ru·ka·ra·ṇo सङ्गहायsaṅ·ga·hā·ya अविवादायa·vi·vā·dā·ya सामग्गियाsā·mag·gi·yā एकीभावायe·kī·bhā·vā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.

     This warm-hearted quality too makes for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling.

656. 656

     छcha विवादमूलानि।vi·vā·da·mū·lā·ni

     Cha vivādamūlāni.

     <b>Six roots of dispute:</b>

657. 657

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu कोधनोko·dha·no होतिho·ti उपनाही।u·pa·nā·hī

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī.

     Firstly, a mendicant is irritable and acrimonious.

658. 658

     योyo सो,so आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu कोधनोko·dha·no होतिho·ti उपनाही,u·pa·nā·hī सोso सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारीpa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī होति।ho·ti

     Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī, so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti.

     Such a mendicant lacks respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and they don’t fulfill the training.

659. 659

     योyo सो,so आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिsat·tha·ri अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेdham·me अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायsik·khā·ya नna परिपूरकारी,pa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī सोso सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe विवादंvi·vā·daṃ जनेति।ja·ne·ti योyo होतिho·ti विवादोvi·vā·do बहुजनाहितायba·hu·ja·nā·hi·tā·ya बहुजनासुखायba·hu·ja·nā·su·khā·ya अनत्थायa·nat·thā·ya अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खायduk·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso, dhamme agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghe agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāya na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe vivādaṁ janeti. Yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     They create a dispute in the Saṅgha, which is for the detriment and unhappiness of the people, for the harm, detriment, and suffering of gods and humans.

660. 660

     एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so विवादमूलंvi·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā समनुपस्सेय्याथ।sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानायpa·hā·nā·ya वायमेय्याथ।vā·ya·mey·yā·tha

     Evarūpañce tumhe, āvuso, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, āvuso, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha.

     If you see such a root of dispute in yourselves or others, you should try to give up this bad thing.

661. 661

     एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so विवादमूलंvi·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā नna समनुपस्सेय्याथ।sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवायa·na·vas·sa·vā·ya पटिपज्जेय्याथ।pa·ṭi·paj·jey·yā·tha

     Evarūpañce tumhe, āvuso, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, āvuso, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha.

     If you don’t see it, you should practice so that it doesn’t come up in the future.

662. 662

     एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानंpa·hā·naṃ होति।ho·ti एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवोa·na·vas·sa·vo होति।ho·ti

     Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti.

     That’s how to give up this bad root of dispute, so it doesn’t come up in the future.

663. 663

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu मक्खीmak·khī होतिho·ti पळासीpa·ḷā·sī …पे…pe

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu makkhī hoti paḷāsī …pe…

     Furthermore, a mendicant is offensive and contemptuous …

664. 664

     इस्सुकीis·su·kī होतिho·ti मच्छरीmac·cha·rī …पे…pe

     issukī hoti maccharī …pe…

     They’re jealous and stingy …

665. 665

     सठोsa·ṭho होतिho·ti मायावीmā·yā·vī …

     saṭho hoti māyāvī …

     They’re devious and deceitful …

666. 666

     पापिच्छोpā·pic·cho होतिho·ti मिच्छादिट्ठीmic·chā·diṭ·ṭhī …

     pāpiccho hoti micchādiṭṭhī …

     They have corrupt wishes and wrong view …

667. 667

     सन्दिट्ठिपरामासीsan·diṭ·ṭhi·pa·rā·mā·sī होतिho·ti आधानग्गाहीā·dhā·nag·gā·hī दुप्पटिनिस्सग्गीdup·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·gī …पे…pe

     sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī …pe…

     They’re attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go.

668. 668

     योyo सो,so आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्दिट्ठिपरामासीsan·diṭ·ṭhi·pa·rā·mā·sī होतिho·ti आधानग्गाहीā·dhā·nag·gā·hī दुप्पटिनिस्सग्गी,dup·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·gī सोso सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारीpa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī होति।ho·ti

     yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī, so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti.

     (Pāli only)

669. 669

     योyo सो,so आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिsat·tha·ri अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेdham·me अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायsik·khā·ya नna परिपूरकारी,pa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī सोso सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe विवादंvi·vā·daṃ जनेति।ja·ne·ti योyo होतिho·ti विवादोvi·vā·do बहुजनाहितायba·hu·ja·nā·hi·tā·ya बहुजनासुखायba·hu·ja·nā·su·khā·ya अनत्थायa·nat·thā·ya अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खायduk·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso, dhamme agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghe agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāya na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe vivādaṁ janeti. Yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

670. 670

     एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so विवादमूलंvi·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā समनुपस्सेय्याथ।sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानायpa·hā·nā·ya वायमेय्याथ।vā·ya·mey·yā·tha

     Evarūpañce tumhe, āvuso, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, āvuso, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha.

     If you see such a root of dispute in yourselves or others, you should try to give up this bad thing.

671. 671

     एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so विवादमूलंvi·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā नna समनुपस्सेय्याथ।sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवायa·na·vas·sa·vā·ya पटिपज्जेय्याथ।pa·ṭi·paj·jey·yā·tha

     Evarūpañce tumhe, āvuso, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, āvuso, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha.

     If you don’t see it, you should practice so that it doesn’t come up in the future.

672. 672

     एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानंpa·hā·naṃ होति।ho·ti एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवोa·na·vas·sa·vo होति।ho·ti

     Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti.

     That’s how to give up this bad root of dispute, so it doesn’t come up in the future.

673. 673

     छcha धातुयो—dhā·tu·yo

     Cha dhātuyo—

     <b>Six elements:</b>

674. 674

     पथवीधातु,pa·tha·vī·dhā·tu आपोधातु,ā·po·dhā·tu तेजोधातु,te·jo·dhā·tu वायोधातु,vā·yo·dhā·tu आकासधातु,ā·kā·sa·dhā·tu विञ्ञाणधातु।viñ·ñā·ṇa·dhā·tu

     pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu, ākāsadhātu, viññāṇadhātu.

     earth, water, fire, air, space, and consciousness.

675. 675

     छcha निस्सरणियाnis·sa·ra·ṇi·yā धातुयो।dhā·tu·yo

     Cha nissaraṇiyā dhātuyo.

     <b>Six elements of escape:</b>

676. 676

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य:va·dey·ya

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya:

     Take a mendicant who says:

677. 677

     ‘मेत्ताmet·tā हिhi खोkho मेme चेतोविमुत्तिce·to·vi·mut·ti भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā यानीकताyā·nī·ka·tā वत्थुकताvat·thu·ka·tā अनुट्ठिताa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā परिचिताpa·ri·ci·tā सुसमारद्धा,su·sa·mā·rad·dhā

     ‘mettā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā,

     ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by love. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it.

678. 678

     अथa·tha चca पनpa·na मेme ब्यापादोbyā·pā·do चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya तिट्ठती’ति।tiṭ·ṭha·tī

     atha ca pana me byāpādo cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti.

     Yet somehow ill will still occupies my mind.’

679. 679

     सोso ‘माmā हेवन्’तिस्सhe·van वचनीयो,va·ca·nī·yo ‘मायस्माmā·yas·mā एवंe·vaṃ अवच,a·va·ca माmā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अब्भाचिक्खि,ab·bhā·cik·khi नna हिhi साधुsā·dhu भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अब्भक्खानं,ab·bhak·khā·naṃ नna हिhi भगवाbha·ga·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य।va·dey·ya

     So ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo, ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya.

     They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! Don’t say that. Don’t misrepresent the Buddha, for misrepresentation of the Buddha is not good. And the Buddha would not say that.

680. 680

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ मेत्तायmet·tā·ya चेतोविमुत्तियाce·to·vi·mut·ti·yā भावितायbhā·vi·tā·ya बहुलीकतायba·hu·lī·ka·tā·ya यानीकतायyā·nī·ka·tā·ya वत्थुकतायvat·thu·ka·tā·ya अनुट्ठितायa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya परिचितायpa·ri·ci·tā·ya सुसमारद्धाय।su·sa·mā·rad·dhā·ya

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ mettāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya.

     It’s impossible, reverend, it cannot happen that the heart’s release by love has been developed and properly implemented,

681. 681

     अथa·tha चca पनस्सpa·nas·sa ब्यापादोbyā·pā·do चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya ठस्सति,ṭhas·sa·ti नेतंne·taṃ ठानंṭhā·naṃ विज्जति।vij·ja·ti

     Atha ca panassa byāpādo cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.

     yet somehow ill will still occupies the mind.

682. 682

     निस्सरणंnis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ हेतं,he·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so ब्यापादस्स,byā·pā·das·sa यदिदंya·di·daṃ मेत्ताmet·tā चेतोविमुत्ती’ति।ce·to·vi·mut·tī

     Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, byāpādassa, yadidaṁ mettā cetovimuttī’ti.

     For it is the heart’s release by love that is the escape from ill will.’

683. 683

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य:va·dey·ya

     Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya:

     Take another mendicant who says:

684. 684

     ‘करुणाka·ru·ṇā हिhi खोkho मेme चेतोविमुत्तिce·to·vi·mut·ti भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā यानीकताyā·nī·ka·tā वत्थुकताvat·thu·ka·tā अनुट्ठिताa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā परिचिताpa·ri·ci·tā सुसमारद्धा।su·sa·mā·rad·dhā

     ‘karuṇā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā.

     ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by compassion. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it.

685. 685

     अथa·tha चca पनpa·na मेme विहेसाvi·he·sā चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya तिट्ठती’ति,tiṭ·ṭha·tī

     Atha ca pana me vihesā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti,

     Yet somehow the thought of harming still occupies my mind.’

686. 686

     सोso ‘माmā हेवन्’तिस्सhe·van वचनीयोva·ca·nī·yo ‘मायस्माmā·yas·mā एवंe·vaṃ अवच,a·va·ca माmā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अब्भाचिक्खि,ab·bhā·cik·khi नna हिhi साधुsā·dhu भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अब्भक्खानं,ab·bhak·khā·naṃ नna हिhi भगवाbha·ga·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य।va·dey·ya

     so ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya.

     They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! …

687. 687

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ करुणायka·ru·ṇā·ya चेतोविमुत्तियाce·to·vi·mut·ti·yā भावितायbhā·vi·tā·ya बहुलीकतायba·hu·lī·ka·tā·ya यानीकतायyā·nī·ka·tā·ya वत्थुकतायvat·thu·ka·tā·ya अनुट्ठितायa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya परिचितायpa·ri·ci·tā·ya सुसमारद्धाय,su·sa·mā·rad·dhā·ya

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ karuṇāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya,

     (Pāli only)

688. 688

     अथa·tha चca पनस्सpa·nas·sa विहेसाvi·he·sā चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya ठस्सति,ṭhas·sa·ti नेतंne·taṃ ठानंṭhā·naṃ विज्जति।vij·ja·ti

     atha ca panassa vihesā cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.

     (Pāli only)

689. 689

     निस्सरणंnis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ हेतं,he·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so विहेसाय,vi·he·sā·ya यदिदंya·di·daṃ करुणाka·ru·ṇā चेतोविमुत्ती’ति।ce·to·vi·mut·tī

     Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, vihesāya, yadidaṁ karuṇā cetovimuttī’ti.

     For it is the heart’s release by compassion that is the escape from thoughts of harming.’

690. 690

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य:va·dey·ya

     Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya:

     Take another mendicant who says:

691. 691

     ‘मुदिताmu·di·tā हिhi खोkho मेme चेतोविमुत्तिce·to·vi·mut·ti भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā यानीकताyā·nī·ka·tā वत्थुकताvat·thu·ka·tā अनुट्ठिताa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā परिचिताpa·ri·ci·tā सुसमारद्धा।su·sa·mā·rad·dhā

     ‘muditā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā.

     ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by rejoicing. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it.

692. 692

     अथa·tha चca पनpa·na मेme अरतिa·ra·ti चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya तिट्ठती’ति,tiṭ·ṭha·tī

     Atha ca pana me arati cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti,

     Yet somehow discontent still occupies my mind.’

693. 693

     सोso ‘माmā हेवन्’तिस्सhe·van वचनीयोva·ca·nī·yo ‘मायस्माmā·yas·mā एवंe·vaṃ अवच,a·va·ca माmā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अब्भाचिक्खि,ab·bhā·cik·khi नna हिhi साधुsā·dhu भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अब्भक्खानं,ab·bhak·khā·naṃ नna हिhi भगवाbha·ga·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य।va·dey·ya

     so ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya.

     They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! …

694. 694

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ मुदितायmu·di·tā·ya चेतोविमुत्तियाce·to·vi·mut·ti·yā भावितायbhā·vi·tā·ya बहुलीकतायba·hu·lī·ka·tā·ya यानीकतायyā·nī·ka·tā·ya वत्थुकतायvat·thu·ka·tā·ya अनुट्ठितायa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya परिचितायpa·ri·ci·tā·ya सुसमारद्धाय,su·sa·mā·rad·dhā·ya

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ muditāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya,

     (Pāli only)

695. 695

     अथa·tha चca पनस्सpa·nas·sa अरतिa·ra·ti चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya ठस्सति,ṭhas·sa·ti नेतंne·taṃ ठानंṭhā·naṃ विज्जति।vij·ja·ti

     atha ca panassa arati cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.

     (Pāli only)

696. 696

     निस्सरणंnis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ हेतं,he·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अरतिया,a·ra·ti·yā यदिदंya·di·daṃ मुदिताmu·di·tā चेतोविमुत्ती’ति।ce·to·vi·mut·tī

     Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, aratiyā, yadidaṁ muditā cetovimuttī’ti.

     For it is the heart’s release by rejoicing that is the escape from discontent.’

697. 697

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य:va·dey·ya

     Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya:

     Take another mendicant who says:

698. 698

     ‘उपेक्खाu·pek·khā हिhi खोkho मेme चेतोविमुत्तिce·to·vi·mut·ti भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā यानीकताyā·nī·ka·tā वत्थुकताvat·thu·ka·tā अनुट्ठिताa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā परिचिताpa·ri·ci·tā सुसमारद्धा।su·sa·mā·rad·dhā

     ‘upekkhā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā.

     ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by equanimity. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it.

699. 699

     अथa·tha चca पनpa·na मेme रागोrā·go चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya तिट्ठती’ति।tiṭ·ṭha·tī

     Atha ca pana me rāgo cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti.

     Yet somehow desire still occupies my mind.’

700. 700

     सोso ‘माmā हेवन्’तिस्सhe·van वचनीयोva·ca·nī·yo ‘मायस्माmā·yas·mā एवंe·vaṃ अवच,a·va·ca माmā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अब्भाचिक्खि,ab·bhā·cik·khi नna हिhi साधुsā·dhu भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अब्भक्खानं,ab·bhak·khā·naṃ नna हिhi भगवाbha·ga·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य।va·dey·ya

     So ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya.

     They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! …

701. 701

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ उपेक्खायu·pek·khā·ya चेतोविमुत्तियाce·to·vi·mut·ti·yā भावितायbhā·vi·tā·ya बहुलीकतायba·hu·lī·ka·tā·ya यानीकतायyā·nī·ka·tā·ya वत्थुकतायvat·thu·ka·tā·ya अनुट्ठितायa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya परिचितायpa·ri·ci·tā·ya सुसमारद्धाय,su·sa·mā·rad·dhā·ya

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ upekkhāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya,

     (Pāli only)

702. 702

     अथa·tha चca पनस्सpa·nas·sa रागोrā·go चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya ठस्सतिṭhas·sa·ti नेतंne·taṃ ठानंṭhā·naṃ विज्जति।vij·ja·ti

     atha ca panassa rāgo cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.

     (Pāli only)

703. 703

     निस्सरणंnis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ हेतं,he·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so रागस्स,rā·gas·sa यदिदंya·di·daṃ उपेक्खाu·pek·khā चेतोविमुत्ती’ति।ce·to·vi·mut·tī

     Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, rāgassa, yadidaṁ upekkhā cetovimuttī’ti.

     For it is the heart’s release by equanimity that is the escape from desire.’

704. 704

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य:va·dey·ya

     Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya:

     Take another mendicant who says:

705. 705

     ‘अनिमित्ताa·ni·mit·tā हिhi खोkho मेme चेतोविमुत्तिce·to·vi·mut·ti भाविताbhā·vi·tā बहुलीकताba·hu·lī·ka·tā यानीकताyā·nī·ka·tā वत्थुकताvat·thu·ka·tā अनुट्ठिताa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā परिचिताpa·ri·ci·tā सुसमारद्धा।su·sa·mā·rad·dhā

     ‘animittā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā.

     ‘I’ve developed the signless release of the heart. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it.

706. 706

     अथa·tha चca पनpa·na मेme निमित्तानुसारिni·mit·tā·nu·sā·ri विञ्ञाणंviñ·ñā·ṇaṃ होती’ति।ho·tī

     Atha ca pana me nimittānusāri viññāṇaṁ hotī’ti.

     Yet somehow my consciousness still follows after signs.’

707. 707

     सोso ‘माmā हेवन्’तिस्सhe·van वचनीयोva·ca·nī·yo ‘मायस्माmā·yas·mā एवंe·vaṃ अवच,a·va·ca माmā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अब्भाचिक्खि,ab·bhā·cik·khi नna हिhi साधुsā·dhu भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अब्भक्खानं,ab·bhak·khā·naṃ नna हिhi भगवाbha·ga·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य।va·dey·ya

     So ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya.

     They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! …

708. 708

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ अनिमित्तायa·ni·mit·tā·ya चेतोविमुत्तियाce·to·vi·mut·ti·yā भावितायbhā·vi·tā·ya बहुलीकतायba·hu·lī·ka·tā·ya यानीकतायyā·nī·ka·tā·ya वत्थुकतायvat·thu·ka·tā·ya अनुट्ठितायa·nuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya परिचितायpa·ri·ci·tā·ya सुसमारद्धाय,su·sa·mā·rad·dhā·ya

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ animittāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya,

     (Pāli only)

709. 709

     अथa·tha चca पनस्सpa·nas·sa निमित्तानुसारिni·mit·tā·nu·sā·ri विञ्ञाणंviñ·ñā·ṇaṃ भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti नेतंne·taṃ ठानंṭhā·naṃ विज्जति।vij·ja·ti

     atha ca panassa nimittānusāri viññāṇaṁ bhavissati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.

     (Pāli only)

710. 710

     निस्सरणंnis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ हेतं,he·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सब्बनिमित्तानं,sab·ba·ni·mit·tā·naṃ यदिदंya·di·daṃ अनिमित्ताa·ni·mit·tā चेतोविमुत्ती’ति।ce·to·vi·mut·tī

     Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, sabbanimittānaṁ, yadidaṁ animittā cetovimuttī’ti.

     For it is the signless release of the heart that is the escape from all signs.’

711. 711

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य:va·dey·ya

     Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya:

     Take another mendicant who says:

712. 712

     ‘अस्मीतिas·mī·ti खोkho मेme विगतं,vi·ga·taṃ अयमहमस्मीतिa·ya·ma·ha·mas·mī·ti नna समनुपस्सामि,sa·ma·nu·pas·sā·mi

     ‘asmīti kho me vigataṁ, ayamahamasmīti na samanupassāmi,

     ‘I’m rid of the conceit “I am”. And I don’t regard anything as “I am this”.

713. 713

     अथa·tha चca पनpa·na मेme विचिकिच्छाकथङ्कथासल्लंvi·ci·kic·chā·ka·thaṅ·ka·thā·sal·laṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya तिट्ठती’ति।tiṭ·ṭha·tī

     atha ca pana me vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallaṁ cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti.

     Yet somehow the dart of doubt and indecision still occupies my mind.’

714. 714

     सोso ‘माmā हेवन्’तिस्सhe·van वचनीयोva·ca·nī·yo ‘मायस्माmā·yas·mā एवंe·vaṃ अवच,a·va·ca माmā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अब्भाचिक्खि,ab·bhā·cik·khi नna हिhi साधुsā·dhu भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अब्भक्खानं,ab·bhak·khā·naṃ नna हिhi भगवाbha·ga·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य।va·dey·ya

     So ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya.

     They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! Don’t say that. Don’t misrepresent the Buddha, for misrepresentation of the Buddha is not good. And the Buddha would not say that.

715. 715

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ अस्मीतिas·mī·ti विगतेvi·ga·te अयमहमस्मीतिa·ya·ma·ha·mas·mī·ti असमनुपस्सतो,a·sa·ma·nu·pas·sa·to

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ asmīti vigate ayamahamasmīti asamanupassato,

     It’s impossible, reverend, it cannot happen that the conceit “I am” has been done away with, and nothing is regarded as “I am this”,

716. 716

     अथa·tha चca पनस्सpa·nas·sa विचिकिच्छाकथङ्कथासल्लंvi·ci·kic·chā·ka·thaṅ·ka·thā·sal·laṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ परियादायpa·ri·yā·dā·ya ठस्सति,ṭhas·sa·ti नेतंne·taṃ ठानंṭhā·naṃ विज्जति।vij·ja·ti

     atha ca panassa vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallaṁ cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.

     yet somehow the dart of doubt and indecision still occupy the mind.

717. 717

     निस्सरणंnis·sa·ra·ṇaṃ हेतं,he·taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so विचिकिच्छाकथङ्कथासल्लस्स,vi·ci·kic·chā·ka·thaṅ·ka·thā·sal·las·sa यदिदंya·di·daṃ अस्मिमानसमुग्घातो’ति।as·mi·mā·na·sa·mug·ghā·to

     Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallassa, yadidaṁ asmimānasamugghāto’ti.

     For it is the uprooting of the conceit “I am” that is the escape from the dart of doubt and indecision.’

718. 718

     छcha अनुत्तरियानि—a·nut·ta·ri·yā·ni

     Cha anuttariyāni—

     <b>Six unsurpassable things:</b>

719. 719

     दस्सनानुत्तरियं,das·sa·nā·nut·ta·ri·yaṃ सवनानुत्तरियं,sa·va·nā·nut·ta·ri·yaṃ लाभानुत्तरियं,lā·bhā·nut·ta·ri·yaṃ सिक्खानुत्तरियं,sik·khā·nut·ta·ri·yaṃ पारिचरियानुत्तरियं,pā·ri·ca·ri·yā·nut·ta·ri·yaṃ अनुस्सतानुत्तरियं।a·nus·sa·tā·nut·ta·ri·yaṃ

     dassanānuttariyaṁ, savanānuttariyaṁ, lābhānuttariyaṁ, sikkhānuttariyaṁ, pāricariyānuttariyaṁ, anussatānuttariyaṁ.

     the unsurpassable seeing, listening, acquisition, training, service, and recollection.

720. 720

     छcha अनुस्सतिट्ठानानि—a·nus·sa·tiṭ·ṭhā·nā·ni

     Cha anussatiṭṭhānāni—

     <b>Six topics for recollection:</b>

721. 721

     बुद्धानुस्सति,bud·dhā·nus·sa·ti धम्मानुस्सति,dham·mā·nus·sa·ti सङ्घानुस्सति,saṅ·ghā·nus·sa·ti सीलानुस्सति,sī·lā·nus·sa·ti चागानुस्सति,cā·gā·nus·sa·ti देवतानुस्सति।de·va·tā·nus·sa·ti

     buddhānussati, dhammānussati, saṅghānussati, sīlānussati, cāgānussati, devatānussati.

     the recollection of the Buddha, the teaching, the Saṅgha, ethics, generosity, and the deities.

722. 722

     छcha सततविहारा।sa·ta·ta·vi·hā·rā

     Cha satatavihārā.

     <b>Six consistent responses:</b>

723. 723

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā रूपंrū·paṃ दिस्वाdis·vā नेवne·va सुमनोsu·ma·no होतिho·ti नna दुम्मनो,dum·ma·no उपेक्खकोu·pek·kha·ko विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सतोsa·to सम्पजानो।sam·pa·jā·no

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno.

     A mendicant, seeing a sight with their eyes, is neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware.

724. 724

     सोतेनso·te·na सद्दंsad·daṃ सुत्वाsut·vā …पे…pe

     Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe…

     Hearing a sound with their ears … Smelling an odor with their nose … Tasting a flavor with their tongue … Encountering a touch with their body …

725. 725

     मनसाma·na·sā धम्मंdham·maṃ विञ्ञायviñ·ñā·ya नेवne·va सुमनोsu·ma·no होतिho·ti नna दुम्मनो,dum·ma·no उपेक्खकोu·pek·kha·ko विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सतोsa·to सम्पजानो।sam·pa·jā·no

     manasā dhammaṁ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno.

     Knowing an idea with their mind, they’re neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware.

726. 726

     छळाभिजातियो।cha·ḷā·bhi·jā·ti·yo

     Chaḷābhijātiyo.

     <b>Six classes of rebirth:</b>

727. 727

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co कण्हाभिजातिकोkaṇ·hā·bhi·jā·ti·ko समानोsa·mā·no कण्हंkaṇ·haṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ अभिजायति।a·bhi·jā·ya·ti

     Idhāvuso, ekacco kaṇhābhijātiko samāno kaṇhaṁ dhammaṁ abhijāyati.

     Someone born into a dark class gives rise to a dark result.

728. 728

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co कण्हाभिजातिकोkaṇ·hā·bhi·jā·ti·ko समानोsa·mā·no सुक्कंsuk·kaṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ अभिजायति।a·bhi·jā·ya·ti

     Idha panāvuso, ekacco kaṇhābhijātiko samāno sukkaṁ dhammaṁ abhijāyati.

     Someone born into a dark class gives rise to a bright result.

729. 729

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co कण्हाभिजातिकोkaṇ·hā·bhi·jā·ti·ko समानोsa·mā·no अकण्हंa·kaṇ·haṃ असुक्कंa·suk·kaṃ निब्बानंnib·bā·naṃ अभिजायति।a·bhi·jā·ya·ti

     Idha panāvuso, ekacco kaṇhābhijātiko samāno akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ nibbānaṁ abhijāyati.

     Someone born into a dark class gives rise to extinguishment, which is neither dark nor bright.

730. 730

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co सुक्काभिजातिकोsuk·kā·bhi·jā·ti·ko समानोsa·mā·no सुक्कंsuk·kaṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ अभिजायति।a·bhi·jā·ya·ti

     Idha panāvuso, ekacco sukkābhijātiko samāno sukkaṁ dhammaṁ abhijāyati.

     Someone born into a bright class gives rise to a bright result.

731. 731

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co सुक्काभिजातिकोsuk·kā·bhi·jā·ti·ko समानोsa·mā·no कण्हंkaṇ·haṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ अभिजायति।a·bhi·jā·ya·ti

     Idha panāvuso, ekacco sukkābhijātiko samāno kaṇhaṁ dhammaṁ abhijāyati.

     Someone born into a bright class gives rise to a dark result.

732. 732

     इधi·dha पनावुसो,pa·nā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co सुक्काभिजातिकोsuk·kā·bhi·jā·ti·ko समानोsa·mā·no अकण्हंa·kaṇ·haṃ असुक्कंa·suk·kaṃ निब्बानंnib·bā·naṃ अभिजायति।a·bhi·jā·ya·ti

     Idha panāvuso, ekacco sukkābhijātiko samāno akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ nibbānaṁ abhijāyati.

     Someone born into a bright class gives rise to extinguishment, which is neither dark nor bright.

733. 733

     छcha निब्बेधभागियाnib·be·dha·bhā·gi·yā सञ्ञा—sañ·ñā

     Cha nibbedhabhāgiyā saññā—

     <b>Six perceptions that help penetration:</b>

734. 734

     अनिच्चसञ्ञा,a·nic·ca·sañ·ñā अनिच्चेa·nic·ce दुक्खसञ्ञा,duk·kha·sañ·ñā दुक्खेduk·khe अनत्तसञ्ञा,a·nat·ta·sañ·ñā पहानसञ्ञा,pa·hā·na·sañ·ñā विरागसञ्ञा,vi·rā·ga·sañ·ñā निरोधसञ्ञा।ni·ro·dha·sañ·ñā

     aniccasaññā, anicce dukkhasaññā, dukkhe anattasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññā, nirodhasaññā.

     the perception of impermanence, the perception of suffering in impermanence, the perception of not-self in suffering, the perception of giving up, the perception of fading away, and the perception of cessation.

735. 735

     इमेi·me खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na छcha धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता;sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cha dhammā sammadakkhātā;

     These are the teachings grouped by six that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

736. 736

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

737. 737

     7। सत्तकsat·ta·ka

     7. Sattaka

     7. Sevens

738. 738

     अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na सत्तsat·ta धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता;sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena satta dhammā sammadakkhātā;

     There are teachings grouped by seven that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

739. 739

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

740. 740

     कतमेka·ta·me सत्त?sat·ta

     Katame satta?

     What are the teachings grouped by seven?

741. 741

     सत्तsat·ta अरियधनानि—a·ri·ya·dha·nā·ni

     Satta ariyadhanāni—

     <b>Seven riches of the noble ones:</b>

742. 742

     सद्धाधनं,sad·dhā·dha·naṃ सीलधनं,sī·la·dha·naṃ हिरिधनं,hi·ri·dha·naṃ ओत्तप्पधनं,ot·tap·pa·dha·naṃ सुतधनं,su·ta·dha·naṃ चागधनं,cā·ga·dha·naṃ पञ्ञाधनं।pañ·ñā·dha·naṃ

     saddhādhanaṁ, sīladhanaṁ, hiridhanaṁ, ottappadhanaṁ, sutadhanaṁ, cāgadhanaṁ, paññādhanaṁ.

     the riches of faith, ethics, conscience, prudence, learning, generosity, and wisdom.

743. 743

     सत्तsat·ta बोज्झङ्गा—boj·jhaṅ·gā

     Satta bojjhaṅgā—

     <b>Seven awakening factors:</b>

744. 744

     सतिसम्बोज्झङ्गो,sa·ti·sam·boj·jhaṅ·go धम्मविचयसम्बोज्झङ्गो,dham·ma·vi·ca·ya·sam·boj·jhaṅ·go वीरियसम्बोज्झङ्गो,vī·ri·ya·sam·boj·jhaṅ·go पीतिसम्बोज्झङ्गो,pī·ti·sam·boj·jhaṅ·go पस्सद्धिसम्बोज्झङ्गो,pas·sad·dhi·sam·boj·jhaṅ·go समाधिसम्बोज्झङ्गो,sa·mā·dhi·sam·boj·jhaṅ·go उपेक्खासम्बोज्झङ्गो।u·pek·khā·sam·boj·jhaṅ·go

     satisambojjhaṅgo, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo, vīriyasambojjhaṅgo, pītisambojjhaṅgo, passaddhisambojjhaṅgo, samādhisambojjhaṅgo, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo.

     mindfulness, investigation of principles, energy, rapture, tranquility, immersion, and equanimity.

745. 745

     सत्तsat·ta समाधिपरिक्खारा—sa·mā·dhi·pa·rik·khā·rā

     Satta samādhiparikkhārā—

     <b>Seven prerequisites for immersion:</b>

746. 746

     सम्मादिट्ठि,sam·mā·diṭ·ṭhi सम्मासङ्कप्पो,sam·mā·saṅ·kap·po सम्मावाचा,sam·mā·vā·cā सम्माकम्मन्तो,sam·mā·kam·man·to सम्माआजीवो,sam·mā·ā·jī·vo सम्मावायामो,sam·mā·vā·yā·mo सम्मासति।sam·mā·sa·ti

     sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati.

     right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, and right mindfulness.

747. 747

     सत्तsat·ta असद्धम्मा—a·sad·dham·mā

     Satta asaddhammā—

     <b>Seven bad qualities:</b>

748. 748

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अस्सद्धोas·sad·dho होति,ho·ti अहिरिकोa·hi·ri·ko होति,ho·ti अनोत्तप्पीa·not·tap·pī होति,ho·ti अप्पस्सुतोap·pas·su·to होति,ho·ti कुसीतोku·sī·to होति,ho·ti मुट्ठस्सतिmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·ti होति,ho·ti दुप्पञ्ञोdup·pañ·ño होति।ho·ti

     idhāvuso, bhikkhu assaddho hoti, ahiriko hoti, anottappī hoti, appassuto hoti, kusīto hoti, muṭṭhassati hoti, duppañño hoti.

     a mendicant is faithless, shameless, imprudent, unlearned, lazy, unmindful, and witless.

749. 749

     सत्तsat·ta सद्धम्मा—sad·dham·mā

     Satta saddhammā—

     <b>Seven good qualities:</b>

750. 750

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सद्धोsad·dho होति,ho·ti हिरिमाhi·ri·mā होति,ho·ti ओत्तप्पीot·tap·pī होति,ho·ti बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to होति,ho·ti आरद्धवीरियोā·rad·dha·vī·ri·yo होति,ho·ti उपट्ठितस्सतिu·paṭ·ṭhi·tas·sa·ti होति,ho·ti पञ्ञवाpañ·ña·vā होति।ho·ti

     idhāvuso, bhikkhu saddho hoti, hirimā hoti, ottappī hoti, bahussuto hoti, āraddhavīriyo hoti, upaṭṭhitassati hoti, paññavā hoti.

     a mendicant is faithful, conscientious, prudent, learned, energetic, mindful, and wise.

751. 751

     सत्तsat·ta सप्पुरिसधम्मा—sap·pu·ri·sa·dham·mā

     Satta sappurisadhammā—

     <b>Seven aspects of the teachings of the true persons:</b>

752. 752

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मञ्ञूdham·mañ·ñū चca होतिho·ti अत्थञ्ञूat·thañ·ñū चca अत्तञ्ञूat·tañ·ñū चca मत्तञ्ञूmat·tañ·ñū चca कालञ्ञूkā·lañ·ñū चca परिसञ्ञूpa·ri·sañ·ñū चca पुग्गलञ्ञूpug·ga·lañ·ñū च।ca

     idhāvuso, bhikkhu dhammaññū ca hoti atthaññū ca attaññū ca mattaññū ca kālaññū ca parisaññū ca puggalaññū ca.

     a mendicant knows the teachings, knows the meaning, knows themselves, knows moderation, knows the right time, knows assemblies, and knows individuals.

753. 753

     सत्तsat·ta निद्दसवत्थूनि।nid·da·sa·vat·thū·ni

     Satta niddasavatthūni.

     <b>Seven qualifications for graduation:</b>

754. 754

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सिक्खासमादानेsik·khā·sa·mā·dā·ne तिब्बच्छन्दोtib·bac·chan·do होति,ho·ti आयतिञ्चā·ya·tiñ·ca सिक्खासमादानेsik·khā·sa·mā·dā·ne अविगतपेमो।a·vi·ga·ta·pe·mo

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemo.

     A mendicant has a keen enthusiasm to undertake the training …

755. 755

     धम्मनिसन्तियाdham·ma·ni·san·ti·yā तिब्बच्छन्दोtib·bac·chan·do होति,ho·ti आयतिञ्चā·ya·tiñ·ca धम्मनिसन्तियाdham·ma·ni·san·ti·yā अविगतपेमो।a·vi·ga·ta·pe·mo

     Dhammanisantiyā tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca dhammanisantiyā avigatapemo.

     to examine the teachings …

756. 756

     इच्छाविनयेic·chā·vi·na·ye तिब्बच्छन्दोtib·bac·chan·do होति,ho·ti आयतिञ्चā·ya·tiñ·ca इच्छाविनयेic·chā·vi·na·ye अविगतपेमो।a·vi·ga·ta·pe·mo

     Icchāvinaye tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca icchāvinaye avigatapemo.

     to get rid of desires …

757. 757

     पटिसल्लानेpa·ṭi·sal·lā·ne तिब्बच्छन्दोtib·bac·chan·do होति,ho·ti आयतिञ्चā·ya·tiñ·ca पटिसल्लानेpa·ṭi·sal·lā·ne अविगतपेमो।a·vi·ga·ta·pe·mo

     Paṭisallāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca paṭisallāne avigatapemo.

     for retreat …

758. 758

     वीरियारम्भेvī·ri·yā·ram·bhe तिब्बच्छन्दोtib·bac·chan·do होति,ho·ti आयतिञ्चā·ya·tiñ·ca वीरियारम्भेvī·ri·yā·ram·bhe अविगतपेमो।a·vi·ga·ta·pe·mo

     Vīriyārambhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca vīriyārambhe avigatapemo.

     to rouse up energy …

759. 759

     सतिनेपक्केsa·ti·ne·pak·ke तिब्बच्छन्दोtib·bac·chan·do होति,ho·ti आयतिञ्चā·ya·tiñ·ca सतिनेपक्केsa·ti·ne·pak·ke अविगतपेमो।a·vi·ga·ta·pe·mo

     Satinepakke tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca satinepakke avigatapemo.

     for mindfulness and alertness …

760. 760

     दिट्ठिपटिवेधेdiṭ·ṭhi·pa·ṭi·ve·dhe तिब्बच्छन्दोtib·bac·chan·do होति,ho·ti आयतिञ्चā·ya·tiñ·ca दिट्ठिपटिवेधेdiṭ·ṭhi·pa·ṭi·ve·dhe अविगतपेमो।a·vi·ga·ta·pe·mo

     Diṭṭhipaṭivedhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca diṭṭhipaṭivedhe avigatapemo.

     to penetrate theoretically. And they don’t lose these desires in the future.

761. 761

     सत्तsat·ta सञ्ञा—sañ·ñā

     Satta saññā—

     <b>Seven perceptions:</b>

762. 762

     अनिच्चसञ्ञा,a·nic·ca·sañ·ñā अनत्तसञ्ञा,a·nat·ta·sañ·ñā असुभसञ्ञा,a·su·bha·sañ·ñā आदीनवसञ्ञा,ā·dī·na·va·sañ·ñā पहानसञ्ञा,pa·hā·na·sañ·ñā विरागसञ्ञा,vi·rā·ga·sañ·ñā निरोधसञ्ञा।ni·ro·dha·sañ·ñā

     aniccasaññā, anattasaññā, asubhasaññā, ādīnavasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññā, nirodhasaññā.

     the perception of impermanence, the perception of not-self, the perception of ugliness, the perception of drawbacks, the perception of giving up, the perception of fading away, and the perception of cessation.

763. 763

     सत्तsat·ta बलानि—ba·lā·ni

     Satta balāni—

     <b>Seven powers:</b>

764. 764

     सद्धाबलं,sad·dhā·ba·laṃ वीरियबलं,vī·ri·ya·ba·laṃ हिरिबलं,hi·ri·ba·laṃ ओत्तप्पबलं,ot·tap·pa·ba·laṃ सतिबलं,sa·ti·ba·laṃ समाधिबलं,sa·mā·dhi·ba·laṃ पञ्ञाबलं।pañ·ñā·ba·laṃ

     saddhābalaṁ, vīriyabalaṁ, hiribalaṁ, ottappabalaṁ, satibalaṁ, samādhibalaṁ, paññābalaṁ.

     faith, energy, conscience, prudence, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom.

765. 765

     सत्तsat·ta विञ्ञाणट्ठितियो।viñ·ñā·ṇaṭ·ṭhi·ti·yo

     Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo.

     <b>Seven planes of consciousness:</b>

766. 766

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā नानत्तकायाnā·nat·ta·kā·yā नानत्तसञ्ञिनो,nā·nat·ta·sañ·ñi·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi मनुस्साma·nus·sā एकच्चेe·kac·ce चca देवाde·vā एकच्चेe·kac·ce चca विनिपातिका।vi·ni·pā·ti·kā

     Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā.

     There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and diverse in perception, such as human beings, some gods, and some beings in the underworld.

767. 767

     अयंa·yaṃ पठमाpa·ṭha·mā विञ्ञाणट्ठिति।viñ·ñā·ṇaṭ·ṭhi·ti

     Ayaṁ paṭhamā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.

     This is the first plane of consciousness.

768. 768

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā नानत्तकायाnā·nat·ta·kā·yā एकत्तसञ्ञिनोe·kat·ta·sañ·ñi·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā ब्रह्मकायिकाbrah·ma·kā·yi·kā पठमाभिनिब्बत्ता।pa·ṭha·mā·bhi·nib·bat·tā

     Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā.

     There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and unified in perception, such as the gods reborn in the Divinity’s host through the first absorption.

769. 769

     अयंa·yaṃ दुतियाdu·ti·yā विञ्ञाणट्ठिति।viñ·ñā·ṇaṭ·ṭhi·ti

     Ayaṁ dutiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.

     This is the second plane of consciousness.

770. 770

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā एकत्तकायाe·kat·ta·kā·yā नानत्तसञ्ञिनोnā·nat·ta·sañ·ñi·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā आभस्सरा।ā·bhas·sa·rā

     Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā.

     There are sentient beings that are unified in body and diverse in perception, such as the gods of sublime luminosity.

771. 771

     अयंa·yaṃ ततियाta·ti·yā विञ्ञाणट्ठिति।viñ·ñā·ṇaṭ·ṭhi·ti

     Ayaṁ tatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.

     This is the third plane of consciousness.

772. 772

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā एकत्तकायाe·kat·ta·kā·yā एकत्तसञ्ञिनोe·kat·ta·sañ·ñi·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā सुभकिण्हा।su·bha·kiṇ·hā

     Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā.

     There are sentient beings that are unified in body and unified in perception, such as the gods of universal beauty.

773. 773

     अयंa·yaṃ चतुत्थीca·tut·thī विञ्ञाणट्ठिति।viñ·ñā·ṇaṭ·ṭhi·ti

     Ayaṁ catutthī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.

     This is the fourth plane of consciousness.

774. 774

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā सब्बसोsab·ba·so रूपसञ्ञानंrū·pa·sañ·ñā·naṃ समतिक्कमाsa·ma·tik·ka·mā पटिघसञ्ञानंpa·ṭi·gha·sañ·ñā·naṃ अत्थङ्गमाat·thaṅ·ga·mā नानत्तसञ्ञानंnā·nat·ta·sañ·ñā·naṃ अमनसिकाराa·ma·na·si·kā·rā ‘अनन्तोa·nan·to आकासो’तिā·kā·so आकासानञ्चायतनूपगा।ā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·nū·pa·gā

     Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā.

     There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond perceptions of form. With the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite space.

775. 775

     अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमीpañ·ca·mī विञ्ञाणट्ठिति।viñ·ñā·ṇaṭ·ṭhi·ti

     Ayaṁ pañcamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.

     This is the fifth plane of consciousness.

776. 776

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā सब्बसोsab·ba·so आकासानञ्चायतनंā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘अनन्तंa·nan·taṃ विञ्ञाणन्’तिviñ·ñā·ṇan विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनूपगा।viñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·nū·pa·gā

     Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā.

     There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite space. Aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite consciousness.

777. 777

     अयंa·yaṃ छट्ठीchaṭ·ṭhī विञ्ञाणट्ठिति।viñ·ñā·ṇaṭ·ṭhi·ti

     Ayaṁ chaṭṭhī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.

     This is the sixth plane of consciousness.

778. 778

     सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā सब्बसोsab·ba·so विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनंviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘नत्थिnat·thi किञ्ची’तिkiñ·cī आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनूपगा।ā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·nū·pa·gā

     Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā.

     There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness. Aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they have been reborn in the dimension of nothingness.

779. 779

     अयंa·yaṃ सत्तमीsat·ta·mī विञ्ञाणट्ठिति।viñ·ñā·ṇaṭ·ṭhi·ti

     Ayaṁ sattamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.

     This is the seventh plane of consciousness.

780. 780

     सत्तsat·ta पुग्गलाpug·ga·lā दक्खिणेय्या—dak·khi·ṇey·yā

     Satta puggalā dakkhiṇeyyā—

     <b>Seven individuals worthy of a religious donation:</b>

781. 781

     उभतोभागविमुत्तो,u·bha·to·bhā·ga·vi·mut·to पञ्ञाविमुत्तो,pañ·ñā·vi·mut·to कायसक्खि,kā·ya·sak·khi दिट्ठिप्पत्तो,diṭ·ṭhip·pat·to सद्धाविमुत्तो,sad·dhā·vi·mut·to धम्मानुसारी,dham·mā·nu·sā·rī सद्धानुसारी।sad·dhā·nu·sā·rī

     ubhatobhāgavimutto, paññāvimutto, kāyasakkhi, diṭṭhippatto, saddhāvimutto, dhammānusārī, saddhānusārī.

     one freed both ways, one freed by wisdom, a direct witness, one attained to view, one freed by faith, a follower of teachings, and a follower by faith.

782. 782

     सत्तsat·ta अनुसया—a·nu·sa·yā

     Satta anusayā—

     <b>Seven underlying tendencies:</b>

783. 783

     कामरागानुसयो,kā·ma·rā·gā·nu·sa·yo पटिघानुसयो,pa·ṭi·ghā·nu·sa·yo दिट्ठानुसयो,diṭ·ṭhā·nu·sa·yo विचिकिच्छानुसयो,vi·ci·kic·chā·nu·sa·yo मानानुसयो,mā·nā·nu·sa·yo भवरागानुसयो,bha·va·rā·gā·nu·sa·yo अविज्जानुसयो।a·vij·jā·nu·sa·yo

     kāmarāgānusayo, paṭighānusayo, diṭṭhānusayo, vicikicchānusayo, mānānusayo, bhavarāgānusayo, avijjānusayo.

     sensual desire, aversion, views, doubt, conceit, desire for continued existence, and ignorance.

784. 784

     सत्तsat·ta संयोजनानि—saṃ·yo·ja·nā·ni

     Satta saṁyojanāni—

     <b>Seven fetters:</b>

785. 785

     अनुनयसंयोजनं,a·nu·na·ya·saṃ·yo·ja·naṃ पटिघसंयोजनं,pa·ṭi·gha·saṃ·yo·ja·naṃ दिट्ठिसंयोजनं,diṭ·ṭhi·saṃ·yo·ja·naṃ विचिकिच्छासंयोजनं,vi·ci·kic·chā·saṃ·yo·ja·naṃ मानसंयोजनं,mā·na·saṃ·yo·ja·naṃ भवरागसंयोजनं,bha·va·rā·ga·saṃ·yo·ja·naṃ अविज्जासंयोजनं।a·vij·jā·saṃ·yo·ja·naṃ

     anunayasaṁyojanaṁ, paṭighasaṁyojanaṁ, diṭṭhisaṁyojanaṁ, vicikicchāsaṁyojanaṁ, mānasaṁyojanaṁ, bhavarāgasaṁyojanaṁ, avijjāsaṁyojanaṁ.

     attraction, aversion, views, doubt, conceit, desire for continued existence, and ignorance.

786. 786

     सत्तsat·ta अधिकरणसमथाa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·sa·ma·thā उप्पन्नुप्पन्नानंup·pan·nup·pan·nā·naṃ अधिकरणानंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇā·naṃ समथायsa·ma·thā·ya वूपसमाय—vū·pa·sa·mā·ya

     Satta adhikaraṇasamathā uppannuppannānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ samathāya vūpasamāya—

     <b>Seven means of settling any disciplinary issues that might arise:</b>

787. 787

     सम्मुखाविनयोsam·mu·khā·vi·na·yo दातब्बो,dā·tab·bo सतिविनयोsa·ti·vi·na·yo दातब्बो,dā·tab·bo अमूळ्हविनयोa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yo दातब्बो,dā·tab·bo पटिञ्ञायpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ya कारेतब्बं,kā·re·tab·baṃ येभुय्यसिका,ye·bhuy·ya·si·kā तस्सपापियसिका,tas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā तिणवत्थारको।ti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ko

     sammukhāvinayo dātabbo, sativinayo dātabbo, amūḷhavinayo dātabbo, paṭiññāya kāretabbaṁ, yebhuyyasikā, tassapāpiyasikā, tiṇavatthārako.

     Resolution face-to-face to be applied. Resolution through recollection to be granted. Resolution because of past insanity to be granted. Acting according to what has been admitted. Majority decision. Further penalty. Covering over as if with grass.

788. 788

     इमेi·me खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na सत्तsat·ta धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता;sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena satta dhammā sammadakkhātā;

     These are the teachings grouped by seven that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

789. 789

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

790. 790

     दुतियभाणवारोdu·ti·ya·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Dutiyabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

     The second recitation section is complete.

791. 791

     8। अट्ठकaṭ·ṭha·ka

     8. Aṭṭhaka

     8. Eights

792. 792

     अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na अट्ठaṭ·ṭha धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता;sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena aṭṭha dhammā sammadakkhātā;

     There are teachings grouped by eight that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

793. 793

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

794. 794

     कतमेka·ta·me अट्ठ?aṭ·ṭha

     Katame aṭṭha?

     What are the teachings grouped by eight?

795. 795

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha मिच्छत्ता—mic·chat·tā

     Aṭṭha micchattā—

     <b>Eight wrong ways:</b>

796. 796

     मिच्छादिट्ठि,mic·chā·diṭ·ṭhi मिच्छासङ्कप्पो,mic·chā·saṅ·kap·po मिच्छावाचा,mic·chā·vā·cā मिच्छाकम्मन्तो,mic·chā·kam·man·to मिच्छाआजीवो,mic·chā·ā·jī·vo मिच्छावायामोmic·chā·vā·yā·mo मिच्छासति,mic·chā·sa·ti मिच्छासमाधि।mic·chā·sa·mā·dhi

     micchādiṭṭhi, micchāsaṅkappo, micchāvācā, micchākammanto, micchāājīvo, micchāvāyāmo micchāsati, micchāsamādhi.

     wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion.

797. 797

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha सम्मत्ता—sam·mat·tā

     Aṭṭha sammattā—

     <b>Eight right ways:</b>

798. 798

     सम्मादिट्ठि,sam·mā·diṭ·ṭhi सम्मासङ्कप्पो,sam·mā·saṅ·kap·po सम्मावाचा,sam·mā·vā·cā सम्माकम्मन्तो,sam·mā·kam·man·to सम्माआजीवो,sam·mā·ā·jī·vo सम्मावायामो,sam·mā·vā·yā·mo सम्मासति,sam·mā·sa·ti सम्मासमाधि।sam·mā·sa·mā·dhi

     sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati, sammāsamādhi.

     right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.

799. 799

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha पुग्गलाpug·ga·lā दक्खिणेय्या—dak·khi·ṇey·yā

     Aṭṭha puggalā dakkhiṇeyyā—

     <b>Eight individuals worthy of a religious donation:</b>

800. 800

     सोतापन्नो,so·tā·pan·no सोतापत्तिफलसच्छिकिरियायso·tā·pat·ti·pha·la·sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·ya पटिपन्नो;pa·ṭi·pan·no सकदागामी,sa·ka·dā·gā·mī सकदागामिफलसच्छिकिरियायsa·ka·dā·gā·mi·pha·la·sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·ya पटिपन्नो;pa·ṭi·pan·no अनागामी,a·nā·gā·mī अनागामिफलसच्छिकिरियायa·nā·gā·mi·pha·la·sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·ya पटिपन्नो;pa·ṭi·pan·no अरहा,a·ra·hā अरहत्तफलसच्छिकिरियायa·ra·hat·ta·pha·la·sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·ya पटिपन्नो।pa·ṭi·pan·no

     sotāpanno, sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno; sakadāgāmī, sakadāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno; anāgāmī, anāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno; arahā, arahattaphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno.

     The stream-enterer and the one practicing to realize the fruit of stream-entry. The once-returner and the one practicing to realize the fruit of once-return. The non-returner and the one practicing to realize the fruit of non-return. The perfected one, and the one practicing for perfection.

801. 801

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha कुसीतवत्थूनि।ku·sī·ta·vat·thū·ni

     Aṭṭha kusītavatthūni.

     <b>Eight grounds for laziness:</b>

802. 802

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā कम्मंkam·maṃ कातब्बंkā·tab·baṃ होति।ho·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kātabbaṁ hoti.

     Firstly, a mendicant has some work to do.

803. 803

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

804. 804

     ‘कम्मंkam·maṃ खोkho मेme कातब्बंkā·tab·baṃ भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti कम्मंkam·maṃ खोkho पनpa·na मेme करोन्तस्सka·ron·tas·sa कायोkā·yo किलमिस्सति,ki·la·mis·sa·ti हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ निपज्जामी’ति।ni·paj·jā·mī

     ‘kammaṁ kho me kātabbaṁ bhavissati, kammaṁ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti.

     ‘I have some work to do. But while doing it my body will get tired. I’d better have a lie down.’

805. 805

     सोso निपज्जतिni·paj·ja·ti नna वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti अप्पत्तस्सap·pat·tas·sa पत्तियाpat·ti·yā अनधिगतस्सa·na·dhi·ga·tas·sa अधिगमायa·dhi·ga·mā·ya असच्छिकतस्सa·sac·chi·ka·tas·sa सच्छिकिरियाय।sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·ya

     So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya.

     They lie down, and don’t rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.

806. 806

     इदंi·daṃ पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ कुसीतवत्थु।ku·sī·ta·vat·thu

     Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ kusītavatthu.

     This is the first ground for laziness.

807. 807

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā कम्मंkam·maṃ कतंka·taṃ होति।ho·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kataṁ hoti.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has done some work.

808. 808

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

809. 809

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho कम्मंkam·maṃ अकासिं,a·kā·siṃ कम्मंkam·maṃ खोkho पनpa·na मेme करोन्तस्सka·ron·tas·sa कायोkā·yo किलन्तो,ki·lan·to हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ निपज्जामी’ति।ni·paj·jā·mī

     ‘ahaṁ kho kammaṁ akāsiṁ, kammaṁ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti.

     ‘I’ve done some work. But while working my body got tired. I’d better have a lie down.’

810. 810

     सोso निपज्जतिni·paj·ja·ti नna वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …पे…pe

     So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …pe…

     They lie down, and don’t rouse energy …

811. 811

     इदंi·daṃ दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ कुसीतवत्थु।ku·sī·ta·vat·thu

     idaṁ dutiyaṁ kusītavatthu.

     This is the second ground for laziness.

812. 812

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā मग्गोmag·go गन्तब्बोgan·tab·bo होति।ho·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gantabbo hoti.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has to go on a journey.

813. 813

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

814. 814

     ‘मग्गोmag·go खोkho मेme गन्तब्बोgan·tab·bo भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti मग्गंmag·gaṃ खोkho पनpa·na मेme गच्छन्तस्सgac·chan·tas·sa कायोkā·yo किलमिस्सति,ki·la·mis·sa·ti हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ निपज्जामी’ति।ni·paj·jā·mī

     ‘maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṁ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti.

     ‘I have to go on a journey. But while walking my body will get tired. I’d better have a lie down.’

815. 815

     सोso निपज्जतिni·paj·ja·ti नna वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They lie down, and don’t rouse energy …

816. 816

     इदंi·daṃ ततियंta·ti·yaṃ कुसीतवत्थु।ku·sī·ta·vat·thu

     idaṁ tatiyaṁ kusītavatthu.

     This is the third ground for laziness.

817. 817

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā मग्गोmag·go गतोga·to होति।ho·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gato hoti.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has gone on a journey.

818. 818

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

819. 819

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho मग्गंmag·gaṃ अगमासिं,a·ga·mā·siṃ मग्गंmag·gaṃ खोkho पनpa·na मेme गच्छन्तस्सgac·chan·tas·sa कायोkā·yo किलन्तो,ki·lan·to हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ निपज्जामी’ति।ni·paj·jā·mī

     ‘ahaṁ kho maggaṁ agamāsiṁ, maggaṁ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti.

     ‘I’ve gone on a journey. But while walking my body got tired. I’d better have a lie down.’

820. 820

     सोso निपज्जतिni·paj·ja·ti नna वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They lie down, and don’t rouse energy …

821. 821

     इदंi·daṃ चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ कुसीतवत्थु।ku·sī·ta·vat·thu

     idaṁ catutthaṁ kusītavatthu.

     This is the fourth ground for laziness.

822. 822

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu गामंgā·maṃ वाvā निगमंni·ga·maṃ वाvā पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तोca·ran·to नna लभतिla·bha·ti लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं।pā·ri·pū·riṃ

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto na labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, but they didn’t get to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine.

823. 823

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

824. 824

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho गामंgā·maṃ वाvā निगमंni·ga·maṃ वाvā पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तोca·ran·to नालत्थंnā·lat·thaṃ लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं,pā·ri·pū·riṃ तस्सtas·sa मेme कायोkā·yo किलन्तोki·lan·to अकम्मञ्ञो,a·kam·mañ·ño हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ निपज्जामी’ति।ni·paj·jā·mī

     ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo kilanto akammañño, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti.

     ‘I’ve wandered for alms, but I didn’t get to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is tired and unfit for work. I’d better have a lie down.’

825. 825

     सोso निपज्जतिni·paj·ja·ti नna वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They lie down, and don’t rouse energy …

826. 826

     इदंi·daṃ पञ्चमंpañ·ca·maṃ कुसीतवत्थु।ku·sī·ta·vat·thu

     idaṁ pañcamaṁ kusītavatthu.

     This is the fifth ground for laziness.

827. 827

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu गामंgā·maṃ वाvā निगमंni·ga·maṃ वाvā पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तोca·ran·to लभतिla·bha·ti लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं।pā·ri·pū·riṃ

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, and they got to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine.

828. 828

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

829. 829

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho गामंgā·maṃ वाvā निगमंni·ga·maṃ वाvā पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तोca·ran·to अलत्थंa·lat·thaṃ लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं,pā·ri·pū·riṃ तस्सtas·sa मेme कायोkā·yo गरुकोga·ru·ko अकम्मञ्ञो,a·kam·mañ·ño मासाचितंmā·sā·ci·taṃ मञ्ञे,mañ·ñe हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ निपज्जामी’ति।ni·paj·jā·mī

     ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo garuko akammañño, māsācitaṁ maññe, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti.

     ‘I’ve wandered for alms, and I got to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is heavy and unfit for work, like I’ve just eaten a load of beans. I’d better have a lie down.’

830. 830

     सोso निपज्जतिni·paj·ja·ti नna वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They lie down, and don’t rouse energy …

831. 831

     इदंi·daṃ छट्ठंchaṭ·ṭhaṃ कुसीतवत्थु।ku·sī·ta·vat·thu

     idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ kusītavatthu.

     This is the sixth ground for laziness.

832. 832

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no उप्पन्नोup·pan·no होतिho·ti अप्पमत्तकोap·pa·mat·ta·ko आबाधो।ā·bā·dho

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno uppanno hoti appamattako ābādho.

     Furthermore, a mendicant feels a little sick.

833. 833

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

834. 834

     ‘उप्पन्नोup·pan·no खोkho मेme अयंa·yaṃ अप्पमत्तकोap·pa·mat·ta·ko आबाधो;ā·bā·dho

     ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ appamattako ābādho;

     ‘I feel a little sick. Lying down would be good for me. I’d better have a lie down.’

835. 835

     अत्थिat·thi कप्पोkap·po निपज्जितुं,ni·paj·ji·tuṃ हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ निपज्जामी’ति।ni·paj·jā·mī

     atthi kappo nipajjituṁ, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

836. 836

     सोso निपज्जतिni·paj·ja·ti नna वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They lie down, and don’t rouse energy …

837. 837

     इदंi·daṃ सत्तमंsat·ta·maṃ कुसीतवत्थु।ku·sī·ta·vat·thu

     idaṁ sattamaṁ kusītavatthu.

     This is the seventh ground for laziness.

838. 838

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu गिलानाgi·lā·nā वुट्ठितोvuṭ·ṭhi·to होतिho·ti अचिरवुट्ठितोa·ci·ra·vuṭ·ṭhi·to गेलञ्ञा।ge·lañ·ñā

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gilānā vuṭṭhito hoti aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has recently recovered from illness.

839. 839

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

840. 840

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho गिलानाgi·lā·nā वुट्ठितोvuṭ·ṭhi·to अचिरवुट्ठितोa·ci·ra·vuṭ·ṭhi·to गेलञ्ञा,ge·lañ·ñā तस्सtas·sa मेme कायोkā·yo दुब्बलोdub·ba·lo अकम्मञ्ञो,a·kam·mañ·ño हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ निपज्जामी’ति।ni·paj·jā·mī

     ‘ahaṁ kho gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, tassa me kāyo dubbalo akammañño, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti.

     ‘I’ve recently recovered from illness. My body is weak and unfit for work. I’d better have a lie down.’

841. 841

     सोso निपज्जतिni·paj·ja·ti नna वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti अप्पत्तस्सap·pat·tas·sa पत्तियाpat·ti·yā अनधिगतस्सa·na·dhi·ga·tas·sa अधिगमायa·dhi·ga·mā·ya असच्छिकतस्सa·sac·chi·ka·tas·sa सच्छिकिरियाय।sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·ya

     So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya.

     They lie down, and don’t rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.

842. 842

     इदंi·daṃ अट्ठमंaṭ·ṭha·maṃ कुसीतवत्थु।ku·sī·ta·vat·thu

     Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ kusītavatthu.

     This is the eighth ground for laziness.

843. 843

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha आरम्भवत्थूनि।ā·ram·bha·vat·thū·ni

     Aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni.

     <b>Eight grounds for arousing energy:</b>

844. 844

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā कम्मंkam·maṃ कातब्बंkā·tab·baṃ होति।ho·ti

     Idhāvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kātabbaṁ hoti.

     Firstly, a mendicant has some work to do.

845. 845

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

846. 846

     ‘कम्मंkam·maṃ खोkho मेme कातब्बंkā·tab·baṃ भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti कम्मंkam·maṃ खोkho पनpa·na मेme करोन्तेनka·ron·te·na नna सुकरंsu·ka·raṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ सासनंsā·sa·naṃ मनसिma·na·si कातुं,kā·tuṃ हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभामिā·ra·bhā·mi अप्पत्तस्सap·pat·tas·sa पत्तियाpat·ti·yā अनधिगतस्सa·na·dhi·ga·tas·sa अधिगमाय,a·dhi·ga·mā·ya असच्छिकतस्सa·sac·chi·ka·tas·sa सच्छिकिरियाया’ति।sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·yā

     ‘kammaṁ kho me kātabbaṁ bhavissati, kammaṁ kho pana me karontena na sukaraṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasi kātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya, asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāyā’ti.

     ‘I have some work to do. While working it’s not easy to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.’

847. 847

     सोso वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti अप्पत्तस्सap·pat·tas·sa पत्तिया,pat·ti·yā अनधिगतस्सa·na·dhi·ga·tas·sa अधिगमायa·dhi·ga·mā·ya असच्छिकतस्सa·sac·chi·ka·tas·sa सच्छिकिरियाय।sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·ya

     So vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā, anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya.

     They rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.

848. 848

     इदंi·daṃ पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ आरम्भवत्थु।ā·ram·bha·vat·thu

     Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ ārambhavatthu.

     This is the first ground for arousing energy.

849. 849

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā कम्मंkam·maṃ कतंka·taṃ होति।ho·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kataṁ hoti.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has done some work.

850. 850

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

851. 851

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho कम्मंkam·maṃ अकासिं,a·kā·siṃ कम्मंkam·maṃ खोkho पनाहंpa·nā·haṃ करोन्तोka·ron·to नासक्खिंnā·sak·khiṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ सासनंsā·sa·naṃ मनसिma·na·si कातुं,kā·tuṃ हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभामिā·ra·bhā·mi …पे…pe

     ‘ahaṁ kho kammaṁ akāsiṁ, kammaṁ kho panāhaṁ karonto nāsakkhiṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasi kātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe…

     ‘I’ve done some work. While I was working I wasn’t able to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’

852. 852

     सोso वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     so vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They rouse up energy …

853. 853

     इदंi·daṃ दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ आरम्भवत्थु।ā·ram·bha·vat·thu

     idaṁ dutiyaṁ ārambhavatthu.

     This is the second ground for arousing energy.

854. 854

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā मग्गोmag·go गन्तब्बोgan·tab·bo होति।ho·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gantabbo hoti.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has to go on a journey.

855. 855

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

856. 856

     ‘मग्गोmag·go खोkho मेme गन्तब्बोgan·tab·bo भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti मग्गंmag·gaṃ खोkho पनpa·na मेme गच्छन्तेनgac·chan·te·na नna सुकरंsu·ka·raṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ सासनंsā·sa·naṃ मनसिma·na·si कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     ‘maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṁ kho pana me gacchantena na sukaraṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasi kātuṁ.

     ‘I have to go on a journey. While walking it’s not easy to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’

857. 857

     हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभामिā·ra·bhā·mi …पे…pe

     Handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe…

     (Pāli only)

858. 858

     सोso वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     so vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They rouse up energy …

859. 859

     इदंi·daṃ ततियंta·ti·yaṃ आरम्भवत्थु।ā·ram·bha·vat·thu

     idaṁ tatiyaṁ ārambhavatthu.

     This is the third ground for arousing energy.

860. 860

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā मग्गोmag·go गतोga·to होति।ho·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gato hoti.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has gone on a journey.

861. 861

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

862. 862

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho मग्गंmag·gaṃ अगमासिं,a·ga·mā·siṃ मग्गंmag·gaṃ खोkho पनाहंpa·nā·haṃ गच्छन्तोgac·chan·to नासक्खिंnā·sak·khiṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ सासनंsā·sa·naṃ मनसिma·na·si कातुं,kā·tuṃ हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभामिā·ra·bhā·mi …पे…pe

     ‘ahaṁ kho maggaṁ agamāsiṁ, maggaṁ kho panāhaṁ gacchanto nāsakkhiṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasi kātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe…

     ‘I’ve gone on a journey. While I was walking I wasn’t able to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’

863. 863

     सोso वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     so vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They rouse up energy …

864. 864

     इदंi·daṃ चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ आरम्भवत्थु।ā·ram·bha·vat·thu

     idaṁ catutthaṁ ārambhavatthu.

     This is the fourth ground for arousing energy.

865. 865

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu गामंgā·maṃ वाvā निगमंni·ga·maṃ वाvā पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तोca·ran·to नna लभतिla·bha·ti लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं।pā·ri·pū·riṃ

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto na labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, but they didn’t get to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine.

866. 866

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

867. 867

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho गामंgā·maṃ वाvā निगमंni·ga·maṃ वाvā पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तोca·ran·to नालत्थंnā·lat·thaṃ लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं,pā·ri·pū·riṃ तस्सtas·sa मेme कायोkā·yo लहुकोla·hu·ko कम्मञ्ञो,kam·mañ·ño हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभामिā·ra·bhā·mi …पे…pe

     ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo lahuko kammañño, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe…

     ‘I’ve wandered for alms, but I didn’t get to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is light and fit for work. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’

868. 868

     सोso वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     so vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They rouse up energy …

869. 869

     इदंi·daṃ पञ्चमंpañ·ca·maṃ आरम्भवत्थु।ā·ram·bha·vat·thu

     idaṁ pañcamaṁ ārambhavatthu.

     This is the fifth ground for arousing energy.

870. 870

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu गामंgā·maṃ वाvā निगमंni·ga·maṃ वाvā पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तोca·ran·to लभतिla·bha·ti लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं।pā·ri·pū·riṃ

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, and they got to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine.

871. 871

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

872. 872

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho गामंgā·maṃ वाvā निगमंni·ga·maṃ वाvā पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तोca·ran·to अलत्थंa·lat·thaṃ लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं,pā·ri·pū·riṃ तस्सtas·sa मेme कायोkā·yo बलवाba·la·vā कम्मञ्ञो,kam·mañ·ño हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभामिā·ra·bhā·mi …पे…pe

     ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo balavā kammañño, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe…

     ‘I’ve wandered for alms, and I got to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is strong and fit for work. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’

873. 873

     सोso वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     so vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They rouse up energy …

874. 874

     इदंi·daṃ छट्ठंchaṭ·ṭhaṃ आरम्भवत्थु।ā·ram·bha·vat·thu

     idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ ārambhavatthu.

     This is the sixth ground for arousing energy.

875. 875

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no उप्पन्नोup·pan·no होतिho·ti अप्पमत्तकोap·pa·mat·ta·ko आबाधो।ā·bā·dho

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno uppanno hoti appamattako ābādho.

     Furthermore, a mendicant feels a little sick.

876. 876

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

877. 877

     ‘उप्पन्नोup·pan·no खोkho मेme अयंa·yaṃ अप्पमत्तकोap·pa·mat·ta·ko आबाधो,ā·bā·dho ठानंṭhā·naṃ खोkho पनेतंpa·ne·taṃ विज्जतिvij·ja·ti यंyaṃ मेme आबाधोā·bā·dho पवड्ढेय्य,pa·vaḍ·ḍhey·ya हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभामिā·ra·bhā·mi …पे…pe

     ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ appamattako ābādho, ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati yaṁ me ābādho pavaḍḍheyya, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe…

     ‘I feel a little sick. It’s possible this illness will worsen. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’

878. 878

     सोso वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti …

     so vīriyaṁ ārabhati …

     They rouse up energy …

879. 879

     इदंi·daṃ सत्तमंsat·ta·maṃ आरम्भवत्थु।ā·ram·bha·vat·thu

     idaṁ sattamaṁ ārambhavatthu.

     This is the seventh ground for arousing energy.

880. 880

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu गिलानाgi·lā·nā वुट्ठितोvuṭ·ṭhi·to होतिho·ti अचिरवुट्ठितोa·ci·ra·vuṭ·ṭhi·to गेलञ्ञा।ge·lañ·ñā

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gilānā vuṭṭhito hoti aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā.

     Furthermore, a mendicant has recently recovered from illness.

881. 881

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

882. 882

     ‘अहंa·haṃ खोkho गिलानाgi·lā·nā वुट्ठितोvuṭ·ṭhi·to अचिरवुट्ठितोa·ci·ra·vuṭ·ṭhi·to गेलञ्ञा,ge·lañ·ñā ठानंṭhā·naṃ खोkho पनेतंpa·ne·taṃ विज्जतिvij·ja·ti यंyaṃ मेme आबाधोā·bā·dho पच्चुदावत्तेय्य,pac·cu·dā·vat·tey·ya हन्दाहंhan·dā·haṃ वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभामिā·ra·bhā·mi अप्पत्तस्सap·pat·tas·sa पत्तियाpat·ti·yā अनधिगतस्सa·na·dhi·ga·tas·sa अधिगमायa·dhi·ga·mā·ya असच्छिकतस्सa·sac·chi·ka·tas·sa सच्छिकिरियाया’ति।sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·yā

     ‘ahaṁ kho gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati yaṁ me ābādho paccudāvatteyya, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāyā’ti.

     ‘I’ve recently recovered from illness. It’s possible the illness will come back. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.’

883. 883

     सोso वीरियंvī·ri·yaṃ आरभतिā·ra·bha·ti अप्पत्तस्सap·pat·tas·sa पत्तियाpat·ti·yā अनधिगतस्सa·na·dhi·ga·tas·sa अधिगमायa·dhi·ga·mā·ya असच्छिकतस्सa·sac·chi·ka·tas·sa सच्छिकिरियाय।sac·chi·ki·ri·yā·ya

     So vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya.

     They rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.

884. 884

     इदंi·daṃ अट्ठमंaṭ·ṭha·maṃ आरम्भवत्थु।ā·ram·bha·vat·thu

     Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ ārambhavatthu.

     This is the eighth ground for arousing energy.

885. 885

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha दानवत्थूनि।dā·na·vat·thū·ni

     Aṭṭha dānavatthūni.

     <b>Eight reasons to give:</b>

886. 886

     आसज्जā·saj·ja दानंdā·naṃ देति,de·ti भयाbha·yā दानंdā·naṃ देति,de·ti ‘अदासिa·dā·si मे’तिme दानंdā·naṃ देति,de·ti ‘दस्सतिdas·sa·ti मे’तिme दानंdā·naṃ देति,de·ti ‘साहुsā·hu दानन्’तिdā·nan दानंdā·naṃ देति,de·ti ‘अहंa·haṃ पचामि,pa·cā·mi इमेi·me नna पचन्ति,pa·can·ti नारहामिnā·ra·hā·mi पचन्तोpa·can·to अपचन्तानंa·pa·can·tā·naṃ दानंdā·naṃ नna दातुन्’तिdā·tun दानंdā·naṃ देति,de·ti ‘इदंi·daṃ मेme दानंdā·naṃ ददतोda·da·to कल्याणोkal·yā·ṇo कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गच्छती’तिab·bhug·gac·cha·tī दानंdā·naṃ देति।de·ti

     Āsajja dānaṁ deti, bhayā dānaṁ deti, ‘adāsi me’ti dānaṁ deti, ‘dassati me’ti dānaṁ deti, ‘sāhu dānan’ti dānaṁ deti, ‘ahaṁ pacāmi, ime na pacanti, nārahāmi pacanto apacantānaṁ dānaṁ na dātun’ti dānaṁ deti, ‘idaṁ me dānaṁ dadato kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’ti dānaṁ deti.

     Someone might give a gift after insulting the recipient. Or they give out of fear. Or they give thinking, ‘They gave to me.’ Or they give thinking, ‘They’ll give to me.’ Or they give thinking, ‘It’s good to give.’ Or they give thinking, ‘I cook, they don’t. It wouldn’t be right for me to not give to them.’ Or they give thinking, ‘By giving this gift I’ll get a good reputation.’ Or they give thinking, ‘This is an adornment and requisite for the mind.’

887. 887

     चित्तालङ्कारचित्तपरिक्खारत्थंcit·tā·laṅ·kā·ra·cit·ta·pa·rik·khā·rat·thaṃ दानंdā·naṃ देति।de·ti

     Cittālaṅkāracittaparikkhāratthaṁ dānaṁ deti.

     (Pāli only)

888. 888

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha दानूपपत्तियो।dā·nū·pa·pat·ti·yo

     Aṭṭha dānūpapattiyo.

     <b>Eight rebirths by giving:</b>

889. 889

     इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so एकच्चोe·kac·co दानंdā·naṃ देतिde·ti समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa वाvā ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa वाvā अन्नंan·naṃ पानंpā·naṃ वत्थंvat·thaṃ यानंyā·naṃ मालागन्धविलेपनंmā·lā·gan·dha·vi·le·pa·naṃ सेय्यावसथपदीपेय्यं।sey·yā·va·sa·tha·pa·dī·pey·yaṃ

     Idhāvuso, ekacco dānaṁ deti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ vatthaṁ yānaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ.

     First, someone gives to ascetics or brahmins such things as food, drink, clothing, vehicles; garlands, fragrance, and makeup; and bed, house, and lighting.

890. 890

     सोso यंyaṃ देतिde·ti तंtaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     So yaṁ deti taṁ paccāsīsati.

     Whatever they give they expect back.

891. 891

     सोso पस्सतिpas·sa·ti खत्तियमहासालंkhat·ti·ya·ma·hā·sā·laṃ वाvā ब्राह्मणमहासालंbrāh·ma·ṇa·ma·hā·sā·laṃ वाvā गहपतिमहासालंga·ha·pa·ti·ma·hā·sā·laṃ वाvā पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi कामगुणेहिkā·ma·gu·ṇe·hi समप्पितंsa·map·pi·taṃ समङ्गीभूतंsa·maṅ·gī·bhū·taṃ परिचारयमानं।pa·ri·cā·ra·ya·mā·naṃ

     So passati khattiyamahāsālaṁ vā brāhmaṇamahāsālaṁ vā gahapatimahāsālaṁ vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitaṁ samaṅgībhūtaṁ paricārayamānaṁ.

     They see an affluent aristocrat or brahmin or householder amusing themselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation.

892. 892

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

893. 893

     ‘अहोa·ho वताहंva·tā·haṃ कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā खत्तियमहासालानंkhat·ti·ya·ma·hā·sā·lā·naṃ वाvā ब्राह्मणमहासालानंbrāh·ma·ṇa·ma·hā·sā·lā·naṃ वाvā गहपतिमहासालानंga·ha·pa·ti·ma·hā·sā·lā·naṃ वाvā सहब्यतंsa·hab·ya·taṃ उपपज्जेय्यन्’ति।u·pa·paj·jey·yan

     ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā khattiyamahāsālānaṁ vā brāhmaṇamahāsālānaṁ vā gahapatimahāsālānaṁ vā sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti.

     ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of well-to-do aristocrats or brahmins or householders!’

894. 894

     सोso तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ दहति,da·ha·ti तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ अधिट्ठाति,a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ भावेति,bhā·ve·ti तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ हीनेhī·ne विमुत्तंvi·mut·taṃ उत्तरिut·ta·ri अभावितंa·bhā·vi·taṃ तत्रूपपत्तियाtat·rū·pa·pat·ti·yā संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti, tassa taṁ cittaṁ hīne vimuttaṁ uttari abhāvitaṁ tatrūpapattiyā saṁvattati.

     They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. As they’ve settled for less and not developed further, their thought leads to rebirth there.

895. 895

     तञ्चtañ·ca खोkho सीलवतोsī·la·va·to वदामिva·dā·mi नोno दुस्सीलस्स।dus·sī·las·sa

     Tañca kho sīlavato vadāmi no dussīlassa.

     But I say that this is only for those of ethical conduct, not for the unethical.

896. 896

     इज्झतावुसो,ij·jha·tā·vu·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to चेतोपणिधिce·to·pa·ṇi·dhi विसुद्धत्ता।vi·sud·dhat·tā

     Ijjhatāvuso, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā.

     The heart’s wish of an ethical person succeeds because of their purity.

897. 897

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co दानंdā·naṃ देतिde·ti समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa वाvā ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa वाvā अन्नंan·naṃ पानंpā·naṃ …पे…pe सेय्यावसथपदीपेय्यं।sey·yā·va·sa·tha·pa·dī·pey·yaṃ

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco dānaṁ deti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ …pe… seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ.

     Next, someone gives to ascetics or brahmins.

898. 898

     सोso यंyaṃ देतिde·ti तंtaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     So yaṁ deti taṁ paccāsīsati.

     Whatever they give they expect back.

899. 899

     तस्सtas·sa सुतंsu·taṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa sutaṁ hoti:

     And they’ve heard:

900. 900

     ‘चातुमहाराजिकाcā·tu·ma·hā·rā·ji·kā देवाde·vā दीघायुकाdī·ghā·yu·kā वण्णवन्तोvaṇ·ṇa·van·to सुखबहुला’ति।su·kha·ba·hu·lā

     ‘cātumahārājikā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’ti.

     ‘The gods of the four great kings are long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’

901. 901

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

902. 902

     ‘अहोa·ho वताहंva·tā·haṃ कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā चातुमहाराजिकानंcā·tu·ma·hā·rā·ji·kā·naṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ सहब्यतंsa·hab·ya·taṃ उपपज्जेय्यन्’ति।u·pa·paj·jey·yan

     ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti.

     ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the gods of the four great kings!’

903. 903

     सोso तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ दहति,da·ha·ti तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ अधिट्ठाति,a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ भावेति,bhā·ve·ti तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ हीनेhī·ne विमुत्तंvi·mut·taṃ उत्तरिut·ta·ri अभावितंa·bhā·vi·taṃ तत्रूपपत्तियाtat·rū·pa·pat·ti·yā संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti, tassa taṁ cittaṁ hīne vimuttaṁ uttari abhāvitaṁ tatrūpapattiyā saṁvattati.

     They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. As they’ve settled for less and not developed further, their thought leads to rebirth there.

904. 904

     तञ्चtañ·ca खोkho सीलवतोsī·la·va·to वदामिva·dā·mi नोno दुस्सीलस्स।dus·sī·las·sa

     Tañca kho sīlavato vadāmi no dussīlassa.

     But I say that this is only for those of ethical conduct, not for the unethical.

905. 905

     इज्झतावुसो,ij·jha·tā·vu·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to चेतोपणिधिce·to·pa·ṇi·dhi विसुद्धत्ता।vi·sud·dhat·tā

     Ijjhatāvuso, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā.

     The heart’s wish of an ethical person succeeds because of their purity.

906. 906

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co दानंdā·naṃ देतिde·ti समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa वाvā ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa वाvā अन्नंan·naṃ पानंpā·naṃ …पे…pe सेय्यावसथपदीपेय्यं।sey·yā·va·sa·tha·pa·dī·pey·yaṃ

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco dānaṁ deti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ …pe… seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ.

     Next, someone gives to ascetics or brahmins.

907. 907

     सोso यंyaṃ देतिde·ti तंtaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     So yaṁ deti taṁ paccāsīsati.

     Whatever they give they expect back.

908. 908

     तस्सtas·sa सुतंsu·taṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa sutaṁ hoti:

     And they’ve heard:

909. 909

     ‘तावतिंसाtā·va·tiṃ·sā देवाde·vā …पे…pe

     ‘tāvatiṁsā devā …pe…

     ‘The gods of the thirty-three …

910. 910

     यामाyā·mā देवाde·vā …पे…pe

     yāmā devā …pe…

     the gods of Yama …

911. 911

     तुसिताtu·si·tā देवाde·vā …पे…pe

     tusitā devā …pe…

     the joyful gods …

912. 912

     निम्मानरतीnim·mā·na·ra·tī देवाde·vā …पे…pe

     nimmānaratī devā …pe…

     the gods who love to create …

913. 913

     परनिम्मितवसवत्तीpa·ra·nim·mi·ta·va·sa·vat·tī देवाde·vā दीघायुकाdī·ghā·yu·kā वण्णवन्तोvaṇ·ṇa·van·to सुखबहुला’ति।su·kha·ba·hu·lā

     paranimmitavasavattī devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’ti.

     the gods who control what is created by others are long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’

914. 914

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

915. 915

     ‘अहोa·ho वताहंva·tā·haṃ कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā परनिम्मितवसवत्तीनंpa·ra·nim·mi·ta·va·sa·vat·tī·naṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ सहब्यतंsa·hab·ya·taṃ उपपज्जेय्यन्’ति।u·pa·paj·jey·yan

     ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā paranimmitavasavattīnaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti.

     ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the gods who control what is created by others!’

916. 916

     सोso तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ दहति,da·ha·ti तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ अधिट्ठाति,a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ भावेति,bhā·ve·ti तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ हीनेhī·ne विमुत्तंvi·mut·taṃ उत्तरिut·ta·ri अभावितंa·bhā·vi·taṃ तत्रूपपत्तियाtat·rū·pa·pat·ti·yā संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti, tassa taṁ cittaṁ hīne vimuttaṁ uttari abhāvitaṁ tatrūpapattiyā saṁvattati.

     They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. As they’ve settled for less and not developed further, their thought leads to rebirth there.

917. 917

     तञ्चtañ·ca खोkho सीलवतोsī·la·va·to वदामिva·dā·mi नोno दुस्सीलस्स।dus·sī·las·sa

     Tañca kho sīlavato vadāmi no dussīlassa.

     But I say that this is only for those of ethical conduct, not for the unethical.

918. 918

     इज्झतावुसो,ij·jha·tā·vu·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to चेतोपणिधिce·to·pa·ṇi·dhi विसुद्धत्ता।vi·sud·dhat·tā

     Ijjhatāvuso, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā.

     The heart’s wish of an ethical person succeeds because of their purity.

919. 919

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co दानंdā·naṃ देतिde·ti समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa वाvā ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa वाvā अन्नंan·naṃ पानंpā·naṃ वत्थंvat·thaṃ यानंyā·naṃ मालागन्धविलेपनंmā·lā·gan·dha·vi·le·pa·naṃ सेय्यावसथपदीपेय्यं।sey·yā·va·sa·tha·pa·dī·pey·yaṃ

     Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco dānaṁ deti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ vatthaṁ yānaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ.

     Next, someone gives to ascetics or brahmins such things as food, drink, clothing, vehicles; garlands, fragrance, and makeup; and bed, house, and lighting.

920. 920

     सोso यंyaṃ देतिde·ti तंtaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     So yaṁ deti taṁ paccāsīsati.

     Whatever they give they expect back.

921. 921

     तस्सtas·sa सुतंsu·taṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa sutaṁ hoti:

     And they’ve heard:

922. 922

     ‘ब्रह्मकायिकाbrah·ma·kā·yi·kā देवाde·vā दीघायुकाdī·ghā·yu·kā वण्णवन्तोvaṇ·ṇa·van·to सुखबहुला’ति।su·kha·ba·hu·lā

     ‘brahmakāyikā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’ti.

     ‘The gods of the Divinity’s host are long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’

923. 923

     तस्सtas·sa एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Tassa evaṁ hoti:

     They think:

924. 924

     ‘अहोa·ho वताहंva·tā·haṃ कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā ब्रह्मकायिकानंbrah·ma·kā·yi·kā·naṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ सहब्यतंsa·hab·ya·taṃ उपपज्जेय्यन्’ति।u·pa·paj·jey·yan

     ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmakāyikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti.

     ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the gods of the Divinity’s host!’

925. 925

     सोso तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ दहति,da·ha·ti तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ अधिट्ठाति,a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ भावेति,bhā·ve·ti तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ चित्तंcit·taṃ हीनेhī·ne विमुत्तंvi·mut·taṃ उत्तरिut·ta·ri अभावितंa·bhā·vi·taṃ तत्रूपपत्तियाtat·rū·pa·pat·ti·yā संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

     So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti, tassa taṁ cittaṁ hīne vimuttaṁ uttari abhāvitaṁ tatrūpapattiyā saṁvattati.

     They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. As they’ve settled for less and not developed further, their thought leads to rebirth there.

926. 926

     तञ्चtañ·ca खोkho सीलवतोsī·la·va·to वदामिva·dā·mi नोno दुस्सीलस्स;dus·sī·las·sa

     Tañca kho sīlavato vadāmi no dussīlassa;

     But I say that this is only for those of ethical conduct, not for the unethical.

927. 927

     वीतरागस्सvī·ta·rā·gas·sa नोno सरागस्स।sa·rā·gas·sa

     vītarāgassa no sarāgassa.

     And for those free of desire, not those with desire.

928. 928

     इज्झतावुसो,ij·jha·tā·vu·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to चेतोपणिधिce·to·pa·ṇi·dhi वीतरागत्ता।vī·ta·rā·gat·tā

     Ijjhatāvuso, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi vītarāgattā.

     The heart’s wish of an ethical person succeeds because of their freedom from desire.

929. 929

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha परिसा—pa·ri·sā

     Aṭṭha parisā—

     <b>Eight assemblies:</b>

930. 930

     खत्तियपरिसा,khat·ti·ya·pa·ri·sā ब्राह्मणपरिसा,brāh·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·sā गहपतिपरिसा,ga·ha·pa·ti·pa·ri·sā समणपरिसा,sa·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·sā चातुमहाराजिकपरिसा,cā·tu·ma·hā·rā·ji·ka·pa·ri·sā तावतिंसपरिसा,tā·va·tiṃ·sa·pa·ri·sā मारपरिसा,mā·ra·pa·ri·sā ब्रह्मपरिसा।brah·ma·pa·ri·sā

     khattiyaparisā, brāhmaṇaparisā, gahapatiparisā, samaṇaparisā, cātumahārājikaparisā, tāvatiṁsaparisā, māraparisā, brahmaparisā.

     the assemblies of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, and ascetics. An assembly of the gods of the four great kings. An assembly of the gods of the thirty-three. An assembly of Māras. An assembly of divinities.

931. 931

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha लोकधम्मा—lo·ka·dham·mā

     Aṭṭha lokadhammā—

     <b>Eight worldly conditions:</b>

932. 932

     लाभोlā·bho च,ca अलाभोa·lā·bho च,ca यसोya·so च,ca अयसोa·ya·so च,ca निन्दाnin·dā च,ca पसंसाpa·saṃ·sā च,ca सुखञ्च,su·khañ·ca दुक्खञ्च।duk·khañ·ca

     lābho ca, alābho ca, yaso ca, ayaso ca, nindā ca, pasaṁsā ca, sukhañca, dukkhañca.

     gain and loss, fame and disgrace, blame and praise, pleasure and pain.

933. 933

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha अभिभायतनानि।a·bhi·bhā·ya·ta·nā·ni

     Aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni.

     <b>Eight dimensions of mastery:</b>

934. 934

     अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ रूपसञ्ञीrū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti परित्तानिpa·rit·tā·ni सुवण्णदुब्बण्णानि,su·vaṇ·ṇa·dub·baṇ·ṇā·ni ‘तानिtā·ni अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya जानामिjā·nā·mi पस्सामी’तिpas·sā·mī एवंसञ्ञीe·vaṃ·sañ·ñī होति।ho·ti

     Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

     Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’

935. 935

     इदंi·daṃ पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ अभिभायतनं।a·bhi·bhā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

     This is the first dimension of mastery.

936. 936

     अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ रूपसञ्ञीrū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti अप्पमाणानिap·pa·mā·ṇā·ni सुवण्णदुब्बण्णानि,su·vaṇ·ṇa·dub·baṇ·ṇā·ni ‘तानिtā·ni अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya जानामिjā·nā·mi पस्सामी’ति—pas·sā·mī

     Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti—

     Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’

937. 937

     एवंसञ्ञीe·vaṃ·sañ·ñī होति।ho·ti

     evaṁsaññī hoti.

     (Pāli only)

938. 938

     इदंi·daṃ दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ अभिभायतनं।a·bhi·bhā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ dutiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

     This is the second dimension of mastery.

939. 939

     अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti परित्तानिpa·rit·tā·ni सुवण्णदुब्बण्णानि,su·vaṇ·ṇa·dub·baṇ·ṇā·ni ‘तानिtā·ni अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya जानामिjā·nā·mi पस्सामी’तिpas·sā·mī एवंसञ्ञीe·vaṃ·sañ·ñī होति।ho·ti

     Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

     Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’

940. 940

     इदंi·daṃ ततियंta·ti·yaṃ अभिभायतनं।a·bhi·bhā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ tatiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

     This is the third dimension of mastery.

941. 941

     अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti अप्पमाणानिap·pa·mā·ṇā·ni सुवण्णदुब्बण्णानि,su·vaṇ·ṇa·dub·baṇ·ṇā·ni ‘तानिtā·ni अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya जानामिjā·nā·mi पस्सामी’तिpas·sā·mī एवंसञ्ञीe·vaṃ·sañ·ñī होति।ho·ti

     Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

     Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’

942. 942

     इदंi·daṃ चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ अभिभायतनं।a·bhi·bhā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ catutthaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

     This is the fourth dimension of mastery.

943. 943

     अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti नीलानिnī·lā·ni नीलवण्णानिnī·la·vaṇ·ṇā·ni नीलनिदस्सनानिnī·la·ni·das·sa·nā·ni नीलनिभासानि।nī·la·ni·bhā·sā·ni

     Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni.

     Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are blue, with blue color and blue appearance.

944. 944

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma उमापुप्फंu·mā·pup·phaṃ नीलंnī·laṃ नीलवण्णंnī·la·vaṇ·ṇaṃ नीलनिदस्सनंnī·la·ni·das·sa·naṃ नीलनिभासं,nī·la·ni·bhā·saṃ सेय्यथाsey·ya·thā वाvā पनpa·na तंtaṃ वत्थंvat·thaṃ बाराणसेय्यकंbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·kaṃ उभतोभागविमट्ठंu·bha·to·bhā·ga·vi·maṭ·ṭhaṃ नीलंnī·laṃ नीलवण्णंnī·la·vaṇ·ṇaṃ नीलनिदस्सनंnī·la·ni·das·sa·naṃ नीलनिभासं;nī·la·ni·bhā·saṃ

     Seyyathāpi nāma umāpupphaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ;

     They’re like a flax flower that’s blue, with blue color and blue appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, blue, with blue color and blue appearance.

945. 945

     एवमेवe·va·me·va अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti नीलानिnī·lā·ni नीलवण्णानिnī·la·vaṇ·ṇā·ni नीलनिदस्सनानिnī·la·ni·das·sa·nā·ni नीलनिभासानि,nī·la·ni·bhā·sā·ni ‘तानिtā·ni अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya जानामिjā·nā·mi पस्सामी’तिpas·sā·mī एवंसञ्ञीe·vaṃ·sañ·ñī होति।ho·ti

     evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

     Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’

946. 946

     इदंi·daṃ पञ्चमंpañ·ca·maṃ अभिभायतनं।a·bhi·bhā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ pañcamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

     This is the fifth dimension of mastery.

947. 947

     अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti पीतानिpī·tā·ni पीतवण्णानिpī·ta·vaṇ·ṇā·ni पीतनिदस्सनानिpī·ta·ni·das·sa·nā·ni पीतनिभासानि।pī·ta·ni·bhā·sā·ni

     Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni.

     Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance.

948. 948

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma कणिकारपुप्फंka·ṇi·kā·ra·pup·phaṃ पीतंpī·taṃ पीतवण्णंpī·ta·vaṇ·ṇaṃ पीतनिदस्सनंpī·ta·ni·das·sa·naṃ पीतनिभासं,pī·ta·ni·bhā·saṃ सेय्यथाsey·ya·thā वाvā पनpa·na तंtaṃ वत्थंvat·thaṃ बाराणसेय्यकंbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·kaṃ उभतोभागविमट्ठंu·bha·to·bhā·ga·vi·maṭ·ṭhaṃ पीतंpī·taṃ पीतवण्णंpī·ta·vaṇ·ṇaṃ पीतनिदस्सनंpī·ta·ni·das·sa·naṃ पीतनिभासं;pī·ta·ni·bhā·saṃ

     Seyyathāpi nāma kaṇikārapupphaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ;

     They’re like a champak flower that’s yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance.

949. 949

     एवमेवe·va·me·va अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti पीतानिpī·tā·ni पीतवण्णानिpī·ta·vaṇ·ṇā·ni पीतनिदस्सनानिpī·ta·ni·das·sa·nā·ni पीतनिभासानि,pī·ta·ni·bhā·sā·ni ‘तानिtā·ni अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya जानामिjā·nā·mi पस्सामी’तिpas·sā·mī एवंसञ्ञीe·vaṃ·sañ·ñī होति।ho·ti

     evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

     Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’

950. 950

     इदंi·daṃ छट्ठंchaṭ·ṭhaṃ अभिभायतनं।a·bhi·bhā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

     This is the sixth dimension of mastery.

951. 951

     अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti लोहितकानिlo·hi·ta·kā·ni लोहितकवण्णानिlo·hi·ta·ka·vaṇ·ṇā·ni लोहितकनिदस्सनानिlo·hi·ta·ka·ni·das·sa·nā·ni लोहितकनिभासानि।lo·hi·ta·ka·ni·bhā·sā·ni

     Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni.

     Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are red, with red color and red appearance.

952. 952

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma बन्धुजीवकपुप्फंban·dhu·jī·va·ka·pup·phaṃ लोहितकंlo·hi·ta·kaṃ लोहितकवण्णंlo·hi·ta·ka·vaṇ·ṇaṃ लोहितकनिदस्सनंlo·hi·ta·ka·ni·das·sa·naṃ लोहितकनिभासं,lo·hi·ta·ka·ni·bhā·saṃ सेय्यथाsey·ya·thā वाvā पनpa·na तंtaṃ वत्थंvat·thaṃ बाराणसेय्यकंbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·kaṃ उभतोभागविमट्ठंu·bha·to·bhā·ga·vi·maṭ·ṭhaṃ लोहितकंlo·hi·ta·kaṃ लोहितकवण्णंlo·hi·ta·ka·vaṇ·ṇaṃ लोहितकनिदस्सनंlo·hi·ta·ka·ni·das·sa·naṃ लोहितकनिभासं;lo·hi·ta·ka·ni·bhā·saṃ

     Seyyathāpi nāma bandhujīvakapupphaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ;

     They’re like a scarlet mallow flower that’s red, with red color and red appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, red, with red color and red appearance.

953. 953

     एवमेवe·va·me·va अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti लोहितकानिlo·hi·ta·kā·ni लोहितकवण्णानिlo·hi·ta·ka·vaṇ·ṇā·ni लोहितकनिदस्सनानिlo·hi·ta·ka·ni·das·sa·nā·ni लोहितकनिभासानि,lo·hi·ta·ka·ni·bhā·sā·ni ‘तानिtā·ni अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya जानामिjā·nā·mi पस्सामी’तिpas·sā·mī एवंसञ्ञीe·vaṃ·sañ·ñī होति।ho·ti

     evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

     Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’

954. 954

     इदंi·daṃ सत्तमंsat·ta·maṃ अभिभायतनं।a·bhi·bhā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ sattamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

     This is the seventh dimension of mastery.

955. 955

     अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti ओदातानिo·dā·tā·ni ओदातवण्णानिo·dā·ta·vaṇ·ṇā·ni ओदातनिदस्सनानिo·dā·ta·ni·das·sa·nā·ni ओदातनिभासानि।o·dā·ta·ni·bhā·sā·ni

     Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni.

     Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are white, with white color and white appearance.

956. 956

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma ओसधितारकाo·sa·dhi·tā·ra·kā ओदाताo·dā·tā ओदातवण्णाo·dā·ta·vaṇ·ṇā ओदातनिदस्सनाo·dā·ta·ni·das·sa·nā ओदातनिभासा,o·dā·ta·ni·bhā·sā सेय्यथाsey·ya·thā वाvā पनpa·na तंtaṃ वत्थंvat·thaṃ बाराणसेय्यकंbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·kaṃ उभतोभागविमट्ठंu·bha·to·bhā·ga·vi·maṭ·ṭhaṃ ओदातंo·dā·taṃ ओदातवण्णंo·dā·ta·vaṇ·ṇaṃ ओदातनिदस्सनंo·dā·ta·ni·das·sa·naṃ ओदातनिभासं;o·dā·ta·ni·bhā·saṃ

     Seyyathāpi nāma osadhitārakā odātā odātavaṇṇā odātanidassanā odātanibhāsā, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ odātaṁ odātavaṇṇaṁ odātanidassanaṁ odātanibhāsaṁ;

     They’re like the morning star that’s white, with white color and white appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, white, with white color and white appearance.

957. 957

     एवमेवe·va·me·va अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī एकोe·ko बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सतिpas·sa·ti ओदातानिo·dā·tā·ni ओदातवण्णानिo·dā·ta·vaṇ·ṇā·ni ओदातनिदस्सनानिo·dā·ta·ni·das·sa·nā·ni ओदातनिभासानि,o·dā·ta·ni·bhā·sā·ni ‘तानिtā·ni अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya जानामिjā·nā·mi पस्सामी’तिpas·sā·mī एवंसञ्ञीe·vaṃ·sañ·ñī होति।ho·ti

     evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti.

     Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’

958. 958

     इदंi·daṃ अट्ठमंaṭ·ṭha·maṃ अभिभायतनं।a·bhi·bhā·ya·ta·naṃ

     Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.

     This is the eighth dimension of mastery.

959. 959

     अट्ठaṭ·ṭha विमोक्खा।vi·mok·khā

     Aṭṭha vimokkhā.

     <b>Eight liberations:</b>

960. 960

     रूपीrū·pī रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सति।pas·sa·ti

     Rūpī rūpāni passati.

     Having physical form, they see forms.

961. 961

     अयंa·yaṃ पठमोpa·ṭha·mo विमोक्खो।vi·mok·kho

     Ayaṁ paṭhamo vimokkho.

     This is the first liberation.

962. 962

     अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ अरूपसञ्ञीa·rū·pa·sañ·ñī बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā रूपानिrū·pā·ni पस्सति।pas·sa·ti

     Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati.

     Not perceiving physical form internally, they see forms externally.

963. 963

     अयंa·yaṃ दुतियोdu·ti·yo विमोक्खो।vi·mok·kho

     Ayaṁ dutiyo vimokkho.

     This is the second liberation.

964. 964

     सुभन्तेवsu·bhan·te·va अधिमुत्तोa·dhi·mut·to होति।ho·ti

     Subhanteva adhimutto hoti.

     They’re focused only on beauty.

965. 965

     अयंa·yaṃ ततियोta·ti·yo विमोक्खो।vi·mok·kho

     Ayaṁ tatiyo vimokkho.

     This is the third liberation.

966. 966

     सब्बसोsab·ba·so रूपसञ्ञानंrū·pa·sañ·ñā·naṃ समतिक्कमाsa·ma·tik·ka·mā पटिघसञ्ञानंpa·ṭi·gha·sañ·ñā·naṃ अत्थङ्गमाat·thaṅ·ga·mā नानत्तसञ्ञानंnā·nat·ta·sañ·ñā·naṃ अमनसिकाराa·ma·na·si·kā·rā ‘अनन्तोa·nan·to आकासो’तिā·kā·so आकासानञ्चायतनंā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space.

967. 967

     अयंa·yaṃ चतुत्थोca·tut·tho विमोक्खो।vi·mok·kho

     Ayaṁ catuttho vimokkho.

     This is the fourth liberation.

968. 968

     सब्बसोsab·ba·so आकासानञ्चायतनंā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘अनन्तंa·nan·taṃ विञ्ञाणन्’तिviñ·ñā·ṇan विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनंviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness.

969. 969

     अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo विमोक्खो।vi·mok·kho

     Ayaṁ pañcamo vimokkho.

     This is the fifth liberation.

970. 970

     सब्बसोsab·ba·so विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनंviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘नत्थिnat·thi किञ्ची’तिkiñ·cī आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनंā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness.

971. 971

     अयंa·yaṃ छट्ठोchaṭ·ṭho विमोक्खो।vi·mok·kho

     Ayaṁ chaṭṭho vimokkho.

     This is the sixth liberation.

972. 972

     सब्बसोsab·ba·so आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनंā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma नेवसञ्ञानासञ्ञायतनंne·va·sañ·ñā·nā·sañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.

973. 973

     अयंa·yaṃ सत्तमोsat·ta·mo विमोक्खो।vi·mok·kho

     Ayaṁ sattamo vimokkho.

     This is the seventh liberation.

974. 974

     सब्बसोsab·ba·so नेवसञ्ञानासञ्ञायतनंne·va·sañ·ñā·nā·sañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma सञ्ञावेदयितनिरोधंsañ·ñā·ve·da·yi·ta·ni·ro·dhaṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati.

     Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling.

975. 975

     अयंa·yaṃ अट्ठमोaṭ·ṭha·mo विमोक्खो।vi·mok·kho

     Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo vimokkho.

     This is the eighth liberation.

976. 976

     इमेi·me खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na अट्ठaṭ·ṭha धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता;sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena aṭṭha dhammā sammadakkhātā;

     These are the teachings grouped by eight that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

977. 977

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

978. 978

     9। नवकna·va·ka

     9. Navaka

     9. Nines

979. 979

     अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na नवna·va धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता;sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

     Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena nava dhammā sammadakkhātā;

     There are teachings grouped by nine that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

980. 980

     तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     You should all recite these in concert.

981. 981

     कतमेka·ta·me नव?na·va

     Katame nava?

     What are the teachings grouped by nine?

982. 982

     नवna·va आघातवत्थूनि।ā·ghā·ta·vat·thū·ni

     Nava āghātavatthūni.

     <b>Nine grounds for resentment:</b>

983. 983

     ‘अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ मेme अचरी’तिa·ca·rī आघातंā·ghā·taṃ बन्धति;ban·dha·ti

     ‘Anatthaṁ me acarī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati;

     Thinking: ‘They did wrong to me,’ you harbor resentment.

984. 984

     ‘अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ मेme चरती’तिca·ra·tī आघातंā·ghā·taṃ बन्धति;ban·dha·ti

     ‘anatthaṁ me caratī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati;

     Thinking: ‘They are doing wrong to me’ …

985. 985

     ‘अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ मेme चरिस्सती’तिca·ris·sa·tī आघातंā·ghā·taṃ बन्धति;ban·dha·ti

     ‘anatthaṁ me carissatī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati;

     ‘They will do wrong to me’ …

986. 986

     ‘पियस्सpi·yas·sa मेme मनापस्सma·nā·pas·sa अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ अचरी’तिa·ca·rī आघातंā·ghā·taṃ बन्धतिban·dha·ti …पे…pe

     ‘piyassa me manāpassa anatthaṁ acarī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe…

     ‘They did wrong by someone I love’ …

987. 987

     अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ चरतीतिca·ra·tī·ti आघातंā·ghā·taṃ बन्धतिban·dha·ti …पे…pe

     anatthaṁ caratīti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe…

     ‘They are doing wrong by someone I love’ …

988. 988

     अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ चरिस्सतीतिca·ris·sa·tī·ti आघातंā·ghā·taṃ बन्धति;ban·dha·ti

     anatthaṁ carissatīti āghātaṁ bandhati;

     ‘They will do wrong by someone I love’ …

989. 989

     ‘अप्पियस्सap·pi·yas·sa मेme अमनापस्सa·ma·nā·pas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ अचरी’तिa·ca·rī आघातंā·ghā·taṃ बन्धतिban·dha·ti …पे…pe

     ‘appiyassa me amanāpassa atthaṁ acarī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe…

     ‘They helped someone I dislike’ …

990. 990

     अत्थंat·thaṃ चरतीतिca·ra·tī·ti आघातंā·ghā·taṃ बन्धतिban·dha·ti …पे…pe

     atthaṁ caratīti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe…

     ‘They are helping someone I dislike’ …

991. 991

     अत्थंat·thaṃ चरिस्सतीतिca·ris·sa·tī·ti आघातंā·ghā·taṃ बन्धति।ban·dha·ti

     atthaṁ carissatīti āghātaṁ bandhati.

     Thinking: ‘They will help someone I dislike,’ you harbor resentment.

992. 992

     नवna·va आघातपटिविनया।ā·ghā·ta·pa·ṭi·vi·na·yā

     Nava āghātapaṭivinayā.

     <b>Nine ways to get rid of resentment:</b>

993. 993

     ‘अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ मेme अचरि,a·ca·ri तंtaṃ कुतेत्थku·tet·tha लब्भा’तिlab·bhā आघातंā·ghā·taṃ पटिविनेति;pa·ṭi·vi·ne·ti

     ‘Anatthaṁ me acari, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti;

     Thinking: ‘They did wrong to me, but what can I possibly do?’ you get rid of resentment.

994. 994

     ‘अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ मेme चरति,ca·ra·ti तंtaṃ कुतेत्थku·tet·tha लब्भा’तिlab·bhā आघातंā·ghā·taṃ पटिविनेति;pa·ṭi·vi·ne·ti

     ‘anatthaṁ me carati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti;

     Thinking: ‘They are doing wrong to me …’ …

995. 995

     ‘अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ मेme चरिस्सति,ca·ris·sa·ti तंtaṃ कुतेत्थku·tet·tha लब्भा’तिlab·bhā आघातंā·ghā·taṃ पटिविनेति;pa·ṭi·vi·ne·ti

     ‘anatthaṁ me carissati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti;

     ‘They will do wrong to me …’ …

996. 996

     ‘पियस्सpi·yas·sa मेme मनापस्सma·nā·pas·sa अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ अचरिa·ca·ri …पे…pe

     ‘piyassa me manāpassa anatthaṁ acari …pe…

     ‘They did wrong by someone I love …’ …

997. 997

     अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ चरतिca·ra·ti …पे…pe

     anatthaṁ carati …pe…

     ‘They are doing wrong by someone I love …’ …

998. 998

     अनत्थंa·nat·thaṃ चरिस्सति,ca·ris·sa·ti तंtaṃ कुतेत्थku·tet·tha लब्भा’तिlab·bhā आघातंā·ghā·taṃ पटिविनेति;pa·ṭi·vi·ne·ti

     anatthaṁ carissati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti;

     ‘They will do wrong by someone I love …’ …

999. 999

     ‘अप्पियस्सap·pi·yas·sa मेme अमनापस्सa·ma·nā·pas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ अचरिa·ca·ri …पे…pe

     ‘appiyassa me amanāpassa atthaṁ acari …pe…

     ‘They helped someone I dislike …’ …

1000. 1000

      अत्थंat·thaṃ चरतिca·ra·ti …पे…pe

      atthaṁ carati …pe…

      ‘They are helping someone I dislike …’ …

1001. 1001

      अत्थंat·thaṃ चरिस्सति,ca·ris·sa·ti तंtaṃ कुतेत्थku·tet·tha लब्भा’तिlab·bhā आघातंā·ghā·taṃ पटिविनेति।pa·ṭi·vi·ne·ti

      atthaṁ carissati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti.

      Thinking: ‘They will help someone I dislike, but what can I possibly do?’ you get rid of resentment.

1002. 1002

      नवna·va सत्तावासा।sat·tā·vā·sā

      Nava sattāvāsā.

      <b>Nine abodes of sentient beings:</b>

1003. 1003

      सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā नानत्तकायाnā·nat·ta·kā·yā नानत्तसञ्ञिनो,nā·nat·ta·sañ·ñi·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi मनुस्साma·nus·sā एकच्चेe·kac·ce चca देवाde·vā एकच्चेe·kac·ce चca विनिपातिका।vi·ni·pā·ti·kā

      Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā.

      There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and diverse in perception, such as human beings, some gods, and some beings in the underworld.

1004. 1004

      अयंa·yaṃ पठमोpa·ṭha·mo सत्तावासो।sat·tā·vā·so

      Ayaṁ paṭhamo sattāvāso.

      This is the first abode of sentient beings.

1005. 1005

      सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā नानत्तकायाnā·nat·ta·kā·yā एकत्तसञ्ञिनो,e·kat·ta·sañ·ñi·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā ब्रह्मकायिकाbrah·ma·kā·yi·kā पठमाभिनिब्बत्ता।pa·ṭha·mā·bhi·nib·bat·tā

      Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā.

      There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and unified in perception, such as the gods reborn in the Divinity’s host through the first absorption.

1006. 1006

      अयंa·yaṃ दुतियोdu·ti·yo सत्तावासो।sat·tā·vā·so

      Ayaṁ dutiyo sattāvāso.

      This is the second abode of sentient beings.

1007. 1007

      सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā एकत्तकायाe·kat·ta·kā·yā नानत्तसञ्ञिनो,nā·nat·ta·sañ·ñi·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā आभस्सरा।ā·bhas·sa·rā

      Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā.

      There are sentient beings that are unified in body and diverse in perception, such as the gods of sublime luminosity.

1008. 1008

      अयंa·yaṃ ततियोta·ti·yo सत्तावासो।sat·tā·vā·so

      Ayaṁ tatiyo sattāvāso.

      This is the third abode of sentient beings.

1009. 1009

      सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā एकत्तकायाe·kat·ta·kā·yā एकत्तसञ्ञिनो,e·kat·ta·sañ·ñi·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā सुभकिण्हा।su·bha·kiṇ·hā

      Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā.

      There are sentient beings that are unified in body and unified in perception, such as the gods of universal beauty.

1010. 1010

      अयंa·yaṃ चतुत्थोca·tut·tho सत्तावासो।sat·tā·vā·so

      Ayaṁ catuttho sattāvāso.

      This is the fourth abode of sentient beings.

1011. 1011

      सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā असञ्ञिनोa·sañ·ñi·no अप्पटिसंवेदिनो,ap·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·di·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi देवाde·vā असञ्ञसत्ता।a·sañ·ña·sat·tā

      Santāvuso, sattā asaññino appaṭisaṁvedino, seyyathāpi devā asaññasattā.

      There are sentient beings that are non-percipient and do not experience anything, such as the gods who are non-percipient beings.

1012. 1012

      अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo सत्तावासो।sat·tā·vā·so

      Ayaṁ pañcamo sattāvāso.

      This is the fifth abode of sentient beings.

1013. 1013

      सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā सब्बसोsab·ba·so रूपसञ्ञानंrū·pa·sañ·ñā·naṃ समतिक्कमाsa·ma·tik·ka·mā पटिघसञ्ञानंpa·ṭi·gha·sañ·ñā·naṃ अत्थङ्गमाat·thaṅ·ga·mā नानत्तसञ्ञानंnā·nat·ta·sañ·ñā·naṃ अमनसिकाराa·ma·na·si·kā·rā ‘अनन्तोa·nan·to आकासो’तिā·kā·so आकासानञ्चायतनूपगा।ā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·nū·pa·gā

      Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā.

      There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond perceptions of form. With the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite space.

1014. 1014

      अयंa·yaṃ छट्ठोchaṭ·ṭho सत्तावासो।sat·tā·vā·so

      Ayaṁ chaṭṭho sattāvāso.

      This is the sixth abode of sentient beings.

1015. 1015

      सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā सब्बसोsab·ba·so आकासानञ्चायतनंā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘अनन्तंa·nan·taṃ विञ्ञाणन्’तिviñ·ñā·ṇan विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनूपगा।viñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·nū·pa·gā

      Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā.

      There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite space. Aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite consciousness.

1016. 1016

      अयंa·yaṃ सत्तमोsat·ta·mo सत्तावासो।sat·tā·vā·so

      Ayaṁ sattamo sattāvāso.

      This is the seventh abode of sentient beings.

1017. 1017

      सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā सब्बसोsab·ba·so विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनंviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘नत्थिnat·thi किञ्ची’तिkiñ·cī आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनूपगा।ā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·nū·pa·gā

      Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā.

      There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness. Aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they have been reborn in the dimension of nothingness.

1018. 1018

      अयंa·yaṃ अट्ठमोaṭ·ṭha·mo सत्तावासो।sat·tā·vā·so

      Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo sattāvāso.

      This is the eighth abode of sentient beings.

1019. 1019

      सन्तावुसो,san·tā·vu·so सत्ताsat·tā सब्बसोsab·ba·so आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनंā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma नेवसञ्ञानासञ्ञायतनूपगा।ne·va·sañ·ñā·nā·sañ·ñā·ya·ta·nū·pa·gā

      Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagā.

      There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of nothingness. They have been reborn in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.

1020. 1020

      अयंa·yaṃ नवमोna·va·mo सत्तावासो।sat·tā·vā·so

      Ayaṁ navamo sattāvāso.

      This is the ninth abode of sentient beings.

1021. 1021

      नवna·va अक्खणाak·kha·ṇā असमयाa·sa·ma·yā ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Nava akkhaṇā asamayā brahmacariyavāsāya.

      <b>Nine lost opportunities for spiritual practice:</b>

1022. 1022

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so तथागतोta·thā·ga·to चca लोकेlo·ke उप्पन्नोup·pan·no होतिho·ti अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धो,sam·mā·sam·bud·dho धम्मोdham·mo चca देसियतिde·si·ya·ti ओपसमिकोo·pa·sa·mi·ko परिनिब्बानिकोpa·ri·nib·bā·ni·ko सम्बोधगामीsam·bo·dha·gā·mī सुगतप्पवेदितो।su·ga·tap·pa·ve·di·to

      Idhāvuso, tathāgato ca loke uppanno hoti arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca desiyati opasamiko parinibbāniko sambodhagāmī sugatappavedito.

      Firstly, a Realized One has arisen in the world. He teaches the Dhamma leading to peace, extinguishment, awakening, as proclaimed by the Holy One.

1023. 1023

      अयञ्चa·yañ·ca पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      Ayañca puggalo nirayaṁ upapanno hoti.

      But that individual has been reborn in hell.

1024. 1024

      अयंa·yaṃ पठमोpa·ṭha·mo अक्खणोak·kha·ṇo असमयोa·sa·ma·yo ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Ayaṁ paṭhamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.

      This is the first lost opportunity for spiritual practice.

1025. 1025

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तथागतोta·thā·ga·to चca लोकेlo·ke उप्पन्नोup·pan·no होतिho·ti अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धो,sam·mā·sam·bud·dho धम्मोdham·mo चca देसियतिde·si·ya·ti ओपसमिकोo·pa·sa·mi·ko परिनिब्बानिकोpa·ri·nib·bā·ni·ko सम्बोधगामीsam·bo·dha·gā·mī सुगतप्पवेदितो।su·ga·tap·pa·ve·di·to

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, tathāgato ca loke uppanno hoti arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca desiyati opasamiko parinibbāniko sambodhagāmī sugatappavedito.

      Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world …

1026. 1026

      अयञ्चa·yañ·ca पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo तिरच्छानयोनिंti·rac·chā·na·yo·niṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      Ayañca puggalo tiracchānayoniṁ upapanno hoti.

      But that individual has been reborn in the animal realm.

1027. 1027

      अयंa·yaṃ दुतियोdu·ti·yo अक्खणोak·kha·ṇo असमयोa·sa·ma·yo ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Ayaṁ dutiyo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.

      This is the second lost opportunity for spiritual practice.

1028. 1028

      पुनpu·na चपरंca·pa·raṃ …पे…pe

      Puna caparaṁ …pe…

      Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world …

1029. 1029

      पेत्तिविसयंpet·ti·vi·sa·yaṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      pettivisayaṁ upapanno hoti.

      But an individual has been reborn in the ghost realm.

1030. 1030

      अयंa·yaṃ ततियोta·ti·yo अक्खणोak·kha·ṇo असमयोa·sa·ma·yo ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Ayaṁ tatiyo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.

      This is the third lost opportunity for spiritual practice.

1031. 1031

      पुनpu·na चपरंca·pa·raṃ …पे…pe

      Puna caparaṁ …pe…

      Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world …

1032. 1032

      असुरकायंa·su·ra·kā·yaṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      asurakāyaṁ upapanno hoti.

      But that individual has been reborn among the titans.

1033. 1033

      अयंa·yaṃ चतुत्थोca·tut·tho अक्खणोak·kha·ṇo असमयोa·sa·ma·yo ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Ayaṁ catuttho akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.

      This is the fourth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.

1034. 1034

      पुनpu·na चपरंca·pa·raṃ …पे…pe

      Puna caparaṁ …pe…

      Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world …

1035. 1035

      अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ दीघायुकंdī·ghā·yu·kaṃ देवनिकायंde·va·ni·kā·yaṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no होति।ho·ti

      aññataraṁ dīghāyukaṁ devanikāyaṁ upapanno hoti.

      But that individual has been reborn in one of the long-lived orders of gods.

1036. 1036

      अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo अक्खणोak·kha·ṇo असमयोa·sa·ma·yo ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Ayaṁ pañcamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.

      This is the fifth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.

1037. 1037

      पुनpu·na चपरंca·pa·raṃ …पे…pe

      Puna caparaṁ …pe…

      Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world …

1038. 1038

      पच्चन्तिमेसुpac·can·ti·me·su जनपदेसुja·na·pa·de·su पच्चाजातोpac·cā·jā·to होतिho·ti मिलक्खेसुmi·lak·khe·su अविञ्ञातारेसु,a·viñ·ñā·tā·re·su यत्थyat·tha नत्थिnat·thi गतिga·ti भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ भिक्खुनीनंbhik·khu·nī·naṃ उपासकानंu·pā·sa·kā·naṃ उपासिकानं।u·pā·si·kā·naṃ

      paccantimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti milakkhesu aviññātāresu, yattha natthi gati bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ.

      But that individual has been reborn in the borderlands, among uneducated foreigners, where monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen do not go.

1039. 1039

      अयंa·yaṃ छट्ठोchaṭ·ṭho अक्खणोak·kha·ṇo असमयोa·sa·ma·yo ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Ayaṁ chaṭṭho akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.

      This is the sixth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.

1040. 1040

      पुनpu·na चपरंca·pa·raṃ …पे…pe

      Puna caparaṁ …pe…

      Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world …

1041. 1041

      मज्झिमेसुmaj·jhi·me·su जनपदेसुja·na·pa·de·su पच्चाजातोpac·cā·jā·to होति।ho·ti सोso चca होतिho·ti मिच्छादिट्ठिकोmic·chā·diṭ·ṭhi·ko विपरीतदस्सनो:vi·pa·rī·ta·das·sa·no

      majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti. So ca hoti micchādiṭṭhiko viparītadassano:

      And an individual is reborn in a central country. But they have wrong view and distorted perspective:

1042. 1042

      ‘नत्थिnat·thi दिन्नं,din·naṃ नत्थिnat·thi यिट्ठं,yiṭ·ṭhaṃ नत्थिnat·thi हुतं,hu·taṃ नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको,vi·pā·ko नत्थिnat·thi अयंa·yaṃ लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi माता,mā·tā नत्थिnat·thi पिता,pi·tā नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi लोकेlo·ke समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā सम्मग्गताsam·mag·ga·tā सम्मापटिपन्नाsam·mā·pa·ṭi·pan·nā येye इमञ्चi·mañ·ca लोकंlo·kaṃ परञ्चpa·rañ·ca लोकंlo·kaṃ सयंsa·yaṃ अभिञ्ञाa·bhiñ·ñā सच्छिकत्वाsac·chi·kat·vā पवेदेन्ती’ति।pa·ve·den·tī

      ‘natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti.

      ‘There’s no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’

1043. 1043

      अयंa·yaṃ सत्तमोsat·ta·mo अक्खणोak·kha·ṇo असमयोa·sa·ma·yo ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Ayaṁ sattamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.

      This is the seventh lost opportunity for spiritual practice.

1044. 1044

      पुनpu·na चपरंca·pa·raṃ …पे…pe

      Puna caparaṁ …pe…

      Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world …

1045. 1045

      मज्झिमेसुmaj·jhi·me·su जनपदेसुja·na·pa·de·su पच्चाजातोpac·cā·jā·to होति।ho·ti सोso चca होतिho·ti दुप्पञ्ञोdup·pañ·ño जळोja·ḷo एळमूगो,e·ḷa·mū·go नप्पटिबलोnap·pa·ṭi·ba·lo सुभासितदुब्भासितानमत्थमञ्ञातुं।su·bhā·si·ta·dub·bhā·si·tā·na·mat·tha·mañ·ñā·tuṃ

      majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti. So ca hoti duppañño jaḷo eḷamūgo, nappaṭibalo subhāsitadubbhāsitānamatthamaññātuṁ.

      And an individual is reborn in a central country. But they’re witless, dull, idiotic, and unable to distinguish what is well said from what is poorly said.

1046. 1046

      अयंa·yaṃ अट्ठमोaṭ·ṭha·mo अक्खणोak·kha·ṇo असमयोa·sa·ma·yo ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.

      This is the eighth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.

1047. 1047

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तथागतोta·thā·ga·to चca लोकेlo·ke नna उप्पन्नोup·pan·no होतिho·ti अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धो,sam·mā·sam·bud·dho

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, tathāgato ca loke na uppanno hoti arahaṁ sammāsambuddho,

      Furthermore, no Realized One has arisen in the world,

1048. 1048

      धम्मोdham·mo चca नna देसियतिde·si·ya·ti ओपसमिकोo·pa·sa·mi·ko परिनिब्बानिकोpa·ri·nib·bā·ni·ko सम्बोधगामीsam·bo·dha·gā·mī सुगतप्पवेदितो।su·ga·tap·pa·ve·di·to अयञ्चa·yañ·ca पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo मज्झिमेसुmaj·jhi·me·su जनपदेसुja·na·pa·de·su पच्चाजातोpac·cā·jā·to होति,ho·ti सोso चca होतिho·ti पञ्ञवाpañ·ña·vā अजळोa·ja·ḷo अनेळमूगो,a·ne·ḷa·mū·go पटिबलोpa·ṭi·ba·lo सुभासितदुब्भासितानमत्थमञ्ञातुं।su·bhā·si·ta·dub·bhā·si·tā·na·mat·tha·mañ·ñā·tuṃ

      dhammo ca na desiyati opasamiko parinibbāniko sambodhagāmī sugatappavedito. Ayañca puggalo majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti, so ca hoti paññavā ajaḷo aneḷamūgo, paṭibalo subhāsitadubbhāsitānamatthamaññātuṁ.

      so there is no teaching of the Dhamma leading to peace, extinguishment, awakening, as proclaimed by the Holy One. But an individual is reborn in a central country. And they’re wise, bright, clever, and able to distinguish what is well said from what is poorly said.

1049. 1049

      अयंa·yaṃ नवमोna·va·mo अक्खणोak·kha·ṇo असमयोa·sa·ma·yo ब्रह्मचरियवासाय।brah·ma·ca·ri·ya·vā·sā·ya

      Ayaṁ navamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.

      This is the ninth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.

1050. 1050

      नवna·va अनुपुब्बविहारा।a·nu·pub·ba·vi·hā·rā

      Nava anupubbavihārā.

      <b>Nine progressive meditations:</b>

1051. 1051

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu विविच्चेवvi·vic·ce·va कामेहिkā·me·hi विविच्चvi·vic·ca अकुसलेहिa·ku·sa·le·hi धम्मेहिdham·me·hi सवितक्कंsa·vi·tak·kaṃ सविचारंsa·vi·cā·raṃ विवेकजंvi·ve·ka·jaṃ पीतिसुखंpī·ti·su·khaṃ पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      A mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected.

1052. 1052

      वितक्कविचारानंvi·tak·ka·vi·cā·rā·naṃ वूपसमाvū·pa·sa·mā …पे…pe दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected.

1053. 1053

      पीतियाpī·ti·yā चca विरागाvi·rā·gā …पे…pe ततियंta·ti·yaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’

1054. 1054

      सुखस्सsu·khas·sa चca पहानाpa·hā·nā …पे…pe चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.

1055. 1055

      सब्बसोsab·ba·so रूपसञ्ञानंrū·pa·sañ·ñā·naṃ समतिक्कमाsa·ma·tik·ka·mā …पे…pe आकासानञ्चायतनंā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā …pe… ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space.

1056. 1056

      सब्बसोsab·ba·so आकासानञ्चायतनंā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘अनन्तंa·nan·taṃ विञ्ञाणन्’तिviñ·ñā·ṇan विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनंviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness.

1057. 1057

      सब्बसोsab·ba·so विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनंviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma ‘नत्थिnat·thi किञ्ची’तिkiñ·cī आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनंā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness.

1058. 1058

      सब्बसोsab·ba·so आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनंā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma नेवसञ्ञानासञ्ञायतनंne·va·sañ·ñā·nā·sañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.

1059. 1059

      सब्बसोsab·ba·so नेवसञ्ञानासञ्ञायतनंne·va·sañ·ñā·nā·sañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ समतिक्कम्मsa·ma·tik·kam·ma सञ्ञावेदयितनिरोधंsañ·ñā·ve·da·yi·ta·ni·ro·dhaṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling.

1060. 1060

      नवna·va अनुपुब्बनिरोधा।a·nu·pub·ba·ni·ro·dhā

      Nava anupubbanirodhā.

      <b>Nine progressive cessations:</b>

1061. 1061

      पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ झानंjhā·naṃ समापन्नस्सsa·mā·pan·nas·sa कामसञ्ञाkā·ma·sañ·ñā निरुद्धाni·rud·dhā होति।ho·ti

      Paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa kāmasaññā niruddhā hoti.

      For someone who has attained the first absorption, sensual perceptions have ceased.

1062. 1062

      दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ समापन्नस्सsa·mā·pan·nas·sa वितक्कविचाराvi·tak·ka·vi·cā·rā निरुद्धाni·rud·dhā होन्ति।hon·ti

      Dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa vitakkavicārā niruddhā honti.

      For someone who has attained the second absorption, the placing of the mind and keeping it connected have ceased.

1063. 1063

      ततियंta·ti·yaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ समापन्नस्सsa·mā·pan·nas·sa पीतिpī·ti निरुद्धाni·rud·dhā होति।ho·ti

      Tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa pīti niruddhā hoti.

      For someone who has attained the third absorption, rapture has ceased.

1064. 1064

      चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ समापन्नस्सsa·mā·pan·nas·sa अस्सासपस्सास्साas·sā·sa·pas·sās·sā निरुद्धाni·rud·dhā होन्ति।hon·ti

      Catutthaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa assāsapassāssā niruddhā honti.

      For someone who has attained the fourth absorption, breathing has ceased.

1065. 1065

      आकासानञ्चायतनंā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समापन्नस्सsa·mā·pan·nas·sa रूपसञ्ञाrū·pa·sañ·ñā निरुद्धाni·rud·dhā होति।ho·ti

      Ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samāpannassa rūpasaññā niruddhā hoti.

      For someone who has attained the dimension of infinite space, the perception of form has ceased.

1066. 1066

      विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनंviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ समापन्नस्सsa·mā·pan·nas·sa आकासानञ्चायतनसञ्ञाā·kā·sā·nañ·cā·ya·ta·na·sañ·ñā निरुद्धाni·rud·dhā होति।ho·ti

      Viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samāpannassa ākāsānañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti.

      For someone who has attained the dimension of infinite consciousness, the perception of the dimension of infinite space has ceased.

1067. 1067

      आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनंā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ समापन्नस्सsa·mā·pan·nas·sa विञ्ञाणञ्चायतनसञ्ञाviñ·ñā·ṇañ·cā·ya·ta·na·sañ·ñā निरुद्धाni·rud·dhā होति।ho·ti

      Ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpannassa viññāṇañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti.

      For someone who has attained the dimension of nothingness, the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness has ceased.

1068. 1068

      नेवसञ्ञानासञ्ञायतनंne·va·sañ·ñā·nā·sañ·ñā·ya·ta·naṃ समापन्नस्सsa·mā·pan·nas·sa आकिञ्चञ्ञायतनसञ्ञाā·kiñ·cañ·ñā·ya·ta·na·sañ·ñā निरुद्धाni·rud·dhā होति।ho·ti

      Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samāpannassa ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti.

      For someone who has attained the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, the perception of the dimension of nothingness has ceased.

1069. 1069

      सञ्ञावेदयितनिरोधंsañ·ñā·ve·da·yi·ta·ni·ro·dhaṃ समापन्नस्सsa·mā·pan·nas·sa सञ्ञाsañ·ñā चca वेदनाve·da·nā चca निरुद्धाni·rud·dhā होन्ति।hon·ti

      Saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpannassa saññā ca vedanā ca niruddhā honti.

      For someone who has attained the cessation of perception and feeling, perception and feeling have ceased.

1070. 1070

      इमेi·me खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na नवna·va धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता।sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

      Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena nava dhammā sammadakkhātā.

      These are the teachings grouped by nine that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

1071. 1071

      तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

      Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

      You should all recite these in concert.

1072. 1072

      10। दसकda·sa·ka

      10. Dasaka

      10. Tens

1073. 1073

      अत्थिat·thi खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na दसda·sa धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता।sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

      Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dasa dhammā sammadakkhātā.

      There are teachings grouped by ten that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

1074. 1074

      तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ …पे…pe अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

      Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

      You should all recite these in concert.

1075. 1075

      कतमेka·ta·me दस?da·sa

      Katame dasa?

      What are the teachings grouped by ten?

1076. 1076

      दसda·sa नाथकरणाnā·tha·ka·ra·ṇā धम्मा।dham·mā

      Dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā.

      <b>Ten qualities that serve as protector:</b>

1077. 1077

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सीलवाsī·la·vā होति।ho·ti पातिमोक्खसंवरसंवुतोpā·ti·mok·kha·saṃ·va·ra·saṃ·vu·to विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti आचारगोचरसम्पन्नो,ā·cā·ra·go·ca·ra·sam·pan·no अणुमत्तेसुa·ṇu·mat·te·su वज्जेसुvaj·je·su भयदस्सावीbha·ya·das·sā·vī समादायsa·mā·dā·ya सिक्खतिsik·kha·ti सिक्खापदेसु।sik·khā·pa·de·su

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti. Pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu.

      Firstly, a mendicant is ethical, restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken.

1078. 1078

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सीलवाsī·la·vā होति,ho·ti पातिमोक्खसंवरसंवुतोpā·ti·mok·kha·saṃ·va·ra·saṃ·vu·to विहरति,vi·ha·ra·ti आचारगोचरसम्पन्नो,ā·cā·ra·go·ca·ra·sam·pan·no अणुमत्तेसुa·ṇu·mat·te·su वज्जेसुvaj·je·su भयदस्सावीbha·ya·das·sā·vī समादायsa·mā·dā·ya सिक्खतिsik·kha·ti सिक्खापदेसु।sik·khā·pa·de·su

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati, ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu.

      (Pāli only)

1079. 1079

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This is a quality that serves as protector.

1080. 1080

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to होतिho·ti सुतधरोsu·ta·dha·ro सुतसन्निचयो।su·ta·san·ni·ca·yo येye तेte धम्माdham·mā आदिकल्याणाā·di·kal·yā·ṇā मज्झेकल्याणाmaj·jhe·kal·yā·ṇā परियोसानकल्याणाpa·ri·yo·sā·na·kal·yā·ṇā सात्थाsāt·thā सब्यञ्जनाsab·yañ·ja·nā केवलपरिपुण्णंke·va·la·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अभिवदन्ति,a·bhi·va·dan·ti तथारूपास्सta·thā·rū·pās·sa धम्माdham·mā बहुस्सुताba·hus·su·tā होन्तिhon·ti धाताdhā·tā वचसाva·ca·sā परिचिताpa·ri·ci·tā मनसानुपेक्खिताma·na·sā·nu·pek·khi·tā दिट्ठियाdiṭ·ṭhi·yā सुप्पटिविद्धा।sup·pa·ṭi·vid·dhā

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo. Ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā majjhekalyāṇā pariyosānakalyāṇā sātthā sabyañjanā kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti, tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā honti dhātā vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā.

      Furthermore, a mendicant is very learned, remembering and keeping what they’ve learned. These teachings are good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased, describing a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. They are very learned in such teachings, remembering them, rehearsing them, mentally scrutinizing them, and penetrating them theoretically.

1081. 1081

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to होतिho·ti …पे…pe दिट्ठियाdiṭ·ṭhi·yā सुप्पटिविद्धा।sup·pa·ṭi·vid·dhā

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu bahussuto hoti …pe… diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā.

      (Pāli only)

1082. 1082

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This too is a quality that serves as protector.

1083. 1083

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu कल्याणमित्तोkal·yā·ṇa·mit·to होतिho·ti कल्याणसहायोkal·yā·ṇa·sa·hā·yo कल्याणसम्पवङ्को।kal·yā·ṇa·sam·pa·vaṅ·ko

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto hoti kalyāṇasahāyo kalyāṇasampavaṅko.

      Furthermore, a mendicant has good friends, companions, and associates.

1084. 1084

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu कल्याणमित्तोkal·yā·ṇa·mit·to होतिho·ti कल्याणसहायोkal·yā·ṇa·sa·hā·yo कल्याणसम्पवङ्को।kal·yā·ṇa·sam·pa·vaṅ·ko

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto hoti kalyāṇasahāyo kalyāṇasampavaṅko.

      (Pāli only)

1085. 1085

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This too is a quality that serves as protector.

1086. 1086

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सुवचोsu·va·co होतिho·ti सोवचस्सकरणेहिso·va·cas·sa·ka·ra·ṇe·hi धम्मेहिdham·me·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to खमोkha·mo पदक्खिणग्गाहीpa·dak·khi·ṇag·gā·hī अनुसासनिं।a·nu·sā·sa·niṃ

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu suvaco hoti sovacassakaraṇehi dhammehi samannāgato khamo padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsaniṁ.

      Furthermore, a mendicant is easy to admonish, having qualities that make them easy to admonish. They’re patient, and take instruction respectfully.

1087. 1087

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सुवचोsu·va·co होतिho·ti …पे…pe पदक्खिणग्गाहीpa·dak·khi·ṇag·gā·hī अनुसासनिं।a·nu·sā·sa·niṃ

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu suvaco hoti …pe… padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsaniṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1088. 1088

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This too is a quality that serves as protector.

1089. 1089

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu यानिyā·ni तानिtā·ni सब्रह्मचारीनंsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·naṃ उच्चावचानिuc·cā·va·cā·ni किङ्करणीयानि,kiṅ·ka·ra·ṇī·yā·ni तत्थtat·tha दक्खोdak·kho होतिho·ti अनलसोa·na·la·so तत्रुपायायtat·ru·pā·yā·ya वीमंसायvī·maṃ·sā·ya समन्नागतो,sa·man·nā·ga·to अलंa·laṃ कातुंkā·tuṃ अलंa·laṃ संविधातुं।saṃ·vi·dhā·tuṃ

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṁ uccāvacāni kiṅkaraṇīyāni, tattha dakkho hoti analaso tatrupāyāya vīmaṁsāya samannāgato, alaṁ kātuṁ alaṁ saṁvidhātuṁ.

      Furthermore, a mendicant is deft and tireless in a diverse spectrum of duties for their spiritual companions, understanding how to go about things in order to complete and organize the work.

1090. 1090

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu यानिyā·ni तानिtā·ni सब्रह्मचारीनंsab·rah·ma·cā·rī·naṃ …पे…pe अलंa·laṃ संविधातुं।saṃ·vi·dhā·tuṃ

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṁ …pe… alaṁ saṁvidhātuṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1091. 1091

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This too is a quality that serves as protector.

1092. 1092

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मकामोdham·ma·kā·mo होतिho·ti पियसमुदाहारो,pi·ya·sa·mu·dā·hā·ro अभिधम्मेa·bhi·dham·me अभिविनयेa·bhi·vi·na·ye उळारपामोज्जो।u·ḷā·ra·pā·moj·jo

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu dhammakāmo hoti piyasamudāhāro, abhidhamme abhivinaye uḷārapāmojjo.

      Furthermore, a mendicant loves the teachings and is a delight to converse with, being full of joy in the teaching and training.

1093. 1093

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मकामोdham·ma·kā·mo होतिho·ti …पे…pe उळारपामोज्जो।u·ḷā·ra·pā·moj·jo

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu dhammakāmo hoti …pe… uḷārapāmojjo.

      (Pāli only)

1094. 1094

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This too is a quality that serves as protector.

1095. 1095

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्तुट्ठोsan·tuṭ·ṭho होतिho·ti इतरीतरेहिi·ta·rī·ta·re·hi चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारेहि।cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·re·hi

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti itarītarehi cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi.

      Furthermore, a mendicant is content with any kind of robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick.

1096. 1096

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्तुट्ठोsan·tuṭ·ṭho होतिho·ti …पे…pe परिक्खारेहि।pa·rik·khā·re·hi

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti …pe… parikkhārehi.

      (Pāli only)

1097. 1097

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This too is a quality that serves as protector.

1098. 1098

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu आरद्धवीरियोā·rad·dha·vī·ri·yo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ पहानायpa·hā·nā·ya कुसलानंku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ उपसम्पदाय,u·pa·sam·pa·dā·ya थामवाthā·ma·vā दळ्हपरक्कमोda·ḷha·pa·rak·ka·mo अनिक्खित्तधुरोa·nik·khit·ta·dhu·ro कुसलेसुku·sa·le·su धम्मेसु।dham·me·su

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu āraddhavīriyo viharati akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadāya, thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu.

      Furthermore, a mendicant lives with energy roused up for giving up unskillful qualities and embracing skillful qualities. They are strong, staunchly vigorous, not slacking off when it comes to developing skillful qualities.

1099. 1099

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu आरद्धवीरियोā·rad·dha·vī·ri·yo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti …पे…pe अनिक्खित्तधुरोa·nik·khit·ta·dhu·ro कुसलेसुku·sa·le·su धम्मेसु।dham·me·su

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu āraddhavīriyo viharati …pe… anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu.

      (Pāli only)

1100. 1100

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This too is a quality that serves as protector.

1101. 1101

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सतिमाsa·ti·mā होतिho·ti परमेनpa·ra·me·na सतिनेपक्केनsa·ti·ne·pak·ke·na समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to चिरकतम्पिci·ra·ka·tam·pi चिरभासितम्पिci·ra·bhā·si·tam·pi सरिताsa·ri·tā अनुस्सरिता।a·nus·sa·ri·tā

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu satimā hoti paramena satinepakkena samannāgato cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā anussaritā.

      Furthermore, a mendicant is mindful. They have utmost mindfulness and alertness, and can remember and recall what was said and done long ago.

1102. 1102

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सतिमाsa·ti·mā होतिho·ti …पे…pe सरिताsa·ri·tā अनुस्सरिता।a·nus·sa·ri·tā

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu satimā hoti …pe… saritā anussaritā.

      (Pāli only)

1103. 1103

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This too is a quality that serves as protector.

1104. 1104

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पञ्ञवाpañ·ña·vā होति,ho·ti उदयत्थगामिनियाu·da·yat·tha·gā·mi·ni·yā पञ्ञायpañ·ñā·ya समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to अरियायa·ri·yā·ya निब्बेधिकायnib·be·dhi·kā·ya सम्मादुक्खक्खयगामिनिया।sam·mā·duk·khak·kha·ya·gā·mi·ni·yā

      Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu paññavā hoti, udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammādukkhakkhayagāminiyā.

      Furthermore, a mendicant is wise. They have the wisdom of arising and passing away which is noble, penetrative, and leads to the complete ending of suffering.

1105. 1105

      यंपावुसो,yaṃ·pā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पञ्ञवाpañ·ña·vā होतिho·ti …पे…pe सम्मादुक्खक्खयगामिनिया।sam·mā·duk·khak·kha·ya·gā·mi·ni·yā

      Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu paññavā hoti …pe… sammādukkhakkhayagāminiyā.

      (Pāli only)

1106. 1106

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi धम्मोdham·mo नाथकरणो।nā·tha·ka·ra·ṇo

      Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.

      This too is a quality that serves as protector.

1107. 1107

      दसda·sa कसिणायतनानि।ka·si·ṇā·ya·ta·nā·ni

      Dasa kasiṇāyatanāni.

      <b>Ten universal dimensions of meditation:</b>

1108. 1108

      पथवीकसिणमेकोpa·tha·vī·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानाति,sañ·jā·nā·ti उद्धंud·dhaṃ अधोa·dho तिरियंti·ri·yaṃ अद्वयंad·va·yaṃ अप्पमाणं।ap·pa·mā·ṇaṃ

      Pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti, uddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ advayaṁ appamāṇaṁ.

      Someone perceives the meditation on universal earth above, below, across, undivided and limitless.

1109. 1109

      आपोकसिणमेकोā·po·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानातिsañ·jā·nā·ti …पे…pe

      Āpokasiṇameko sañjānāti …pe…

      They perceive the meditation on universal water …

1110. 1110

      तेजोकसिणमेकोte·jo·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानातिsañ·jā·nā·ti …

      tejokasiṇameko sañjānāti …

      the meditation on universal fire …

1111. 1111

      वायोकसिणमेकोvā·yo·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानातिsañ·jā·nā·ti …

      vāyokasiṇameko sañjānāti …

      the meditation on universal air …

1112. 1112

      नीलकसिणमेकोnī·la·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानातिsañ·jā·nā·ti …

      nīlakasiṇameko sañjānāti …

      the meditation on universal blue …

1113. 1113

      पीतकसिणमेकोpī·ta·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानातिsañ·jā·nā·ti …

      pītakasiṇameko sañjānāti …

      the meditation on universal yellow …

1114. 1114

      लोहितकसिणमेकोlo·hi·ta·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानातिsañ·jā·nā·ti …

      lohitakasiṇameko sañjānāti …

      the meditation on universal red …

1115. 1115

      ओदातकसिणमेकोo·dā·ta·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानातिsañ·jā·nā·ti …

      odātakasiṇameko sañjānāti …

      the meditation on universal white …

1116. 1116

      आकासकसिणमेकोā·kā·sa·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानातिsañ·jā·nā·ti …

      ākāsakasiṇameko sañjānāti …

      the meditation on universal space …

1117. 1117

      विञ्ञाणकसिणमेकोviñ·ñā·ṇa·ka·si·ṇa·me·ko सञ्जानाति,sañ·jā·nā·ti उद्धंud·dhaṃ अधोa·dho तिरियंti·ri·yaṃ अद्वयंad·va·yaṃ अप्पमाणं।ap·pa·mā·ṇaṃ

      viññāṇakasiṇameko sañjānāti, uddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ advayaṁ appamāṇaṁ.

      They perceive the meditation on universal consciousness above, below, across, undivided and limitless.

1118. 1118

      दसda·sa अकुसलकम्मपथा—a·ku·sa·la·kam·ma·pa·thā

      Dasa akusalakammapathā—

      <b>Ten ways of doing unskillful deeds:</b>

1119. 1119

      पाणातिपातो,pā·ṇā·ti·pā·to अदिन्नादानं,a·din·nā·dā·naṃ कामेसुमिच्छाचारो,kā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·ro मुसावादो,mu·sā·vā·do पिसुणाpi·su·ṇā वाचा,vā·cā फरुसाpha·ru·sā वाचा,vā·cā सम्फप्पलापो,sam·phap·pa·lā·po अभिज्झा,a·bhij·jhā ब्यापादो,byā·pā·do मिच्छादिट्ठि।mic·chā·diṭ·ṭhi

      pāṇātipāto, adinnādānaṁ, kāmesumicchācāro, musāvādo, pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpo, abhijjhā, byāpādo, micchādiṭṭhi.

      killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; covetousness, ill will, and wrong view.

1120. 1120

      दसda·sa कुसलकम्मपथा—ku·sa·la·kam·ma·pa·thā

      Dasa kusalakammapathā—

      <b>Ten ways of doing skillful deeds:</b>

1121. 1121

      पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī पिसुणायpi·su·ṇā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī फरुसायpha·ru·sā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī सम्फप्पलापाsam·phap·pa·lā·pā वेरमणी,ve·ra·ma·ṇī अनभिज्झा,a·na·bhij·jhā अब्यापादो,ab·yā·pā·do सम्मादिट्ठि।sam·mā·diṭ·ṭhi

      pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, adinnādānā veramaṇī, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī, musāvādā veramaṇī, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī, samphappalāpā veramaṇī, anabhijjhā, abyāpādo, sammādiṭṭhi.

      refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; refraining from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; contentment, good will, and right view.

1122. 1122

      दसda·sa अरियवासा।a·ri·ya·vā·sā

      Dasa ariyavāsā.

      <b>Ten abodes of the noble ones:</b>

1123. 1123

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पञ्चङ्गविप्पहीनोpañ·caṅ·ga·vip·pa·hī·no होति,ho·ti छळङ्गसमन्नागतो,cha·ḷaṅ·ga·sa·man·nā·ga·to एकारक्खो,e·kā·rak·kho चतुरापस्सेनो,ca·tu·rā·pas·se·no पणुन्नपच्चेकसच्चो,pa·ṇun·na·pac·ce·ka·sac·co समवयसट्ठेसनो,sa·ma·va·ya·saṭ·ṭhe·sa·no अनाविलसङ्कप्पो,a·nā·vi·la·saṅ·kap·po पस्सद्धकायसङ्खारो,pas·sad·dha·kā·ya·saṅ·khā·ro सुविमुत्तचित्तो,su·vi·mut·ta·cit·to सुविमुत्तपञ्ञो।su·vi·mut·ta·pañ·ño

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti, chaḷaṅgasamannāgato, ekārakkho, caturāpasseno, paṇunnapaccekasacco, samavayasaṭṭhesano, anāvilasaṅkappo, passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro, suvimuttacitto, suvimuttapañño.

      A mendicant has given up five factors, possesses six factors, has a single guard, has four supports, has cast aside idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth, has totally given up searching, has unsullied intentions, has stilled the physical process, and is well freed in mind and well freed by wisdom.

1124. 1124

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पञ्चङ्गविप्पहीनोpañ·caṅ·ga·vip·pa·hī·no होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti?

      And how has a mendicant given up five factors?

1125. 1125

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no कामच्छन्दोkā·mac·chan·do पहीनोpa·hī·no होति,ho·ti ब्यापादोbyā·pā·do पहीनोpa·hī·no होति,ho·ti थिनमिद्धंthi·na·mid·dhaṃ पहीनंpa·hī·naṃ होति,ho·ti उद्धच्चकुक्कुच्चंud·dhac·ca·kuk·kuc·caṃ पहीनंpa·hī·naṃ होति,ho·ti विचिकिच्छाvi·ci·kic·chā पहीनाpa·hī·nā होति।ho·ti

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmacchando pahīno hoti, byāpādo pahīno hoti, thinamiddhaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, vicikicchā pahīnā hoti.

      It’s when a mendicant has given up sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt.

1126. 1126

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पञ्चङ्गविप्पहीनोpañ·caṅ·ga·vip·pa·hī·no होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant has given up five factors.

1127. 1127

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu छळङ्गसमन्नागतोcha·ḷaṅ·ga·sa·man·nā·ga·to होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti?

      And how does a mendicant possess six factors?

1128. 1128

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā रूपंrū·paṃ दिस्वाdis·vā नेवne·va सुमनोsu·ma·no होतिho·ti नna दुम्मनो,dum·ma·no उपेक्खकोu·pek·kha·ko विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सतोsa·to सम्पजानो।sam·pa·jā·no

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno.

      A mendicant, seeing a sight with their eyes, is neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware.

1129. 1129

      सोतेनso·te·na सद्दंsad·daṃ सुत्वाsut·vā …पे…pe

      Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe…

      Hearing a sound with their ears … Smelling an odor with their nose … Tasting a flavor with their tongue … Encountering a touch with their body …

1130. 1130

      मनसाma·na·sā धम्मंdham·maṃ विञ्ञायviñ·ñā·ya नेवne·va सुमनोsu·ma·no होतिho·ti नna दुम्मनो,dum·ma·no उपेक्खकोu·pek·kha·ko विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti सतोsa·to सम्पजानो।sam·pa·jā·no

      manasā dhammaṁ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno.

      Knowing an idea with their mind, they’re neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware.

1131. 1131

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu छळङ्गसमन्नागतोcha·ḷaṅ·ga·sa·man·nā·ga·to होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant possesses six factors.

1132. 1132

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu एकारक्खोe·kā·rak·kho होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti?

      And how does a mendicant have a single guard?

1133. 1133

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सतारक्खेनsa·tā·rak·khe·na चेतसाce·ta·sā समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to होति।ho·ti

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satārakkhena cetasā samannāgato hoti.

      It’s when a mendicant’s heart is guarded by mindfulness.

1134. 1134

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu एकारक्खोe·kā·rak·kho होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant has a single guard.

1135. 1135

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu चतुरापस्सेनोca·tu·rā·pas·se·no होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti?

      And how does a mendicant have four supports?

1136. 1136

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्खायेकंsaṅ·khā·ye·kaṃ पटिसेवति,pa·ṭi·se·va·ti सङ्खायेकंsaṅ·khā·ye·kaṃ अधिवासेति,a·dhi·vā·se·ti सङ्खायेकंsaṅ·khā·ye·kaṃ परिवज्जेति,pa·ri·vaj·je·ti सङ्खायेकंsaṅ·khā·ye·kaṃ विनोदेति।vi·no·de·ti

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhu saṅkhāyekaṁ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṁ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṁ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṁ vinodeti.

      After appraisal, a mendicant uses some things, endures some things, avoids some things, and dispels some things.

1137. 1137

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu चतुरापस्सेनोca·tu·rā·pas·se·no होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant has four supports.

1138. 1138

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पणुन्नपच्चेकसच्चोpa·ṇun·na·pac·ce·ka·sac·co होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu paṇunnapaccekasacco hoti?

      And how has a mendicant cast aside idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth?

1139. 1139

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no यानिyā·ni तानिtā·ni पुथुसमणब्राह्मणानंpu·thu·sa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā·naṃ पुथुपच्चेकसच्चानि,pu·thu·pac·ce·ka·sac·cā·ni सब्बानिsab·bā·ni तानिtā·ni नुन्नानिnun·nā·ni होन्तिhon·ti पणुन्नानिpa·ṇun·nā·ni चत्तानिcat·tā·ni वन्तानिvan·tā·ni मुत्तानिmut·tā·ni पहीनानिpa·hī·nā·ni पटिनिस्सट्ठानि।pa·ṭi·nis·saṭ·ṭhā·ni

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno yāni tāni puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ puthupaccekasaccāni, sabbāni tāni nunnāni honti paṇunnāni cattāni vantāni muttāni pahīnāni paṭinissaṭṭhāni.

      Different ascetics and brahmins have different idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth. A mendicant has cast out, cast aside, thrown out, discarded, let go of, given up, and relinquished all these.

1140. 1140

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पणुन्नपच्चेकसच्चोpa·ṇun·na·pac·ce·ka·sac·co होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu paṇunnapaccekasacco hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant has cast aside idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth.

1141. 1141

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu समवयसट्ठेसनोsa·ma·va·ya·saṭ·ṭhe·sa·no होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti?

      And how has a mendicant totally given up searching?

1142. 1142

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no कामेसनाkā·me·sa·nā पहीनाpa·hī·nā होति,ho·ti भवेसनाbha·ve·sa·nā पहीनाpa·hī·nā होति,ho·ti ब्रह्मचरियेसनाbrah·ma·ca·ri·ye·sa·nā पटिप्पस्सद्धा।pa·ṭip·pas·sad·dhā

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmesanā pahīnā hoti, bhavesanā pahīnā hoti, brahmacariyesanā paṭippassaddhā.

      It’s when they’ve given up searching for sensual pleasures, for continued existence, and for a spiritual path.

1143. 1143

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu समवयसट्ठेसनोsa·ma·va·ya·saṭ·ṭhe·sa·no होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant has totally given up searching.

1144. 1144

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अनाविलसङ्कप्पोa·nā·vi·la·saṅ·kap·po होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti?

      And how does a mendicant have unsullied intentions?

1145. 1145

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no कामसङ्कप्पोkā·ma·saṅ·kap·po पहीनोpa·hī·no होति,ho·ti ब्यापादसङ्कप्पोbyā·pā·da·saṅ·kap·po पहीनोpa·hī·no होति,ho·ti विहिंसासङ्कप्पोvi·hiṃ·sā·saṅ·kap·po पहीनोpa·hī·no होति।ho·ti

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, byāpādasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, vihiṁsāsaṅkappo pahīno hoti.

      It’s when they’ve given up sensual, malicious, and cruel intentions.

1146. 1146

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu अनाविलसङ्कप्पोa·nā·vi·la·saṅ·kap·po होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant has unsullied intentions.

1147. 1147

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पस्सद्धकायसङ्खारोpas·sad·dha·kā·ya·saṅ·khā·ro होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti?

      And how has a mendicant stilled the physical process?

1148. 1148

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सुखस्सsu·khas·sa चca पहानाpa·hā·nā दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa चca पहानाpa·hā·nā पुब्बेवpub·be·va सोमनस्सदोमनस्सानंso·ma·nas·sa·do·ma·nas·sā·naṃ अत्थङ्गमाat·thaṅ·ga·mā अदुक्खमसुखंa·duk·kha·ma·su·khaṃ उपेक्खासतिपारिसुद्धिंu·pek·khā·sa·ti·pā·ri·sud·dhiṃ चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ झानंjhā·naṃ उपसम्पज्जu·pa·sam·paj·ja विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.

      It’s when, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.

1149. 1149

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu पस्सद्धकायसङ्खारोpas·sad·dha·kā·ya·saṅ·khā·ro होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant has stilled the physical process.

1150. 1150

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सुविमुत्तचित्तोsu·vi·mut·ta·cit·to होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti?

      And how is a mendicant well freed in mind?

1151. 1151

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no रागाrā·gā चित्तंcit·taṃ विमुत्तंvi·mut·taṃ होति,ho·ti दोसाdo·sā चित्तंcit·taṃ विमुत्तंvi·mut·taṃ होति,ho·ti मोहाmo·hā चित्तंcit·taṃ विमुत्तंvi·mut·taṃ होति।ho·ti

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno rāgā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ hoti, dosā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ hoti, mohā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ hoti.

      It’s when a mendicant’s mind is freed from greed, hate, and delusion.

1152. 1152

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सुविमुत्तचित्तोsu·vi·mut·ta·cit·to होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant is well freed in mind.

1153. 1153

      कथञ्चावुसो,ka·thañ·cā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सुविमुत्तपञ्ञोsu·vi·mut·ta·pañ·ño होति?ho·ti

      Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hoti?

      And how is a mendicant well freed by wisdom?

1154. 1154

      इधावुसो,i·dhā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu ‘रागोrā·go मेme पहीनोpa·hī·no उच्छिन्नमूलोuc·chin·na·mū·lo तालावत्थुकतोtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·to अनभावङ्कतोa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·to आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मो’तिa·nup·pā·da·dham·mo पजानाति।pa·jā·nā·ti

      Idhāvuso, bhikkhu ‘rāgo me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti.

      It’s when a mendicant understands: ‘I’ve given up greed, hate, and delusion, cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, obliterated them, so they’re unable to arise in the future.’

1155. 1155

      ‘दोसोdo·so मेme पहीनोpa·hī·no उच्छिन्नमूलोuc·chin·na·mū·lo तालावत्थुकतोtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·to अनभावङ्कतोa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·to आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मो’तिa·nup·pā·da·dham·mo पजानाति।pa·jā·nā·ti

      ‘Doso me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti.

      (Pāli only)

1156. 1156

      ‘मोहोmo·ho मेme पहीनोpa·hī·no उच्छिन्नमूलोuc·chin·na·mū·lo तालावत्थुकतोtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·to अनभावङ्कतोa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·to आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मो’तिa·nup·pā·da·dham·mo पजानाति।pa·jā·nā·ti

      ‘Moho me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti.

      (Pāli only)

1157. 1157

      एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so भिक्खुbhik·khu सुविमुत्तपञ्ञोsu·vi·mut·ta·pañ·ño होति।ho·ti

      Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hoti.

      That’s how a mendicant’s mind is well freed by wisdom.

1158. 1158

      दसda·sa असेक्खाa·sek·khā धम्मा—dham·mā

      Dasa asekkhā dhammā—

      <b>Ten qualities of an adept:</b>

1159. 1159

      असेक्खाa·sek·khā सम्मादिट्ठि,sam·mā·diṭ·ṭhi असेक्खोa·sek·kho सम्मासङ्कप्पो,sam·mā·saṅ·kap·po असेक्खाa·sek·khā सम्मावाचा,sam·mā·vā·cā असेक्खोa·sek·kho सम्माकम्मन्तो,sam·mā·kam·man·to असेक्खोa·sek·kho सम्माआजीवो,sam·mā·ā·jī·vo असेक्खोa·sek·kho सम्मावायामो,sam·mā·vā·yā·mo असेक्खाa·sek·khā सम्मासति,sam·mā·sa·ti असेक्खोa·sek·kho सम्मासमाधि,sam·mā·sa·mā·dhi असेक्खंa·sek·khaṃ सम्माञाणं,sam·mā·ñā·ṇaṃ असेक्खाa·sek·khā सम्माविमुत्ति।sam·mā·vi·mut·ti

      asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi, asekkho sammāsaṅkappo, asekkhā sammāvācā, asekkho sammākammanto, asekkho sammāājīvo, asekkho sammāvāyāmo, asekkhā sammāsati, asekkho sammāsamādhi, asekkhaṁ sammāñāṇaṁ, asekkhā sammāvimutti.

      an adept’s right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right immersion, right knowledge, and right freedom.

1160. 1160

      इमेi·me खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā जानताjā·na·tā पस्सताpas·sa·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेनsam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na दसda·sa धम्माdham·mā सम्मदक्खाता।sam·ma·dak·khā·tā

      Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dasa dhammā sammadakkhātā.

      Reverends, these are the teachings grouped by ten that have been rightly explained by the Buddha.

1161. 1161

      तत्थtat·tha सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va सङ्गायितब्बंsaṅ·gā·yi·tab·baṃ नna विवदितब्बं,vi·va·di·tab·baṃ यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अद्धनियंad·dha·ni·yaṃ अस्सas·sa चिरट्ठितिकं,ci·raṭ·ṭhi·ti·kaṃ तदस्सta·das·sa बहुजनहितायba·hu·ja·na·hi·tā·ya बहुजनसुखायba·hu·ja·na·su·khā·ya लोकानुकम्पायlo·kā·nu·kam·pā·ya अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानन्”ति।de·va·ma·nus·sā·nan

      Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti.

      You should all recite these in concert, without disputing, so that this spiritual path may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.”

1162. 1162

      अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उट्ठहित्वाuṭ·ṭha·hit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सारिपुत्तंsā·ri·put·taṃ आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

      Atha kho bhagavā uṭṭhahitvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ āmantesi:

      Then the Buddha got up and said to Venerable Sāriputta,

1163. 1163

      “साधुsā·dhu साधु,sā·dhu सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta

      “sādhu sādhu, sāriputta,

      “Good, good, Sāriputta!

1164. 1164

      साधुsā·dhu खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सङ्गीतिपरियायंsaṅ·gī·ti·pa·ri·yā·yaṃ अभासी”ति।a·bhā·sī

      sādhu kho tvaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhūnaṁ saṅgītipariyāyaṁ abhāsī”ti.

      It’s good that you’ve taught this exposition of the reciting in concert.”

1165. 1165

      इदमवोचायस्माi·da·ma·vo·cā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तो,sā·ri·put·to समनुञ्ञोsa·ma·nuñ·ño सत्थाsat·thā अहोसि।a·ho·si

      Idamavocāyasmā sāriputto, samanuñño satthā ahosi.

      That is what Venerable Sāriputta said, and the Teacher concurred.

1166. 1166

      अत्तमनाat·ta·ma·nā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सारिपुत्तस्सsā·ri·put·tas·sa भासितंbhā·si·taṃ अभिनन्दुन्ति।a·bhi·nan·dun·ti

      Attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.

      Satisfied, the mendicants approved what Sāriputta said.

1167. 1167

      सङ्गीतिसुत्तंsaṅ·gī·ti·sut·taṃ निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ दसमं।da·sa·maṃ

      Saṅgītisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.

      (Pāli only)

Sources. Sanskrit: Satyavedaḥ, the New Testament in Sanskrit (Calcutta Baptist Missionaries, 1851; J. Wenger’s revision of W. Carey’s version). Digital text © 2018 SanskritBible.in, via eBible.org, licensed CC BY-SA 4.0; changed here: arranged by verse and every word linked to the dictionary (links made automatically). Old Testament Sanskrit: the Old Testament in Sanskrit, Calcutta Baptist Mission Press, 1848–1852 (public domain), read by OCR from the Internet Archive scans of the Boston University School of Theology copy; unproofread, with machine clean-up only. Pāli Canon: Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka Buddhavasse 2500 (based on the Vipassana Research Institute’s Chaṭṭha Saṅgāyana edition), from SuttaCentral bilara-data, CC0; Devanagari and pronunciation made automatically from the Roman text. Pāli English: Bhikkhu Sujato (suttas) and Bhikkhu Brahmali (Vinaya), SuttaCentral, CC0. Pāli word meanings: the Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary (Rhys Davids & Stede), corrected reprint © The Pali Text Society, CC BY-NC 3.0, digital text from BuddhaDust; word matching automatic. English: King James Version (1769), public domain; words the translators added are in italics. Word meanings and pronunciations: Monier-Williams, Sanskrit–English Dictionary (1872), via this site’s Sanskrit dictionary (CC BY-SA 4.0); English↔Sanskrit word matches made automatically and may need checking.